JP2014029543A - Liquid crystal display device - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To solve the problem that widening of view angle is required in a liquid crystal display cell.SOLUTION: In a liquid crystal display cell, a structure arrangement of pixel electrodes is devised to widen the view angle. Concretely, a structure arrangement is employed such that a first pixel electrode, a second pixel electrode, a third pixel electrode between the first pixel electrode and the second pixel electrode, and a common electrode are provided, the first pixel electrode has a first slit, the second pixel electrode has a second slit, and a direction of the first slit and a direction of the second slit are symmetrical across the third pixel electrode. Thus, the view angle in the liquid crystal cell can be widened.

Description

The present invention relates to an object, a method or a method for producing an object. In particular, the present invention relates to a display device or a semiconductor device, and more particularly to a display device in which a plurality of subpixels are provided in a pixel.

In recent years, thin display devices such as liquid crystals have been widely used for mobile phone displays, TVs, and the like. In particular, liquid crystal display devices have excellent features such as high definition, thinness, and low power consumption, and the market scale is expanding. On the other hand, these display devices are increasingly required to have improved performance. For example, a liquid crystal display device having a high viewing angle and a high image quality is desired.

As a technique for improving the viewing angle characteristics, a method has been proposed in which one pixel is divided into a plurality of subpixels (subpixels) to improve the viewing angle characteristics by changing the alignment state of the liquid crystal (
For example, Patent Document 1). Patent Document 2 proposes a method for improving the viewing angle dependency of γ characteristics in a liquid crystal display device.

JP 2006-276582 A JP 2005-189804 A

Viewing angle characteristics can be improved by providing subpixels in the pixels and changing the orientation state. However, it is not sufficient to add one subpixel to one pixel, and more subpixels are provided. Thus, the viewing angle characteristics can be further improved, and as a result, the image quality can be improved. On the other hand, when the number of subpixels increases, the aperture ratio may decrease.

When the aperture ratio decreases, the luminance decreases. In order to suppress a decrease in luminance, it is necessary to increase the luminance of the backlight. When the backlight brightness increases, the power consumption increases. Or the lifetime of the backlight itself is also shortened. Alternatively, the heat becomes high, adversely affecting liquid crystal materials and color filters, and the life of the display device is shortened. Or the arrangement | positioning density of wiring and an electrode will become high by the fall of an aperture ratio. As a result, wiring and electrodes are short-circuited or disconnected due to dust or etching residue. As a result, the manufacturing yield is lowered. If the yield is low, the cost increases accordingly.

In view of the above problems, an object of the present invention is to provide a display device in which viewing angle characteristics are improved by providing a plurality of subpixels in one pixel. Another object is to provide a display device that suppresses a decrease in aperture ratio even when a plurality of subpixels are provided. Another object is to provide a display device that suppresses a decrease in luminance. Another object is to provide a display device with reduced power consumption. Alternatively, it is an object to provide a display device in which a reduction in lifetime is suppressed. Alternatively, it is an object to provide a display device in which an increase in heat is suppressed. Alternatively, it is an object to provide a display device in which a manufacturing yield is improved. Another object is to provide a display device with reduced cost. Another object is to provide a display device with improved image quality.

The liquid crystal display device of the present invention includes a pixel having a first subpixel, a second subpixel, and a third subpixel, a scanning line, a signal line, a first capacitor wiring, and a second capacitor wiring. And a third capacitor wiring, and the first subpixel includes a first pixel electrode, a first transistor, and a first capacitor,
In the first transistor, the gate is electrically connected to the scan line, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the signal line, the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the first pixel electrode, In the first capacitor, the first electrode is electrically connected to the first capacitor wiring, the second electrode is electrically connected to the first pixel electrode, and the second subpixel is Second pixel electrode, second
The second transistor includes a gate electrically connected to the scan line, one of the source and the drain electrically connected to the signal line, and the other of the source and the drain connected to the signal line. The second capacitor element is electrically connected to the second pixel electrode. In the second capacitor element, the first electrode is electrically connected to the second capacitor wiring, and the second electrode is electrically connected to the second pixel electrode. The third subpixel includes a third pixel electrode, a third transistor, and a third capacitor, and the third transistor has a gate electrically connected to the scan line, a source Alternatively, one of the drain and the drain is electrically connected to the signal line, the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the third pixel electrode, and the third capacitor has the first electrode connected to the third capacitor wiring. Electrically connected, second
Are electrically connected to the third pixel electrode, the potentials of the first capacitor wiring and the second capacitor wiring change, and the potential of the third capacitor wiring is substantially constant. Features. In addition,
The potential of the third capacitor wiring is substantially constant means that the potential of the third capacitor wiring is always constant during the period in which the potential is applied to the third capacitor wiring. In this case, the case where the potential of the third capacitor wiring is not constant is also included. The partial period is preferably 10% or less, more preferably 1% of a period in which a potential is applied to the third capacitor wiring.
The following. In addition, the case where the potential of the third capacitor wiring fluctuates due to noise or the like is assumed to be included substantially uniformly.

The liquid crystal display device of the present invention includes a pixel having a first subpixel, a second subpixel, and a third subpixel, a plurality of scanning lines including a first scanning line, a signal line, The first sub-pixel includes a first pixel electrode, a first transistor, and a first capacitor, and the first transistor includes a gate and a first capacitor wiring. Is electrically connected to the first scan line, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the signal line, the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the first pixel electrode, and the first capacitor In the element, the first electrode is electrically connected to the first capacitor wiring, the second electrode is electrically connected to the first pixel electrode, and the second subpixel is the second pixel. An electrode, a second transistor, and a second capacitor, the second transistor having a gate connected to the first scan line; One of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the signal line, the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the second pixel electrode, and the second capacitor element includes the first electrode The second capacitor wiring is electrically connected, the second electrode is electrically connected to the second pixel electrode, and the third sub-pixel includes a third pixel electrode, a third transistor, and a second transistor The third transistor includes a gate electrically connected to the first scan line, one of the source and the drain electrically connected to the signal line, and the other of the source and the drain connected to the first scan line. The third capacitor element is electrically connected to a second scan line different from the first scan line, and the second electrode is electrically connected to the third pixel electrode. The first capacitor wiring and the second capacitor wiring are electrically connected to the pixel electrode, Position is characterized by change.

In addition, the liquid crystal display device of the present invention includes a pixel having a first subpixel, a second subpixel, a third subpixel, and a fourth subpixel, a scan line, a signal line, and a first capacitor. The first subpixel includes a first pixel electrode, a first transistor, and a first capacitor element. The first subpixel includes a wiring, a second capacitor wiring, a third capacitor wiring, and a fourth capacitor wiring. And the first transistor has a gate electrically connected to the scan line, one of the source and the drain electrically connected to the signal line, and the other of the source and the drain electrically connected to the first pixel electrode. The first capacitor is connected to the first capacitor and the first electrode is the first
The second electrode is electrically connected to the first pixel electrode, and the second sub-pixel includes a second pixel electrode, a second transistor, and a second transistor. Comprising a capacitive element;
In the second transistor, the gate is electrically connected to the scan line, one of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the signal line, and the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the second pixel electrode, In the second capacitor element, the first electrode is electrically connected to the second capacitor wiring, the second electrode is electrically connected to the second pixel electrode, and the third subpixel is Third pixel electrode, third
The third transistor has a gate electrically connected to the scan line, one of the source and the drain electrically connected to the signal line, and the other of the source and the drain connected to the signal line. The third capacitor element is electrically connected to the third pixel electrode. The third capacitor element has the first electrode electrically connected to the third capacitor wiring and the second electrode electrically connected to the third pixel electrode. The fourth subpixel includes a fourth pixel electrode, a fourth transistor, and a fourth capacitor, and the fourth transistor has a gate electrically connected to the scan line, a source Alternatively, one of the drain and the drain is electrically connected to the signal line, the other of the source and the drain is electrically connected to the fourth pixel electrode, and the fourth capacitor has the first electrode connected to the fourth capacitor wiring. Electrically connected, second
Are electrically connected to the fourth pixel electrode, the potentials of the first capacitor wiring and the second capacitor wiring change, and the potentials of the third capacitor wiring and the fourth capacitor wiring are It is characterized by being substantially constant.

Note that the display device of the present invention includes, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a light-emitting device including a light-emitting element typified by an organic light-emitting element (OLED) in each pixel, and a DMD (Digital Micromirror).
Device), PDP (Plasma Display Panel), FED (F
An active matrix display device such as field emission display) is included in the category. A passive matrix display device is also included.

Note that various types of switches can be used. Examples include electrical switches and mechanical switches. In other words, anything that can control the current flow,
It is not limited to a specific thing. For example, as a switch, a transistor (for example, bipolar transistor, MOS transistor, etc.), a diode (for example, PN diode, P, etc.)
IN diode, Schottky diode, MIM (Metal Insulator)
Metal diode, MIS (Metal Insulator Semiconductor)
uctor) diodes, diode-connected transistors, etc.), thyristors, etc. can be used. Alternatively, a logic circuit combining these can be used as a switch.

An example of a mechanical switch is a digital micromirror device (DMD),
There is a switch using MEMS (micro electro mechanical system) technology. The switch has an electrode that can be moved mechanically, and operates by controlling connection and disconnection by moving the electrode.

In the case where a transistor is used as a switch, the transistor operates as a mere switch, and thus the polarity (conductivity type) of the transistor is not particularly limited. However, when it is desired to suppress off-state current, it is desirable to use a transistor having a polarity with smaller off-state current. As a transistor with low off-state current, a transistor having an LDD region, a transistor having a multi-gate structure, and the like can be given. Alternatively, an N-channel transistor is preferably used in the case where the transistor operates as a switch when the potential of the source terminal of the transistor is close to the potential of the low potential power supply (Vss, GND, 0 V, or the like). On the other hand, it is desirable to use a P-channel transistor when operating in a state where the potential of the source terminal is close to the potential of the high potential side power supply (Vdd or the like). This is because an N-channel transistor operates when the source terminal is close to the potential of the low-potential side power supply, and a P-channel transistor operates when the source terminal is close to the potential of the high-potential side power supply. This is because the absolute value of the voltage between them can be increased, so that it can easily operate as a switch. Moreover, since the source follower operation is rarely performed, the output voltage is rarely reduced.

Note that both N-channel and P-channel transistors are used for CMOS.
A type of switch may be used as the switch. When a CMOS switch is used, a current flows when one of the P-channel transistor and the N-channel transistor is turned on, so that the switch can easily function as a switch. For example, the voltage can be appropriately output regardless of whether the voltage of the input signal to the switch is high or low. Furthermore, since the voltage amplitude value of the signal for turning on / off the switch can be reduced, the power consumption can be reduced.

Note that when a transistor is used as a switch, the switch has an input terminal (one of a source terminal or a drain terminal), an output terminal (the other of the source terminal or the drain terminal), and a terminal for controlling conduction (a gate terminal). doing. On the other hand, when a diode is used as the switch, the switch may not have a terminal for controlling conduction. Therefore, the use of a diode as a switch rather than a transistor can reduce the wiring for controlling the terminal.

In addition, when it is explicitly described that A and B are connected, A and B are electrically connected, and A and B are functionally connected. , A and B are directly connected. Here, A and B are objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers, etc.). Therefore, the predetermined connection relationship,
For example, it is not limited to the connection relationship shown in the figure or text, and includes things other than the connection relationship shown in the figure or text.

For example, when A and B are electrically connected, an element (for example, a switch, a transistor, a capacitor, an inductor, a resistance element, a diode, or the like) that enables electrical connection between A and B is provided. 1 or more may be arranged between A and B. Alternatively, when A and B are functionally connected, a circuit (for example, a logic circuit (an inverter, a NAND circuit, a NOR circuit, etc.), a signal conversion circuit that enables functional connection between A and B (DA conversion circuit, AD conversion circuit, gamma correction circuit, etc.), potential level conversion circuit (power supply circuit (boost circuit,
Step-down circuit), level shifter circuit that changes signal potential level), voltage source, current source,
Switching circuit, amplifier circuit (circuit that can increase signal amplitude or current, etc., operational amplifier,
One or more differential amplifier circuits, source follower circuits, buffer circuits, etc.), signal generation circuits, memory circuits, control circuits, etc.) may be arranged between A and B. Alternatively, when A and B are directly connected, A and B without interposing other elements or other circuits between A and B.
And may be directly connected.

Note that in the case where it is explicitly described that A and B are directly connected, when A and B are directly connected (that is, another element or other circuit between A and B). ) And A and B are electrically connected (that is, A and B are connected with another element or another circuit sandwiched between them). ).

Note that in the case where it is explicitly described that A and B are electrically connected, another element is connected between A and B (that is, between A and B). Or when A and B are functionally connected (that is, they are functionally connected with another circuit between A and B). And a case where A and B are directly connected (that is, a case where another element or another circuit is not connected between A and B). That is, when it is explicitly described that it is electrically connected, it is the same as when it is explicitly only described that it is connected.

Note that a display element, a display device that is a device including a display element, a light-emitting element, and a light-emitting device that is a device including a light-emitting element can have various modes and include various elements. For example, as a display element, a display device, a light-emitting element, or a light-emitting device, an EL element (an EL element including an organic substance and an inorganic substance, an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element), an electron-emitting element, a liquid crystal element, electronic ink, an electrophoretic element, Grating light bulb (GLV), plasma display (PD
P), a digital micromirror device (DMD), a piezoelectric ceramic display, a carbon nanotube, or the like, a display medium whose contrast, brightness, reflectance, transmittance, and the like are changed by an electromagnetic action can be used. Note that an EL display is used as a display device using an EL element, and a field emission display (FED) or a SED type flat display (SED: Surface-co) is used as a display device using an electron-emitting device.
As a display device using a liquid crystal element, such as a nudection electron-emitter display, a liquid crystal display (a transmissive liquid crystal display, a transflective liquid crystal display, a reflective liquid crystal display, a direct view liquid crystal display, a projection liquid crystal display), electronic ink, There is electronic paper as a display device using an electrophoretic element.

Note that an EL element is an element having an anode, a cathode, and an EL layer sandwiched between the anode and the cathode. The EL layer uses light emission (fluorescence) from singlet excitons, 3
Those using light emission (phosphorescence) from singlet excitons, those using light emission (fluorescence) from singlet excitons, and those using light emission (phosphorescence) from triplet excitons , Organic materials, inorganic materials, organic materials and inorganic materials, high molecular materials, low molecular materials, high molecular materials and low molecules A material containing any of these materials can be used. However, it is not limited to this, E
Various elements can be used as the L element.

The electron-emitting device is an element that draws electrons by concentrating a high electric field on a sharp cathode. For example, as an electron-emitting device, a Spindt type, a carbon nanotube (CNT) type, a metal-insulator-metal laminated MIM (Metal-Insulator-Metal) type, and a metal-insulator-semiconductor laminated MIS (Metal-Insulator). -Semicon
(ductor) type, MOS type, silicon type, thin film diode type, diamond type, surface conduction emitter SCD type, ode type, diamond type, surface conduction emitter SCD type, metal-insulator-semiconductor-metal thin film type, HEED, etc. A type, an EL type, a porous silicon type, a surface conduction (SED) type, or the like can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various types of electron-emitting devices can be used.

Note that a liquid crystal element is an element that controls transmission or non-transmission of light by an optical modulation action of liquid crystal, and includes a pair of electrodes and liquid crystal. Note that the optical modulation action of the liquid crystal is controlled by an electric field applied to the liquid crystal (including a horizontal electric field, a vertical electric field, or an oblique electric field). Liquid crystal elements include nematic liquid crystal, cholesteric liquid crystal, smectic liquid crystal, discotic liquid crystal, thermotropic liquid crystal, lyotropic liquid crystal, lyotropic liquid crystal, low molecular liquid crystal, polymer liquid crystal, ferroelectric liquid crystal, antiferroelectric liquid crystal, main chain. Type liquid crystal, side chain type polymer liquid crystal, plasma addressed liquid crystal (PDLC), banana type liquid crystal, TN (Twisted)
Nematic) mode, STN (Super Twisted Nematic) mode, IPS (In-Plane-Switching) mode, FFS (Fringe)
Field Switching mode, MVA (Multi-domain Ver.)
tick alignment mode, PVA (Patterned Vertic)
al Alignment), ASV (Advanced Super View) mode, ASM (Axial Symmetrical Aligned Micro-ce)
ll) mode, OCB (Optical Compensated Birefring)
ence) mode, ECB (Electrically Controlled Bird)
efficiency mode, FLC (Ferroelectric Liquid)
Crystal) mode, AFLC (Antiferroelectric Liquid)
d Crystal) mode, PDLC (Polymer Dispersed Liq)
uid Crystal) mode, guest host mode, etc. can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various liquid crystal elements can be used.

Electronic paper includes those displayed by molecules such as optical anisotropy and dye molecule orientation, those displayed by particles such as electrophoresis, particle movement, particle rotation, and phase change. It is displayed by moving, displayed by color development / phase change of molecules, displayed by light absorption of molecules, displayed by self-emission by combining electrons and holes, etc. . For example, as electronic paper, microcapsule type electrophoresis, horizontal movement type electrophoresis, vertical movement type electrophoresis, spherical twist ball, magnetic twist ball, cylindrical twist ball method, charged toner, electronic powder fluid, magnetophoretic type, magnetic heat sensitivity Formula, electrowetting, light scattering (transparent white turbidity), cholesteric liquid crystal / photoconductive layer, cholesteric liquid crystal, bistable nematic liquid crystal, ferroelectric liquid crystal, dichroic dye / liquid crystal dispersion type, movable film, leuco dye extinction Color, photochromic, electrochromic, electrodeposition, flexible organic EL, etc. can be used. However, it is not limited to this,
Various electronic papers can be used. Here, by using microcapsule electrophoresis, aggregation and precipitation of electrophoretic particles, which is a drawback of the electrophoresis system, can be solved. The electronic powder fluid has advantages such as high-speed response, high reflectivity, wide viewing angle, low power consumption, and memory properties.

Note that the plasma display encloses a rare gas with a substrate having an electrode formed on the surface and a substrate having an electrode and a minute groove formed on the surface and a phosphor layer formed in the groove facing each other at a narrow interval. It has a structure. In addition, a display can be performed by generating an ultraviolet-ray by applying a voltage between electrodes and making fluorescent substance light. As a plasma display, DC
It may be a type PDP or an AC type PDP. Here, as a plasma display panel, AS
W (Address While Sustain) drive, ADS (Address Display Sep) that divides subframe into reset period, address period, and sustain period
driven), CLEAR (Low Energy Address and R)
instruction of false control sequence) drive, AL
IS (Alternate Lightning of Surfaces) method, TER
An ES (Technology of Reciprocal Susfainer) drive or the like can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various types of plasma displays can be used.

Note that a display device that requires a light source, such as a liquid crystal display (transmission type liquid crystal display, transflective type liquid crystal display, reflection type liquid crystal display, direct view type liquid crystal display, projection type liquid crystal display), or a grating light valve (GLV) is used. As a light source for a display device using a conventional display device or a digital micromirror device (DMD), electroluminescence, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube, an LED, a laser light source, a mercury lamp, or the like can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various light sources can be used.

Note that various types of transistors can be used as the transistor. Therefore,
There is no limitation on the type of transistor used. For example, a thin film transistor (TFT) including a non-single-crystal semiconductor film typified by amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystalline (also referred to as semi-amorphous) silicon, or the like can be used. When using TFT, there are various advantages. For example, since manufacturing can be performed at a lower temperature than that of single crystal silicon, manufacturing cost can be reduced or a manufacturing apparatus can be increased in size. Since the manufacturing apparatus can be enlarged, it can be manufactured on a large substrate. Therefore, since a large number of display devices can be manufactured at the same time, it can be manufactured at low cost. Furthermore, since the manufacturing temperature is low, a substrate with low heat resistance can be used. Therefore, a transistor can be manufactured on a transparent substrate. Then, light transmission through the display element can be controlled using a transistor over a transparent substrate.
Alternatively, since the thickness of the transistor is small, part of the film included in the transistor can transmit light. Therefore, the aperture ratio can be improved.

Note that by using a catalyst (such as nickel) when manufacturing polycrystalline silicon, it is possible to further improve crystallinity and to manufacture a transistor with favorable electrical characteristics. As a result, a gate driver circuit (scan line driver circuit) and a source driver circuit (signal line driver circuit)
The signal processing circuit (signal generation circuit, gamma correction circuit, DA conversion circuit, etc.) can be integrally formed on the substrate.

Note that when a microcrystalline silicon is manufactured, by using a catalyst (such as nickel), crystallinity can be further improved and a transistor with favorable electrical characteristics can be manufactured. At this time, crystallinity can be improved only by performing heat treatment without performing laser light irradiation. As a result, part of the gate driver circuit (scanning line driver circuit) and the source driver circuit (analog switch, etc.) can be formed integrally on the substrate. Further, when laser irradiation is not performed for crystallization, unevenness in crystallinity of silicon can be suppressed. Therefore, a beautiful image can be displayed.

However, it is possible to produce polycrystalline silicon or microcrystalline silicon without using a catalyst (such as nickel).

Note that it is preferable to improve the crystallinity of silicon to be polycrystalline or microcrystalline, but the present invention is not limited to this. The crystallinity of silicon may be improved only in a partial region of the panel. The crystallinity can be selectively improved by selectively irradiating laser light. For example, the laser beam may be irradiated only to the peripheral circuit region that is a region other than the pixel. Alternatively, the laser beam may be irradiated only on a region such as a gate driver circuit or a source driver circuit. Or you may irradiate a laser beam only to the area | region (for example, analog switch) of a source driver circuit. as a result,
Silicon crystallization can be improved only in regions where the circuit needs to operate at high speed. Since it is not necessary to operate the pixel region at high speed, the pixel circuit can be operated without any problem even if the crystallinity is not improved. Since the region for improving crystallinity is small, the manufacturing process can be shortened, the throughput can be improved, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, the manufacturing cost can be reduced because the number of manufacturing apparatuses required is small.

Alternatively, a transistor can be formed using a semiconductor substrate, an SOI substrate, or the like. Accordingly, a transistor with small variations in characteristics, size, shape, and the like, high current supply capability, and small size can be manufactured. When these transistors are used, low power consumption of the circuit or high integration of the circuit can be achieved.

Alternatively, a transistor having a compound semiconductor or an oxide semiconductor such as ZnO, a-InGaZnO, SiGe, GaAs, IZO, ITO, or SnO, or a thin film transistor in which these compound semiconductor or oxide semiconductor is thinned can be used. I can do it. Accordingly, the manufacturing temperature can be lowered, and for example, the transistor can be manufactured at room temperature. As a result, the transistor can be formed directly on a substrate having low heat resistance, such as a plastic substrate or a film substrate. These compound semiconductors or oxide semiconductors are
It can be used not only for the channel portion of the transistor but also for other purposes. For example, these compound semiconductors or oxide semiconductors can be used as resistance elements, pixel electrodes, and transparent electrodes. Furthermore, since these can be formed or formed simultaneously with the transistor, cost can be reduced.

Alternatively, a transistor formed using an inkjet method or a printing method can be used. By these, it can manufacture at room temperature, manufacture at a low vacuum degree, or can manufacture on a large sized board | substrate. Further, since the transistor can be manufactured without using a mask (reticle), the layout of the transistor can be easily changed. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to use a resist, the material cost is reduced and the number of processes can be reduced. Further, since the film is formed only on the necessary portion, the material is not wasted and the cost can be reduced as compared with the manufacturing method in which the film is formed on the entire surface and then etched.

Alternatively, a transistor including an organic semiconductor or a carbon nanotube can be used. Thus, a transistor can be formed over a substrate that can be bent.
Therefore, it can be strong against impact.

In addition, transistors with various structures can be used. For example, a MOS transistor, a junction transistor, a bipolar transistor, or the like can be used as the transistor. By using a MOS transistor, the size of the transistor can be reduced. Therefore, a large number of transistors can be mounted. By using a bipolar transistor, a large current can flow. Therefore, the circuit can be operated at high speed.

Note that a MOS transistor, a bipolar transistor, or the like may be formed over one substrate. Thereby, low power consumption, miniaturization, high-speed operation, etc. can be realized.

In addition, various transistors can be used.

Note that the transistor can be formed using various substrates. The kind of board | substrate is not limited to a specific thing. As a substrate on which a transistor is formed, for example, a single crystal substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a wood substrate, a cloth substrate (natural fiber (silk, cotton, hemp) ), Synthetic fibers (nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or recycled fibers (including acetate, cupra, rayon, recycled polyester), leather substrates, rubber substrates, stainless steel substrates, substrates with stainless steel foil, etc. Can be used. Alternatively, the skin (skin surface, dermis) or subcutaneous tissue of an animal such as a human may be used as the substrate. Alternatively, a transistor may be formed using a certain substrate, and then the transistor may be transferred to another substrate, and the transistor may be disposed on another substrate. As a substrate to which the transistor is transferred, a single crystal substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a wood substrate, a cloth substrate (natural fiber (silk, cotton, hemp), Use synthetic fibers (nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or recycled fibers (including acetate, cupra, rayon, recycled polyester), leather substrates, rubber substrates, stainless steel substrates, substrates with stainless steel foil, etc. Can do. Or the skin of human animals (skin surface, dermis)
Alternatively, subcutaneous tissue may be used as the substrate. Alternatively, a transistor may be formed using a certain substrate, and the substrate may be polished and thinned. As a substrate to be polished, a single crystal substrate, SOI
Substrate, glass substrate, quartz substrate, plastic substrate, paper substrate, cellophane substrate, stone substrate,
Wood substrate, cloth substrate (including natural fiber (silk, cotton, hemp), synthetic fiber (nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or recycled fiber (acetate, cupra, rayon, recycled polyester), leather substrate, rubber substrate, stainless steel A still substrate, a substrate having stainless steel, still foil, or the like can be used. Alternatively, the skin (skin surface, dermis) or subcutaneous tissue of an animal such as a human may be used as the substrate. By using these substrates, formation of transistors with good characteristics, formation of transistors with low power consumption, manufacture of devices that are difficult to break,
The heat resistance can be imparted, the weight can be reduced, or the thickness can be reduced.

Note that the structure of the transistor can take a variety of forms. It is not limited to a specific configuration. For example, a multi-gate structure having two or more gate electrodes may be used. When the multi-gate structure is employed, the channel regions are connected in series, so that a plurality of transistors are connected in series. With the multi-gate structure, the off-state current can be reduced and the reliability can be improved by improving the withstand voltage of the transistor. Or, when operating in the saturation region, the drain-source current does not change much even when the drain-source voltage changes, and the slope of the voltage / current characteristic is flat due to the multi-gate structure. it can. By using the characteristic that the slope of the voltage / current characteristic is flat, an ideal current source circuit and an active load having a very high resistance value can be realized. As a result, a differential circuit or a current mirror circuit with good characteristics can be realized. Alternatively, a structure in which gate electrodes are arranged above and below the channel may be employed. With the structure in which the gate electrodes are arranged above and below the channel, the channel region increases, so that the current value can be increased or the S value can be reduced because a depletion layer can be easily formed. When gate electrodes are provided above and below a channel, a structure in which a plurality of transistors are connected in parallel is obtained.

Alternatively, a structure in which a gate electrode is disposed over a channel region may be employed, or a structure in which a gate electrode is disposed under a channel region may be employed. Alternatively, a normal stagger structure or an inverted stagger structure may be used, the channel region may be divided into a plurality of regions, the channel regions may be connected in parallel, or the channel regions may be connected in series. Good. Also,
A source electrode or a drain electrode may overlap with the channel region (or a part thereof).
With the structure in which the source electrode or the drain electrode overlaps with the channel region (or part thereof), it is possible to prevent electric charges from being accumulated in part of the channel region and unstable operation. Further, an LDD region may be provided. By providing the LDD region, the off-state current can be reduced or the reliability can be improved by improving the withstand voltage of the transistor. Or L
By providing the DD region, when operating in the saturation region, even if the drain-source voltage changes, the drain-source current does not change so much and the slope of the voltage / current characteristic is flat. it can.

Note that various types of transistors can be used, and the transistor can be formed using various substrates. Therefore, all the circuits necessary for realizing a predetermined function may be formed on the same substrate. For example, all the circuits necessary for realizing a predetermined function may be formed using a glass substrate, a plastic substrate, a single crystal substrate, or an SOI substrate, and are formed using various substrates. Also good. Since all the circuits necessary to realize a given function are formed using the same substrate, the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of components, or the reliability can be improved by reducing the number of connection points with circuit components. Can be planned. Alternatively, a part of the circuit necessary for realizing the predetermined function is formed on a certain substrate, and another part of the circuit necessary for realizing the predetermined function is formed on another substrate. It may be. That is, not all the circuits necessary for realizing a predetermined function may be formed using the same substrate. For example, a part of a circuit necessary for realizing a predetermined function is formed using a transistor over a glass substrate, and another part of a circuit required for realizing a predetermined function is a single crystal substrate. The IC chip formed on the single crystal substrate and formed of a transistor may be connected to the glass substrate by COG (Chip On Glass), and the IC chip may be arranged on the glass substrate. Alternatively, the IC chip is TAB (T
Ape Automated Bonding) or a printed circuit board may be used to connect to the glass substrate. As described above, since a part of the circuit is formed on the same substrate, the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of components, or the reliability can be improved by reducing the number of connection points with circuit components. In addition, since the power consumption of a circuit having a high driving voltage or a high driving frequency is large, such a circuit is not formed on the same substrate. Instead, for example, on a single crystal substrate. If the circuit of that portion is formed and an IC chip constituted by the circuit is used, an increase in power consumption can be prevented.

One pixel means one element whose brightness can be controlled. Therefore, as an example, one pixel represents one color element, and brightness is expressed by one color element.
Therefore, at that time, in the case of a color display device composed of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color elements, the minimum unit of an image is an R pixel, G pixel, and B pixel. It is assumed to be composed of three pixels. Note that the color elements are not limited to three colors, and three or more colors may be used, or colors other than RGB may be used. For example, RGBW (W is white) may be added by adding white. R
For example, one or more colors such as yellow, cyan, magenta, emerald green, and vermilion may be added to GB. Also, for example, a color similar to at least one of RGB is changed to RGB
May be added to For example, R, G, B1, and B2 may be used. B1 and B2 are both blue, but have slightly different frequencies. Similarly, R1, R2, G, and B may be used. By using such color elements, it is possible to perform display closer to the real thing. Alternatively, power consumption can be reduced by using such color elements. Also,
As another example, when controlling brightness using a plurality of areas for one color element,
One area may be a pixel. Therefore, as an example, when area gradation is performed or when sub-pixels (sub-pixels) are provided, there are a plurality of brightness control areas for one color element, and the gradation is expressed as a whole. However, one pixel for controlling the brightness may be one pixel. Therefore, in that case, one color element is composed of a plurality of pixels. Alternatively, even if there are a plurality of areas for controlling the brightness in one color element, they may be combined into one pixel. Therefore, in that case, one color element is composed of one pixel. When brightness is controlled using a plurality of areas for one color element, the size of the area contributing to display may be different depending on the pixel. In addition, in a plurality of brightness control areas for one color element, a signal supplied to each may be slightly different to widen the viewing angle. That is, 1
For one color element, the potentials of the pixel electrodes in each of the plurality of regions may be different from each other. As a result, the voltage applied to the liquid crystal molecules is different for each pixel electrode. Therefore, the viewing angle can be widened.

In addition, when it is explicitly described as one pixel (for three colors), it is assumed that three pixels of R, G, and B are considered as one pixel. When it is explicitly described as one pixel (for one color), it is assumed that when there are a plurality of areas for one color element, they are collectively considered as one pixel.

Note that in this document (the specification, the claims, the drawings, or the like), the pixels may be arranged (arranged) in a matrix. Here, the pixel being arranged (arranged) in the matrix includes a case where the pixels are arranged in a straight line or a jagged line in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. Thus, for example, three color elements (for example, R
When full-color display is performed in GB), this includes the case where stripes are arranged and the case where dots of three color elements are arranged in delta. Furthermore, the case where a Bayer is arranged is included. Note that the color elements are not limited to three colors, and may be more than that, for example, RGBW (W is white) or RGB in which one or more colors of yellow, cyan, magenta, etc. are added.
Further, the size of the display area may be different for each dot of the color element. Thereby, it is possible to reduce power consumption or extend the life of the display element.

Note that an active matrix method in which an active element is included in a pixel or a passive matrix method in which an active element is not included in a pixel can be used.

In the active matrix method, not only transistors but also various active elements (active elements and nonlinear elements) can be used as active elements (active elements and nonlinear elements). For example, MIM (Metal Insulator Metal) or TFD (
It is also possible to use (Thin Film Diode) or the like. Since these elements have few manufacturing steps, manufacturing cost can be reduced or yield can be improved. Furthermore, since the size of the element is small, the aperture ratio can be improved, and low power consumption and high luminance can be achieved.

Note that as a method other than the active matrix method, a passive matrix type that does not use active elements (active elements, nonlinear elements) can be used. Since no active element (active element or nonlinear element) is used, the number of manufacturing steps is small, and manufacturing cost can be reduced or yield can be improved. In addition, since an active element (an active element or a non-linear element) is not used, the aperture ratio can be improved, and low power consumption and high luminance can be achieved.

Note that a transistor is an element having at least three terminals including a gate, a drain, and a source. The transistor has a channel region between the drain region and the source region, and the drain region, the channel region, and the source region. A current can be passed through. Here, since the source and the drain vary depending on the structure and operating conditions of the transistor, it is difficult to limit which is the source or the drain. Therefore, in this document (the specification, the claims, the drawings, and the like), a region functioning as a source and a drain may not be referred to as a source or a drain. In that case, as an example, there are cases where they are referred to as a first terminal and a second terminal, respectively. Alternatively, they may be referred to as a first electrode and a second electrode, respectively. Alternatively, they may be referred to as a source region and a drain region.

Note that the transistor may be an element having at least three terminals including a base, an emitter, and a collector. Similarly, in this case, the emitter and collector are connected to the first terminal and the second terminal.
Sometimes referred to as a terminal.

Note that a gate refers to the whole or part of a gate electrode and a gate wiring (also referred to as a gate line, a gate signal line, a scan line, a scan signal line, or the like). A gate electrode refers to a portion of a conductive film that overlaps with a semiconductor forming a channel region with a gate insulating film interposed therebetween. Note that a part of the gate electrode is an LDD (Lightly Dop
ed Drain) region or source region (or drain region) may overlap with the gate insulating film. A gate wiring is a wiring for connecting the gate electrodes of each transistor, a wiring for connecting the gate electrodes of each pixel, or a wiring for connecting the gate electrode to another wiring. Say.

However, there are portions (regions, conductive films, wirings, etc.) that also function as gate electrodes and function as gate wirings. Such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may be called a gate electrode or a gate wiring. That is, there is a region where the gate electrode and the gate wiring cannot be clearly distinguished. For example, when a part of the gate wiring extended and the channel region overlap, the portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) functions as the gate wiring, but also as the gate electrode It is functioning. Therefore, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may be called a gate electrode or a gate wiring.

Note that a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) formed using the same material as the gate electrode and connected to form the same island (island) as the gate electrode may be called a gate electrode. Similarly, a portion (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) formed using the same material as the gate wiring and connected by forming the same island (island) as the gate wiring may be referred to as a gate wiring. In a strict sense, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may not overlap with the channel region or may not have a function of being connected to another gate electrode. However, a part (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) that is formed of the same material as the gate electrode or gate wiring and is connected to form the same island (island) as the gate electrode or gate wiring due to specifications at the time of manufacture. There is. Therefore, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may also be referred to as a gate electrode or a gate wiring.

Note that, for example, in a multi-gate transistor, one gate electrode and another gate electrode are often connected to each other by a conductive film formed using the same material as the gate electrode. Such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) is a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) for connecting the gate electrode to the gate electrode, and may be called a gate wiring. These transistors can be regarded as a single transistor, and may be referred to as a gate electrode. That is, a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) that is formed using the same material as the gate electrode or gate wiring and is connected to form the same island (island) as the gate electrode or gate wiring is connected to the gate electrode or gate wiring. You can call it. Further, for example, a conductive film in a portion where the gate electrode and the gate wiring are connected and formed of a material different from the gate electrode or the gate wiring may be referred to as a gate electrode. You may call it.

Note that a gate terminal means a part of a part of a gate electrode (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like) or a part electrically connected to the gate electrode (a region, a conductive film, a wiring, or the like). .

Note that in the case of calling a gate wiring, a gate line, a gate signal line, a scanning line, a scanning signal line, or the like, the gate of the transistor may not be connected to the wiring. In this case, the gate wiring, the gate line, the gate signal line, the scanning line, and the scanning signal line are simultaneously formed with the wiring formed in the same layer as the gate of the transistor, the wiring formed of the same material as the gate of the transistor, or the gate of the transistor. It may mean a deposited wiring. Examples include a storage capacitor wiring, a power supply line, a reference potential supply wiring, and the like.

Note that a source refers to the whole or part of a source region, a source electrode, and a source wiring (also referred to as a source line, a source signal line, a data line, a data signal line, or the like). The source region refers to a semiconductor region containing a large amount of P-type impurities (such as boron and gallium) and N-type impurities (such as phosphorus and arsenic). Therefore, a region containing a little P-type impurity or N-type impurity, that is, a so-called LDD (Lightly Doped Drain) region is not included in the source region. A source electrode refers to a portion of a conductive layer which is formed using a material different from that of a source region and is electrically connected to the source region. However, the source electrode may be referred to as a source electrode including the source region. The source wiring is a wiring for connecting the source electrodes of the transistors, a wiring for connecting the source electrodes of each pixel, or a wiring for connecting the source electrode to another wiring. Say.

However, there are portions (regions, conductive films, wirings, and the like) that also function as source electrodes and function as source wirings. Such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may be called a source electrode or a source wiring. That is, there is a region where the source electrode and the source wiring cannot be clearly distinguished. For example, in the case where a part of the source wiring that is arranged to extend and the source region overlap, the portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) functions as the source wiring, but as the source electrode Will also work. Thus, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may be called a source electrode or a source wiring.

Note that a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) that is formed using the same material as the source electrode and forms the same island (island) as the source electrode, or a portion (region) that connects the source electrode and the source electrode , Conductive film, wiring, etc.) may also be referred to as source electrodes. Further, a portion overlapping with the source region may be called a source electrode. Similarly, a region formed of the same material as the source wiring and connected by forming the same island as the source wiring may be called a source wiring. Such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may not have a function of connecting to another source electrode in a strict sense. However, there are portions (regions, conductive films, wirings, and the like) that are formed of the same material as the source electrode or the source wiring and connected to the source electrode or the source wiring because of specifications in manufacturing. Therefore, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) may also be referred to as a source electrode or a source wiring.

Note that, for example, a conductive film in a portion where the source electrode and the source wiring are connected and formed using a material different from that of the source electrode or the source wiring may be referred to as a source electrode. You may call it.

Note that a source terminal refers to a part of a source region, a source electrode, or a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, or the like) electrically connected to the source electrode.

In addition, when calling a source wiring, a source line, a source signal line, a data line, a data signal line, etc.
In some cases, the source (drain) of the transistor is not connected to the wiring. In this case, the source wiring, the source line, the source signal line, the data line, and the data signal line are the wiring formed in the same layer as the source (drain) of the transistor and the wiring formed of the same material as the source (drain) of the transistor. Alternatively, it may mean a wiring formed simultaneously with the source (drain) of the transistor. Examples include a storage capacitor wiring, a power supply line, a reference potential supply wiring, and the like.

The drain is the same as the source.

Note that a semiconductor device refers to a device having a circuit including a semiconductor element (a transistor, a diode, a thyristor, or the like). Furthermore, a device that can function by utilizing semiconductor characteristics may be called a semiconductor device. Alternatively, a device including a semiconductor material is referred to as a semiconductor device.

Note that a display element means an optical modulation element, a liquid crystal element, a light emitting element, an EL element (an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element or an EL element containing an organic substance and an inorganic substance), an electron-emitting element, an electrophoretic element, a discharge element, and a light reflection An element, a light diffraction element, a digital micromirror device (DMD), etc. are said. However, it is not limited to this.

Note that a display device refers to a device having a display element. Note that the display device may include a plurality of pixels including a display element. Note that the display device may include a peripheral driver circuit that drives a plurality of pixels. Note that the peripheral driver circuit that drives the plurality of pixels may be formed over the same substrate as the plurality of pixels. Note that the display device includes a peripheral drive circuit arranged on the substrate by wire bonding or bumps, an IC chip connected by so-called chip-on-glass (COG), or an IC chip connected by TAB or the like. May be. Note that the display device may include a flexible printed circuit (FPC) to which an IC chip, a resistor element, a capacitor element, an inductor, a transistor, and the like are attached. Note that the display device may include a printed wiring board (PWB) connected via a flexible printed circuit (FPC) or the like to which an IC chip, a resistor element, a capacitor element, an inductor, a transistor, or the like is attached. Note that the display device may include an optical sheet such as a polarizing plate or a retardation plate. Note that the display device may include a lighting device, a housing, a voice input / output device, an optical sensor, and the like. Here, the illumination device such as the backlight unit may include a light guide plate, a prism sheet, a diffusion sheet, a reflection sheet, a light source (LED, cold cathode tube, etc.), a cooling device (water cooling type, air cooling type) and the like. good.

Note that the lighting device refers to a device including a backlight unit, a light guide plate, a prism sheet, a diffusion sheet, a reflective sheet, a light source (such as an LED, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube), a cooling device, and the like.

Note that a light-emitting device refers to a device having a light-emitting element or the like. In the case where the display element includes a light-emitting element, the light-emitting device is one example of the display device.

In addition, a reflection apparatus means the apparatus which has a light reflection element, a light diffraction element, a light reflection electrode, etc.

Note that a liquid crystal display device refers to a display device having a liquid crystal element. Liquid crystal display devices include direct view type, projection type, transmission type, reflection type, and transflective type.

Note that a driving device refers to a device having a semiconductor element, an electric circuit, and an electronic circuit. For example, a transistor that controls input of a signal from a source signal line into a pixel (sometimes referred to as a selection transistor or a switching transistor), a transistor that supplies voltage or current to a pixel electrode, or a voltage or current to a light-emitting element A transistor that supplies the voltage is an example of a driving device. Further, a circuit for supplying a signal to the gate signal line (sometimes referred to as a gate driver or a gate line driver circuit) and a circuit for supplying a signal to the source signal line (sometimes referred to as a source driver or source line driver circuit). ) Is an example of a driving device.

Note that a display device, a semiconductor device, a lighting device, a cooling device, a light-emitting device, a reflecting device, a driving device, and the like may overlap with each other. For example, the display device may include a semiconductor device and a light-emitting device. Alternatively, the semiconductor device may include a display device and a driving device.

In addition, when it is explicitly described that B is formed on A or B is formed on A, it is limited that B is formed in direct contact with A. Not. The case where it is not in direct contact, that is, the case where another object is interposed between A and B is also included. Here, A and B are objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers,
Etc.).

Therefore, for example, when it is explicitly described that the layer B is formed on the layer A (or on the layer A), the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A. And the case where another layer (for example, layer C or layer D) is formed in direct contact with the layer A, and the layer B is formed in direct contact therewith. Note that another layer (for example, the layer C or the layer D) may be a single layer or a multilayer.

Further, the same applies to the case where B is explicitly described as being formed above A, and is not limited to the direct contact of B on A. This includes the case where another object is interposed in. Therefore, for example, when the layer B is formed above the layer A, the case where the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A and the case where another layer is formed in direct contact with the layer A. (For example, the layer C or the layer D) is formed, and the layer B is formed in direct contact therewith. Note that another layer (for example, the layer C or the layer D) may be a single layer or a multilayer.

In addition, when it is explicitly described that B is formed in direct contact with A, it includes a case in which B is formed in direct contact with A. It shall not be included when an object is present.

The same applies to the case where B is below A or B is below A.

In addition, about what is explicitly described as singular, it is preferable that it is singular.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of them is also possible. Similarly, a plurality that is explicitly described as a plurality is preferably a plurality. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number can be singular.

Viewing angle characteristics can be improved by providing three or more subpixels in one pixel and changing the voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer of each subpixel to change the alignment state. Further, by providing the storage capacitor wiring in common between adjacent pixels, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the aperture ratio even when a plurality of subpixels are provided. In addition, a display device with excellent contrast can be obtained.
In addition, a display device with excellent display quality can be provided. In addition, it is possible to provide a display device that is not easily affected by noise and can perform a beautiful display. Alternatively, a display device in which display deterioration is unlikely to occur can be provided. Alternatively, a display device with excellent product life can be provided.

FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates an example of a method for driving a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates an example of a method for driving a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates an example of a method for driving a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates an example of a method for driving a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates an example of a method for driving a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates an example of a method for driving a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates an example of a method for driving a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates an example of a method for driving a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates an example of a method for driving a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates an example of a method for driving a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates a structural example of a pixel of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates an example of a method for driving a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates an example of a method for driving a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 illustrates an example of a method for driving a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the periphery structural member of the display apparatus which concerns on this invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. 4A and 4B illustrate an example of a method for manufacturing a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 16 shows an electronic device using a display device according to the invention. FIG. 16 shows an electronic device using a display device according to the invention. FIG. 16 shows an electronic device using a display device according to the invention. FIG. 16 shows an electronic device using a display device according to the invention. FIG. 16 shows an electronic device using a display device according to the invention. FIG. 16 shows an electronic device using a display device according to the invention. FIG. 16 shows an electronic device using a display device according to the invention. FIG. 16 shows an electronic device using a display device according to the invention. FIG. 16 shows an electronic device using a display device according to the invention. FIG. 16 shows an electronic device using a display device according to the invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 shows an example of a layout of subpixels in a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 shows an example of a layout of subpixels in a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 shows an example of a layout of subpixels in a display device according to the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the periphery structural member of the display apparatus which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the periphery structural member of the display apparatus which concerns on this invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 6 illustrates a structural example of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 shows a driving method of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 shows a driving method of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 shows a driving method of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 shows a driving method of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 shows a driving method of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 shows a driving method of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 shows a driving method of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 shows a driving method of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 shows a driving method of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 9 shows a driving method of a display device according to the present invention. FIG. 16 shows an electronic device using a display device according to the invention. FIG. 16 shows an electronic device using a display device according to the invention. FIG. 16 shows an electronic device using a display device according to the invention. FIG. 16 shows an electronic device using a display device according to the invention. FIG. 16 shows an electronic device using a display device according to the invention.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention can be implemented in many different modes, and those skilled in the art can easily understand that the modes and details can be variously changed without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention. Is done. Therefore, the present invention is not construed as being limited to the description of this embodiment mode. Note that in all the drawings for describing the embodiments, the same portions or portions having similar functions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and repetitive description thereof is omitted.

(Embodiment 1)
In this embodiment mode, a structural example of a display device of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

The display device described in this embodiment includes a plurality of pixels, and each pixel includes a plurality of subpixels. The configuration of one pixel will be described with reference to FIG.

The pixel shown in FIG. 1 shows a configuration in which three subpixels are provided. The first subpixel 110 includes a first liquid crystal layer 111, a first capacitor 112, and a first transistor 113. Similarly, the second subpixel 120 includes a second liquid crystal layer 121, a second capacitor 122, and a second transistor 123, and the third subpixel 130 includes a third liquid crystal layer 131, a second liquid crystal layer 131, and a second transistor 123. 3 capacitor 132 and third transistor 133 are provided. Note that here, a configuration in which a transistor is provided is shown, but another switching element such as a diode may be provided.

The first liquid crystal layer 111, the second liquid crystal layer 121, and the third liquid crystal layer 131 each have a pixel electrode, a common electrode, and a liquid crystal controlled by them. The common electrode can be provided in common for each sub-pixel. However, it is not limited to this. Hereinafter, the pixel electrode included in the first liquid crystal layer 111 is the first pixel electrode, the pixel electrode included in the second liquid crystal layer 121 is the second pixel electrode, and the pixel electrode included in the third liquid crystal layer 131 is the third pixel electrode. This is referred to as a pixel electrode.

The first capacitor 112, the second capacitor 122, and the third capacitor 132 can each have a structure in which an insulating film is provided between the first electrode and the second electrode included in each of the first capacitor 112, the second capacitor 122, and the third capacitor 132. A first electrode,
As the second electrode, a conductive film, a semiconductor film, a semiconductor film into which an impurity element is introduced, an oxide semiconductor film, or the like can be used.

In the first transistor 113, a gate electrode is connected to a wiring that can function as a scanning line (hereinafter referred to as “scanning line 101”), and one of a source and a drain that can function as a signal line (hereinafter, referred to as a signal line) The other of the source and the drain is connected to the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111 and the second electrode of the first capacitor 112.

The second transistor 123 has a gate electrode connected to the scan line 101, one of a source and a drain connected to the signal line 102, and the other of the source and the drain connected to the second liquid crystal layer 121. And the second electrode of the second capacitor 122.

The third transistor 133 has a gate electrode connected to the scan line 101, one of a source and a drain connected to the signal line 102, and the other of the source and the drain connected to the third liquid crystal layer 131. And the second electrode of the third capacitor 132.

The first capacitor 112 includes a wiring (hereinafter referred to as “first capacitor”) in which the first electrode can function as a capacitor wiring.
The second electrode is connected to the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111.

In addition, the second capacitor element 122 includes a wiring (hereinafter, “
The second electrode is connected to the second pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal layer 121.

Further, the third capacitor 132 has a wiring (hereinafter, “
The second electrode is connected to the third pixel electrode of the third liquid crystal layer 131.

In addition, the first capacitor wiring 114, the second capacitor wiring 124, and the third capacitor wiring 134 may be provided one by one so as to correspond to each pixel, but are shared with wirings of adjacent pixels. It is good also as a structure provided.

For example, as illustrated in FIG. 2, in the plurality of pixels 100 a to 100 f, the pixel 100 b
The pixel 100a and the first capacitor wiring 114 are shared, and the pixel 100c, the second capacitor wiring 124, and the third capacitor wiring 134 are shared. In this manner, by providing wirings among the pixels, it is possible to reduce the number of wirings and improve the aperture ratio.

Alternatively, as illustrated in FIG. 13, in the plurality of pixels 100 a to 100 f, the pixel 100 b is
It is also possible to share the pixel 100a with the first capacitor wiring 114, share the pixel 100c with the second capacitor wiring 124, and arrange the third capacitor wiring 134 for each pixel.

In addition, the first capacitor wiring 114 may have a single structure or a plurality of the plurality of pixels. Similarly, the second capacitor wiring 124 and the third capacitor wiring 134 may be provided with one or a plurality of pixels in a plurality of pixels.

Next, a driving method of the display device having the pixel shown in FIG. 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 3 illustrates the potential Vg of the scanning line 101, the potential Vs of the signal line 102, the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114, the potential Vcs2 of the second capacitor wiring 124, the potential Vcs3 of the third capacitor wiring, The potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the liquid crystal layer 111, the potential Vlc2 of the second pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal layer 121, the potential Vlc3 of the third pixel electrode of the third liquid crystal layer 131, and the potential Vcom of the common electrode Is shown.

Note that in the following description, the connection point of the other of the source and drain of the first transistor 113, the first pixel electrode, and the second electrode of the first capacitor 112 is defined as the first node α, the second
The second node β, the other of the source and the drain of the third transistor 133, the second of the source and the drain of the transistor 123, the second pixel electrode and the second electrode of the second capacitor 122 The connection point between the third pixel electrode and the second electrode of the third capacitor 122 is a third node γ. A case where the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114 and the potential Vcs2 of the second capacitor wiring 124 are changed to make the potential Vcs3 of the third capacitor wiring 134 substantially constant will be described.

In FIG. 3, when T1 is reached, the potential Vg of the scanning line 101 is changed from low to high (
high), the first transistor 113, the second transistor 123, and the third transistor 133 are turned on, and signals are sent to the first pixel electrode, the second pixel electrode, and the third pixel electrode. A potential Vs of the line 102 is applied. Further, Vs is also applied to the second electrode of the first capacitor 112, the second electrode of the second capacitor 122, and the second electrode of the third capacitor 132, so that the capacitor is charged. Is called.

In FIG. 3, since the potential Vg of the scanning line 101 changes from high to low when T2, the first transistor 113, the second transistor 123, and the third transistor 13 are changed.
3 is turned off, the first pixel electrode to the third pixel electrode, the first capacitor element 112,
The second capacitor element 122 and the third capacitor element 132 are electrically insulated from the signal line 102.
As a result, the first node α, the second node β, and the third node γ are in a floating state.

In FIG. 3, when T3 is reached, since the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114 changes from high to low, the potential of the first node α in the floating state also changes. The amount of change in the potential of the node α is determined from the relationship between the capacitance of the first liquid crystal layer 111 and the capacitance of the first capacitor 112. That is, the amount of change in the potential of the node α is determined by capacitively dividing the amplitude value of the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114.

If the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111 and the capacitance value of the first capacitor 112 are the same, the amount of change in the potential of the node α is the potential of the first capacitor wiring 114. This is approximately equal to half the amount of change in Vcs1. Alternatively, when the capacitance value of the first capacitor 112 is smaller than the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111, the amount of change in the potential of the node α is the first capacitance wiring 11.
4 is smaller than half the amount of change in the potential Vcs1. Alternatively, when the capacitance value of the first capacitor 112 is sufficiently larger than the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111, the amount of change in the potential of the node α is equal to the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114. Is almost equal to the amount of change.

Therefore, in this case, for example, when Vcs1 changes from Vcom + Vx to Vcom−Vx, the potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111 decreases by 2Vx. Alternatively, for example, when the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111 is approximately equal to the capacitance value of the first capacitor element 112, the potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111 decreases by Vx. Similarly, since the potential Vcs2 of the second capacitor wiring 124 changes from low to high, the potential of the second node β in the floating state also changes accordingly. For example, when the capacitance value of the second capacitor element 122 is sufficiently larger than the capacitance value of the second liquid crystal layer 121, Vcs2 is V
When the voltage changes from com−Vx to Vcom + Vx, the potential Vlc2 of the second pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal layer 121 increases by 2Vx. Note that here, since the potential Vcs3 of the third capacitor wiring 134 is substantially constant, the potential of the third node γ does not change, and the third liquid crystal layer 131 is not changed.
The third electrode potential Vlc3 is maintained at a substantially constant value (potential applied from the signal line 102).

Note that the potential Vcs3 of the third capacitor wiring 134 is substantially constant.
4 includes the case where the potential of the third capacitor wiring 134 is always constant during the period in which the potential is applied to 4, and the case where the potential of the third capacitor wiring 134 is not constant during some periods. The partial period is preferably 10% or less, more preferably 1% or less of a period in which a potential is applied to the third capacitor wiring 134. In addition, the case where the potential of the third capacitor wiring 134 fluctuates and changes due to noise or the like is assumed to be substantially constant.

In FIG. 3, when T4 is reached, the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114 changes from low to high, so that the potential of the first node α in the floating state also changes accordingly. For example, when the capacitance value of the first capacitor 112 is sufficiently larger than the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111 and Vcs1 changes from Vcom−Vx to Vcom + Vx,
The potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111 increases by 2Vx. Or, for example,
In the case where the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111 is approximately equal to the capacitance value of the first capacitor element 112,
The potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111 increases by Vx.

Similarly, since the potential Vcs2 of the second capacitor wiring 124 changes from high to low, the potential of the second node β in the floating state also changes accordingly. For example, when the capacitance value of the second capacitor element 122 is sufficiently larger than the capacitance value of the second liquid crystal layer 121, Vcs2
Is changed from Vcom + Vx to Vcom−Vx, the second of the second liquid crystal layer 121 is changed.
The potential Vlc2 of the pixel electrode decreases by 2Vx. Alternatively, for example, when the capacitance value of the second liquid crystal layer 121 is approximately equal to the capacitance value of the second capacitor element 122,
The potential Vlc2 of the pixel electrode decreases by Vx. Here, since the potential Vcs3 of the third capacitor wiring 134 is constant, the potential of the third node γ does not change, and the potential Vlc3 of the third electrode of the third liquid crystal layer 131 is approximately constant. (Potential applied from the signal line 102) is held.

Thereafter, the potential Vcs <b> 1 of the first capacitor wiring 114 and the second capacitor wiring 12 are set every certain period.
As the fourth potential Vcs2 alternately changes, the potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111 and the potential Vlc2 of the second pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal layer 121 increase or decrease. Further, when the potential Vcs3 of the third capacitor wiring 134 is made constant, the potential Vlc3 of the third pixel electrode of the third liquid crystal layer 131 holds a substantially constant value (potential applied from the signal line 102). To do. As a result, the voltage V1 applied to the first liquid crystal layer 111, the voltage V2 applied to the second liquid crystal layer 121, and the voltage V3 applied to the third liquid crystal layer 131 are different from each other (here, V1).
<V3 <V2).

Here, V1 is the effective voltage of Vlc1 when Vcom is used as a reference, and V2 is Vco.
Effective voltage of Vlc2 with respect to m, V3 is Vlc3 with reference to Vcom
Voltage.

Usually, the alignment state of the liquid crystal is controlled according to the effective value of the applied voltage.

Here, FIG. 3 shows the case where the voltage of the pixel electrode is larger than the potential Vcom of the common electrode, that is, the case where the video signal is positive. However, the liquid crystal normally performs AC driving.
Therefore, in FIG. 14, when the voltage of the pixel electrode is smaller than the potential Vcom of the common electrode,
That is, the case where the video signal is negative is shown.

In FIG. 14, when T1 is reached, the potential Vg of the scanning line 101 changes from low to high, so that the first transistor 113, the second transistor 123, and the third transistor 133 are turned on. (On), and the potential Vs of the signal line 102 is applied to the first pixel electrode, the second pixel electrode, and the third pixel electrode. In addition, the first capacitor 112
Vs is also applied to the second electrode, the second electrode of the second capacitor 122, and the second electrode of the third capacitor 132, and the capacitor is charged.

In FIG. 14, since the potential Vg of the scanning line 101 changes from high to low when T2 is reached, the first transistor 113, the second transistor 123, and the third transistor 1
33 is turned off, and the first to third pixel electrodes and the first capacitor element 112 are turned off.
The second capacitor element 122 and the third capacitor element 132 are electrically insulated from the signal line 102. As a result, the first node α, the second node β, and the third node γ are in a floating state.

In FIG. 14, when T3 is reached, since the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114 changes from high to low, the potential of the first node α in the floating state also changes. The amount of change in the potential of the node α is determined from the relationship between the capacitance of the first liquid crystal layer 111 and the capacitance of the first capacitor 112. That is, the amount of change in the potential of the node α is determined by capacitively dividing the amplitude value of the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114.

If the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111 and the capacitance value of the first capacitor 112 are the same, the amount of change in the potential of the node α is the potential of the first capacitor wiring 114. This is approximately equal to half the amount of change in Vcs1. Alternatively, when the capacitance value of the first capacitor 112 is smaller than the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111, the amount of change in the potential of the node α is the first capacitance wiring 11.
4 is smaller than half the amount of change in the potential Vcs1. Alternatively, when the capacitance value of the first capacitor 112 is sufficiently larger than the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111, the amount of change in the potential of the node α is equal to the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114. Is almost equal to the amount of change.

Therefore, in this case, for example, when Vcs1 changes from Vcom + Vx to Vcom−Vx, the potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111 decreases by 2Vx. Alternatively, for example, when the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111 is approximately equal to the capacitance value of the first capacitor element 112, the potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111 decreases by Vx. Similarly, since the potential Vcs2 of the second capacitor wiring 124 changes from low to high, the potential of the second node β in the floating state also changes accordingly. For example, when the capacitance value of the second capacitor element 122 is sufficiently larger than the capacitance value of the second liquid crystal layer 121, Vcs2 is V
When the voltage changes from com−Vx to Vcom + Vx, the potential Vlc2 of the second pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal layer 121 increases by 2Vx. Here, since the potential Vcs3 of the third capacitor wiring 134 is constant, the potential of the third node γ does not change, and the potential Vlc3 of the third electrode of the third liquid crystal layer 131 is approximately constant. (Potential applied from the signal line 102) is held.

In FIG. 14, when T4 is reached, the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114 changes from low to high, so that the potential of the first node α in the floating state also changes accordingly. For example, when the capacitance value of the first capacitor 112 is sufficiently larger than the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111 and Vcs1 changes from Vcom−Vx to Vcom + Vx, the first liquid crystal The potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the layer 111 increases by 2Vx. Alternatively, for example, when the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111 is approximately equal to the capacitance value of the first capacitor element 112, the potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111 increases by Vx.

Similarly, since the potential Vcs2 of the second capacitor wiring 124 changes from high to low, the potential of the second node β in the floating state also changes accordingly. For example, when the capacitance value of the second capacitor element 122 is sufficiently larger than the capacitance value of the second liquid crystal layer 121, Vcs2
Is changed from Vcom + Vx to Vcom−Vx, the second of the second liquid crystal layer 121 is changed.
The potential Vlc2 of the pixel electrode decreases by 2Vx. Alternatively, for example, when the capacitance value of the second liquid crystal layer 121 is approximately equal to the capacitance value of the second capacitor element 122,
The potential Vlc2 of the pixel electrode decreases by Vx. Here, since the potential Vcs3 of the third capacitor wiring 134 is constant, the potential of the third node γ does not change, and the potential Vlc3 of the third electrode of the third liquid crystal layer 131 is approximately constant. (Potential applied from the signal line 102) is held.

Thereafter, the potential Vcs <b> 1 of the first capacitor wiring 114 and the second capacitor wiring 12 are set every certain period.
As the fourth potential Vcs2 alternately changes, the potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111 and the potential Vlc2 of the second pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal layer 121 increase or decrease. Further, when the potential Vcs3 of the third capacitor wiring 134 is made constant, the potential Vlc3 of the third pixel electrode of the third liquid crystal layer 131 holds a substantially constant value (potential applied from the signal line 102). To do. As a result, the effective voltage V1 applied to the first liquid crystal layer 111, the effective voltage V2 applied to the second liquid crystal layer 121, and the effective voltage V3 applied to the third liquid crystal layer 131 are different from each other (here, V2 < V3 <V1).

As described above, even when signals are input at the same timing, the relationship between the effective voltages when the image signal is positive (V1 <V3 <V2) and the relationship between the effective voltages when the image signal is negative (V2 <V3 <). V1
) Is different. However, V1 when the image signal is positive and V2 when the image signal is negative are approximately the same effective voltage, and V2 when the image signal is negative and V2 when the image signal is positive. V1 is an effective voltage having substantially the same magnitude. In other words, since only the sub-pixels are replaced, it can be displayed normally.

On the other hand, here, as shown in FIG. 15, the potential of the third capacitor wiring 134 is set to
Consider the case of change as shown in FIG. In that case, the effective voltage V3 applied to the third liquid crystal layer 131 differs depending on whether the video signal is positive or negative. Because
As shown in FIG. 15, the third liquid crystal layer 131 has a waveform like the first capacitor wiring 114.
The potential Vlc3 of the third pixel electrode is lower than the potential Vs of the signal line 102. As a result, the effective voltage applied to the liquid crystal is small when the video signal is positive, and the effective voltage applied to the liquid crystal is large when the video signal is negative. Therefore, the third capacitor wiring 1
When the potential of 34 changes, even if the absolute value of the difference between the potential Vs of the signal line 102 and the potential Vcom of the common electrode is the same, it is added to the liquid crystal when the video signal is positive and negative. The effective voltage will be different. Therefore, when it is desired to supply effective voltages of the same magnitude to the liquid crystal, separate processing is required for the positive video signal and the negative video signal.

Further, consider the case where the potential of the third capacitor wiring 134 changes as shown in the second capacitor wiring 124 as shown in FIG. In that case, the potential Vlc3 of the third pixel electrode of the third liquid crystal layer 131 is higher than the potential Vs of the signal line 102. As a result, when the video signal is positive, the effective voltage applied to the liquid crystal is large, and when the video signal is negative, the effective voltage applied to the liquid crystal is small.

Therefore, when comparing FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, even when the potential Vs of the signal line 102 is the same, the potential of the third capacitor wiring 134 changes as in the first capacitor wiring 114. When,
The effective voltage applied to the liquid crystal is different from the case where the second capacitance wiring 124 is changed. Therefore, when it is desired to supply the same effective voltage to the liquid crystal, the third capacitor wiring 1
Different processing is required depending on the waveform of the potential of 34.

In this manner, when the potential of the third capacitor wiring 134 changes, the effective voltage applied to the liquid crystal varies depending on various situations. However, as shown in FIG.
Such a problem does not occur when the potential of 34 does not change and is a constant value.

By doing so, the effective voltages applied to the liquid crystal in the three sub-pixels can be made different from each other. Therefore, the amount of change in gradation when viewed obliquely can be reduced, and the viewing angle can be widened.

As described above, in the case where an odd number of subpixels are arranged, it is desirable that the potential of the capacitor wiring be set to a constant value in the odd number of subpixels. However, it is not limited to this.

In other words, it can be said that the number of sub-pixels can be set to an odd number by arranging the sub-pixels having a constant potential of the capacitor wiring. If the potentials of all the capacitor wirings are to be changed, if it is desired to increase the number of subpixels to two or more, it is necessary to use four subpixels. For this reason, if the number of subpixels is not sufficient, it must be increased to four. As a result, the aperture ratio and yield may be reduced. However, since the number of subpixels can be set to an odd number by arranging subpixels that set the potential of the capacitor wiring to a constant value, if two subpixels are not sufficient, The number of 3
Individually, it can be operated normally while balancing the aperture ratio and viewing angle.

Thus, by providing a plurality of subpixels in one pixel and changing the alignment state of the liquid crystal for each subpixel, the viewing angle characteristics can be improved. In particular, here, the third liquid crystal layer 131 is connected to the third liquid crystal layer 131 from the signal line 102 by making the potential of the third capacitor wiring 134 connected to the third pixel electrode through the third capacitor 132 constant. Since the supplied potential is applied, there is an advantage that the number of sub-pixels can be increased without applying special processing to the video signal.

In the above description, the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114 and the potential Vcs2 of the second capacitor wiring 124 are set to potentials having a certain frequency and different from each other by ½ cycle, the voltages having the same amplitude, and the third capacitance. Although an example in which the potential Vcs3 of the wiring 134 is set to an intermediate value (for example, Vcom) between the high potential VH and the low potential VL of Vcs1 and Vcs2 is described, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, Vcs3 may be a substantially constant value of the potential VH or the potential VL, may be larger than the potential VH, or may be smaller than the potential VL. Further, Vcs3 may be a potential having a certain frequency. Alternatively, the potential VH may be the same potential as Vcom, or the potential VL may be the same potential as Vcom. Alternatively, the high potential of the first capacitor wiring 114 may be different from the high potential of the second capacitor wiring 124. Alternatively, the row potential of the first capacitor wiring 114 may be different from the row potential of the second capacitor wiring 124.

Note that the first subpixel 110 and the second subpixel 120 often perform symmetrical operations in such a manner that the states are alternately switched. Therefore, it is desirable that each component has substantially the same configuration. For example, it is desirable that the size (channel length or channel width) of the transistors be approximately equal between the first subpixel 110 and the second subpixel 120. Alternatively, the capacitance value (or layout shape) of the storage capacitor is the same as that of the first subpixel 110 and that of the second subpixel 110.
It is desirable that the sub-pixels 120 are substantially equal. Alternatively, it is desirable that the capacitance value (or layout shape) of the liquid crystal is approximately equal between the first subpixel 110 and the second subpixel 120. Here, “substantially equal” includes a case where some deviation occurs due to a manufacturing error or the like.

On the other hand, the third subpixel 130 does not operate symmetrically with the first subpixel 110 or the second subpixel 120. Accordingly, each component may be different. As a result, there is a degree of freedom in the layout of transistors, storage capacitors, and liquid crystal elements, and a flexible design can be performed. For example, the transistor size (channel length or channel width) is the third size.
The sub-pixel 130 and the first sub-pixel 110 (or the second sub-pixel 120) may be different. Alternatively, the capacitance value (or layout shape) of the storage capacitor is the third subpixel 130.
And the first subpixel 110 (or the second subpixel 120) may be different. Alternatively, the capacitance value (or layout shape) of the liquid crystal is determined by the third subpixel 130 and the first subpixel 11.
It may be different from 0 (or the second subpixel 120).

Note that the capacitance value of the storage capacitor of the third subpixel 130 may be smaller than the capacitance value of the storage capacitor of the first subpixel 110 or the second subpixel 120. This is because the potential of the capacitor wiring of the third subpixel 130 is constant. Therefore, as a case where the capacitance value is minimum, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 7, the third sub-pixel 130 does not need to have a storage capacitor. As shown in FIG. 17, the third capacitor wiring 134 and the third capacitor 132 are not provided. As a result, the aperture ratio can be improved and the manufacturing yield can be improved.

3 and 14, when the video signal is positive, the effective value (or absolute value) of the voltage applied to the first liquid crystal layer 111 is the voltage applied to the second liquid crystal layer 121. When the video signal is negative and smaller than the effective value (or absolute value), the effective value (or absolute value) of the voltage applied to the first liquid crystal layer 111 is the voltage applied to the second liquid crystal layer 121. RMS value (or
Larger than the absolute value). Therefore, impurities present in the liquid crystal may be collected locally. In liquid crystals, normally, alternating current driving is performed so that impurities are not biased. However, when the voltage applied to the liquid crystal layer is biased, the impurities are also biased.
Therefore, by reversing the waveform of the first capacitor wiring 114 and the waveform of the second capacitor wiring 124 from FIG. 3 as shown in FIG. 18, that is, when the video signal is positive, By reversing the waveform applied to the first capacitor wiring 114 and the second capacitor wiring 124 at times,
The effective value (or absolute value) applied to the liquid crystal layer can be made substantially equal. As a result, it is possible to reduce the unevenness of impurities in the liquid crystal layer.

Note that the waveforms of the first capacitor wiring 114 and the second capacitor wiring 124 when the video signal is positive are:
In the case of the waveform shown in FIG. 3, the effective value (or absolute value) of the voltage applied to the first liquid crystal layer 111 is the effective value (or absolute value) of the voltage applied to the second liquid crystal layer 121. It will be smaller than. However, this is desirable because it appears to be averaged by switching. Therefore, it is desirable to switch between the waveform of FIG. 3 and the waveform of FIG. 3 and FIG. 19, the waveforms applied to the first capacitor wiring 114 and the second capacitor wiring 124 are reversed. As a result, the effective value (or absolute value) of the voltage applied to the first liquid crystal layer 111 and the effective value (or absolute value) of the voltage applied to the second liquid crystal layer 121 are switched and averaged. Can be displayed smoothly. Similarly, when the video signal is negative, by using a waveform obtained by reversing the waveforms applied to the first capacitor wiring 114 and the second capacitor wiring 124 as in the waveform of FIG. 14 and the waveform of FIG. Since the effective value (or absolute value) of the voltage applied to the first liquid crystal layer 111 and the effective value (or absolute value) of the voltage applied to the second liquid crystal layer 121 are switched, they are averaged and smoothed. Can be displayed.

Note that it is also possible to reduce the unevenness of impurities in the liquid crystal layer and to smoothly display an image by appropriately switching between the waveforms shown in FIGS. 3, 14, 18, and 19. .

In this embodiment mode, an example in which three subpixels are provided in one pixel is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which three or more subpixels are provided may be employed. For example, the configuration shown in FIG. The configuration illustrated in FIG. 20 is obtained by adding a fourth subpixel 140 to the configuration illustrated in FIG. The fourth subpixel 140 includes a fourth liquid crystal layer 141, a fourth capacitor element 142, and a fourth
The transistor 143 is provided. The fourth capacitor 142 is connected to a wiring in which the first electrode can function as a capacitor wiring (hereinafter referred to as a “fourth capacitor wiring 144”), and the second electrode is connected to the fourth liquid crystal layer 141. It is connected to the fourth pixel electrode.

In the structure illustrated in FIG. 20, the potentials of the third capacitor wiring 134 and the fourth capacitor wiring 144 can be constant. As shown in FIG. 20, by adding the fourth sub-pixel 140, the pixel layout can be made symmetrical, and the capacitance can be made substantially equal among the sub-pixels.

In addition, a configuration in which the fourth sub-pixel 140 is added to the configuration shown in FIG. 17 may be used (FIG. 21).
. In the configuration shown in FIG. 21, a case where no storage capacitor is provided in the third subpixel 130 and the fourth subpixel 140 is shown. In this manner, the third capacitor wiring 134, the third capacitor element 132,
By adopting a structure in which the fourth capacitor wiring 144 and the fourth capacitor 142 are not provided, an aperture ratio can be improved and a manufacturing yield can be improved. Further, by adding the fourth sub-pixel 140, the pixel layout can be made symmetrical, and the capacitance can be made substantially equal among the sub-pixels.

Note that the liquid crystal layer, the capacitor, the capacitor wiring, or the like may be divided into a plurality of parts. As an example, the third
FIG. 22 illustrates the case where the third liquid crystal layer 131, the third capacitor element 132, and the third capacitor wiring 134 are divided into two in the sub-pixel 130. In this case, it is desirable because the pixel layout can be made into a target shape. Note that although the third transistor 133 is provided in common, the third transistor 133 may be divided and provided.

In the above description, for example, the case where the number of scanning lines 101 of the first transistor 113 to the third transistor 133 is one for each pixel is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a book. For example, as shown in FIG. 25, by using a plurality of scanning lines, the degree of freedom in pixel layout is improved, and the shape of the pixel electrodes can be arranged with good symmetry. Note that here, as an example, a structure in which the gate electrode of the third transistor 133 is connected to the second scan line 201 is illustrated.

In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 26, the third capacitor wiring 134 and the third capacitor 132 may not be provided. As a result, the aperture ratio can be improved and the manufacturing yield can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment mode, an example in which liquid crystal is used as a display device has been described;
It is also possible to apply to a light emitting device using an L element (an EL element including an organic substance and an inorganic substance, an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element) or the like.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment can be applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in the drawings of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 2)

In this embodiment, a structure of a display device which is different from that in the above embodiment will be described with reference to drawings. Specifically, a structure in which the scan line and the third capacitor wiring are provided in common in the structure described in the above embodiment will be described.

FIG. 4 illustrates a pixel structure of the display device described in this embodiment mode. 4 shows a plurality of pixels 1.
A configuration is shown in which three sub-pixels are provided at 00a to 100f, respectively. In particular,
The first subpixel includes a first liquid crystal layer 111, a first capacitor 112, and a first transistor 11.
3, the second liquid crystal layer 121, the second capacitor 122, and the second transistor 123 are provided in the second subpixel, and the third liquid crystal is provided in the third subpixel. Layer 131, third
The capacitor 132 and the third transistor 133 are provided.

The first transistor 113 has a gate electrode connected to the scanning line 101, one of a source and a drain connected to the signal line 102, and the other of the source and the drain connected to the first liquid crystal layer 1.
11 first pixel electrodes and the second electrode of the first capacitor 112.

The second transistor 123 has a gate electrode connected to the scan line 101, one of a source and a drain connected to the signal line 102, and the other of the source and the drain connected to the second liquid crystal layer 121. And the second electrode of the second capacitor 122.

The third transistor 133 has a gate electrode connected to the scan line 101, one of a source and a drain connected to the signal line 102, and the other of the source and the drain connected to the third liquid crystal layer 131. And the second electrode of the third capacitor 132.

The first electrode of the first capacitor 112 is connected to a wiring that can function as a capacitor wiring (first capacitor wiring 114), and the first electrode of the second capacitor 122 functions as a capacitor wiring. The first electrode of the third capacitor 132 is connected to the scanning line 101. The wiring is connected to the wiring (second capacitor wiring 124).

The configuration shown in FIG. 4 is the third capacitor wiring 1 in comparison with the configuration shown in the above embodiment (FIG. 2).
34 is omitted, and the scanning line 101 and the third capacitor wiring 134 are provided in common. That is, in this embodiment mode, the scan line 101 can also function as a capacitor wiring.

In this manner, the first electrode of the third capacitor 132 provided in the third subpixel is connected to the scanning line 10.
By adopting a configuration of connecting to 1, it is possible to increase the number of sub-pixels without increasing the number of wirings. In addition, the first capacitor wiring 114 and the second capacitor wiring 1 between adjacent pixels.
24 is shared, and the third capacitor wiring and the scanning line are provided in common, so that even when three or more subpixels are provided in the pixel, the number of wirings is reduced and the aperture ratio is reduced. Can be suppressed.

In FIG. 4, a scanning line in which the first electrode of the third capacitor 132 provided in the third subpixel is connected to the pixel (m−1) row before the pixel (m row). Although the structure connected to 101 is shown, it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the pixel is connected to the scanning line 101 connected one row after the pixel (m + 1 row) (FIG. 5). Alternatively, it may be connected to a scanning line connected to pixels several rows before (m−n rows, where n is a natural number), or after several rows (m + n rows, where n
May be connected to a scanning line connected to a natural number). Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 24, the third capacitor 132 may not be arranged.

Next, a driving method of the display device having the pixel shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG.
6 illustrates driving of the sub-pixel of the pixel 100b in the m-th row in FIG. 4, and the potential Vgm of the scanning line 101 in the m-th row, the potential Vs of the signal line 102, and the potential V of the first capacitor wiring 114.
cs1, the potential Vcs2 of the second capacitor wiring 124, the potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111, the potential Vlc2 of the second pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal layer 121, and the third liquid crystal layer 13.
A potential Vlc3 of the first third pixel electrode and a potential Vcom of the common electrode are shown. Also, (m
-1) The potential Vg (m-1) of the scanning line in the row is also shown.

Note that in the following description, the connection point of the other of the source and drain of the first transistor 113, the first pixel electrode, and the second electrode of the first capacitor 112 is defined as the first node α, the second
The second node β, the other of the source and the drain of the third transistor 133, the second of the source and the drain of the transistor 123, the second pixel electrode and the second electrode of the second capacitor 122 The connection point between the third pixel electrode and the second electrode of the third capacitor 122 is a third node γ. A case where the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114 and the potential Vcs2 of the second capacitor wiring 124 are changed will be described.

In FIG. 6, when T1 is reached, the potential Vgm of the m-th scanning line 101 is low.
Since the first transistor 113, the second transistor 123, and the third transistor 133 are turned on (On), the first pixel electrode, the second pixel electrode, and the third pixel are changed from high to high. The potential Vs of the signal line 102 is applied to the electrode. Further, Vs is also applied to the second electrode of the first capacitor 112, the second electrode of the second capacitor 122, and the second electrode of the third capacitor 132, so that the capacitor is charged. Is called.

In FIG. 6, when T2 is reached, the potential Vgm of the scanning line 101 in the m-th row changes from high to low, so that the first transistor 113, the second transistor 123, and the third transistor 133 are turned off (Off The first to third pixel electrodes, the first capacitor element 112, the second capacitor element 122, and the third capacitor element 132 are electrically insulated from the signal line 102. As a result, the first node α, the second node β, and the third node γ are in a floating state.

In FIG. 6, when T3 is reached, since the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114 changes from high to low, the potential of the first node α in the floating state also changes accordingly. When the capacitance value of the first capacitor 112 is sufficiently larger than the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111, for example, when Vcs1 changes from Vcom + Vx to Vcom−Vx,
The potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111 is decreased by 2Vx. Or, for example,
In the case where the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111 is approximately equal to the capacitance value of the first capacitor element 112,
The potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111 decreases by Vx. Similarly, since the potential Vcs2 of the second capacitor wiring 124 changes from low to high, the potential of the second node β in the floating state also changes accordingly.

For example, in the case where the capacitance value of the second capacitor 122 is sufficiently larger than the capacitance value of the second liquid crystal layer 121, when Vcs2 changes from Vcom−Vx to Vcom + Vx, the second liquid crystal The potential Vlc2 of the second pixel electrode of the layer 121 increases by 2Vx. Alternatively, for example, when the capacitance value of the second liquid crystal layer 121 is approximately equal to the capacitance value of the second capacitor element 122, the potential Vlc2 of the second pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal layer 121 increases by Vx. Here, since the potential Vg (m−1) of the scanning line 101 in the (m−1) th row is already constant, the potential of the third node γ does not change, and the third liquid crystal layer The potential Vlc3 of the third electrode 131 is maintained at a substantially constant value (potential applied from the signal line 102).

In FIG. 6, when T4 is reached, the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114 changes from low to high, so that the potential of the first node α in the floating state also changes accordingly. For example, when the capacitance value of the first capacitor 112 is sufficiently larger than the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111 and Vcs1 changes from Vcom−Vx to Vcom + Vx,
The potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111 increases by 2Vx. Or, for example,
In the case where the capacitance value of the first liquid crystal layer 111 is approximately equal to the capacitance value of the first capacitor element 112,
The potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111 increases by Vx. Similarly, since the potential Vcs2 of the second capacitor wiring 124 changes from high to low, the potential of the second node β in the floating state also changes accordingly. For example, the second liquid crystal layer 121 has a capacitance value that is
When the capacitance value of the capacitive element 122 is sufficiently larger, Vcs2 is Vcom + Vx
When the voltage changes from Vcom to Vcom−Vx, the potential Vlc2 of the second pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal layer 121 decreases by 2Vx. Alternatively, for example, when the capacitance value of the second liquid crystal layer 121 is approximately equal to the capacitance value of the second capacitor element 122, the potential Vlc2 of the second pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal layer 121 decreases by Vx. Note that here, the potential Vg of the scanning line 101 in the (m−1) th row (
Since m−1) is constant, the potential of the third node γ does not change, and the potential Vlc3 of the third electrode of the third liquid crystal layer 131 is approximately constant (potential applied from the signal line 102). Hold.

Thereafter, the potential Vcs <b> 1 of the first capacitor wiring 114 and the second capacitor wiring 12 are set every certain period.
As the fourth potential Vcs2 alternately changes, the potential Vlc1 of the first pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal layer 111 and the potential Vlc2 of the second pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal layer 121 increase or decrease. In addition, since the potential Vg (m−1) of the scanning line 101 in the (m−1) th row is constant, the potential Vlc3 of the third pixel electrode of the third liquid crystal layer 131 is approximately constant (signal line 102). The potential applied from the above is maintained. As a result, the first liquid crystal layer 111, the second liquid crystal layer 121, and the third liquid crystal layer 1
Different potentials (here, Vlc1 <Vlc3 <Vlc2) are applied to 31.

Thus, by providing a plurality of subpixels in one pixel and changing the alignment state of the liquid crystal for each subpixel, the viewing angle characteristics can be improved. In particular, here, the third liquid crystal layer 131 is supplied from the signal line 102 by connecting the third pixel electrode to the (m−1) -th scanning line 101 through the third capacitor 132. To maintain the measured potential,
This has the advantage that the number of sub-pixels can be increased without adding special processing to the video signal.

In FIG. 6, a scanning line in which the first electrode of the third capacitor 132 provided in the third sub-pixel is connected to the pixel (m−1 row) before the pixel (m row). 101 (Fig. 4)
), The scanning line 101 connected to the pixel after one row (m + 1 row).
FIG. 7 shows a driving method of the configuration (FIG. 5) connected to the. In this case, when T2 is reached, (m
Since the potential Vg (m + 1) of the scanning line 101 in the (+1) th row changes from low to high, the potential of the third node γ in the floating state also changes accordingly. However, a period in which the potential Vg (m + 1) of the scanning line 101 in the (m + 1) th row changes is a period in which a pixel in the (m + 1) th row is selected, and a potential is applied to the third capacitor wiring 134. The effect is small as the effective voltage applied to the liquid crystal because it is shorter than the entire period.

In this embodiment mode, an example in which three subpixels are provided in one pixel has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which three or more subpixels are provided may be employed. In this embodiment mode, an example in which liquid crystal is used as a display device is described; however, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a light-emitting device using an EL element (an EL element including an organic substance and an inorganic substance, an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element) or the like. It is also possible to apply to.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment can be applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in the drawings of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 3)
In this embodiment mode, a semiconductor device different from the above embodiment mode will be described with reference to drawings.

FIG. 8 illustrates a pixel structure of the display device described in this embodiment mode.

The pixel shown in FIG. 8 shows a configuration in which five subpixels are provided. The first subpixel 110 includes a first liquid crystal layer 111, a first capacitor 112, and a first transistor 113. Similarly, the second subpixel 120 includes a second liquid crystal layer 121, a second capacitor 122, and a second transistor 123, and the third subpixel 130 includes a third liquid crystal layer 131, a second liquid crystal layer 131, and a second transistor 123. 3 capacitive element 132 and third transistor 133, and the fourth sub-pixel 140 includes the fourth liquid crystal layer 14.
1, a fourth capacitor element 142, a fourth transistor 143, and the fifth subpixel 150 includes:
A fifth liquid crystal layer 151, a fifth capacitor 152, and a fifth transistor 153 are included.

In other words, the pixel described in this embodiment has a structure in which the fourth subpixel 140 and the fifth subpixel 150 are added to the structure in FIG.

The fourth liquid crystal layer 141 and the fifth liquid crystal layer 151 include the first liquid crystal layer 111 and the second liquid crystal layer 121.
Similarly to the third liquid crystal layer 131, the pixel electrode, the common electrode, and the liquid crystal controlled by them are included, and the common electrode can be provided in common for each sub-pixel. The fourth
The pixel electrode included in the liquid crystal layer 141 is referred to as a fourth pixel electrode, and the pixel electrode included in the fifth liquid crystal layer 151 is referred to as a fifth pixel electrode.

The fourth capacitor element 142 and the fifth capacitor element 152 can each have a structure in which an insulating film is provided between the first electrode and the second electrode included in each of the fourth capacitor element 142 and the fifth capacitor element 152. As the electrode, a conductive film, a semiconductor film, a semiconductor film into which an impurity element is introduced, an oxide semiconductor film, or the like can be used.

The fourth transistor 143 has a gate electrode connected to the scanning line 101, one of a source and a drain connected to the signal line 102, and the other of the source and the drain connected to the fourth liquid crystal layer 1.
The fourth pixel electrode 41 and the second electrode of the fourth capacitor 142 are connected.

The fifth transistor 153 has a gate electrode connected to the scan line 101, one of a source and a drain connected to the signal line 102, and the other of the source and the drain connected to the fifth liquid crystal layer 151. And the second electrode of the fifth capacitor 152.

The fourth capacitor 142 is a wiring in which the first electrode can function as a capacitor wiring (hereinafter referred to as “fourth”.
The second electrode is connected to the fourth pixel electrode of the fourth liquid crystal layer 141.

Further, the fifth capacitor 152 has a wiring (hereinafter referred to as “a wiring” in which the first electrode can function as a capacitor wiring).
The fifth electrode is connected to the fifth pixel electrode of the fifth liquid crystal layer 151.

The first capacitor wiring 114, the second capacitor wiring 124, the third capacitor wiring 134, the fourth capacitor wiring 144, and the fifth capacitor wiring 154 are provided one by one so as to correspond to each pixel. Although it is good also as a structure, it is good also as a structure provided in common with the adjacent pixel (FIG. 9). Or FIG.
As shown in FIG. 3, the third capacitor 132 may not be arranged.

Further, in the configuration of FIG. 9, the scanning line 101 and the third capacitor wiring 134 may be provided in common (FIG. 10). Specifically, the configuration shown in FIG. 10 is the same as that shown in FIG.
The capacitor wiring 134 is omitted, and the scanning line 101 and the third capacitor wiring are provided in common. That is, the scanning line 101 can also function as a capacitor wiring.

In this manner, the first electrode of the third capacitor 132 provided in the third subpixel is connected to the scanning line 10.
By adopting the configuration of connecting to 1, even when a plurality of subpixels are provided, the number of wirings can be reduced and a decrease in aperture ratio can be suppressed. Note that the pixel in the m-th row (here, pixel 2
00a, 200c), the first electrode of the third capacitor 132 may be connected to the (m−1) -th scanning line, or connected to the (m + 1) -th scanning line. May be. It may be connected to the m-th scanning line, or may be connected to a scanning line connected to a pixel several rows before (m-n rows, where n is a natural number) You may connect to the scanning line connected after the line (m + n line, where n is a natural number).

Next, potentials applied to the first capacitor wiring 114, the second capacitor wiring 124, the third capacitor wiring 134, the fourth capacitor wiring 144, and the fifth capacitor wiring 154 are described.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11, the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114, the second capacitor wiring 1
The 24 potential Vcs2, the fourth capacitor wiring Vcs4, and the fifth capacitor wiring Vcs5 can be set to a potential having a certain frequency, and the potential Vcs3 of the third capacitor wiring 134 can be set to a substantially constant potential. Note that in FIG. 11, the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114 and the potential Vcs2 of the second capacitor wiring 124 are different from each other by a half cycle, and the potential Vcs4 of the fourth capacitor wiring 144 is set.
And the potential Vcs5 of the fifth capacitor wiring 154 are different from each other by 1/2 cycle, and Vc
In this example, the potential amplitudes of Vcs4 and Vcs5 are made larger than s1 and Vcs2.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12, the potential Vcs1 of the first capacitor wiring 114 and the second capacitor wiring 12
The frequency of the fourth potential Vcs2 may be different from the frequency of the fourth capacitor wiring Vcs4 and the fifth capacitor wiring Vcs5.

11 and 12 illustrate the case where the potential Vcs of the third capacitor wiring 134 is constant at Vcom; however, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a high potential or a low potential of Vcs1 and Vcs2, a high potential or a low potential of Vcs4 and Vcs5, or the same potential as the potential Vg of the scanning line can be used. Further, Vcs3 may be a potential having a certain frequency.

Thus, by making the amplitudes of the capacitor wirings different, the effective values of the voltages applied to the liquid crystal layers of the sub-pixels can be made different. As a result, a plurality of sub-pixels having different alignment states of the liquid crystal are arranged, so that when viewed obliquely, they are averaged and the viewing angle can be widened.

In this embodiment mode, an example in which liquid crystal is used as a display device is described; however, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is applied to a light-emitting device using an EL element (an EL element including an organic substance and an inorganic substance, an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element) or the like. It is also possible to do.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (or part of the contents) described in each drawing of this embodiment can be applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (or part of the contents) described in the drawings of another embodiment. Etc. can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 4)
In this embodiment, the structure of the pixel described in the above embodiment will be described.

First, the pixel layout shown in FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition,
FIG. 27 corresponds to a schematic diagram of the pixel 100b in the plurality of pixels illustrated in FIG.

In FIG. 27, the first transistor 113 to the third transistor 133 use a semiconductor film 161 provided over the scan line 101 that can also function as a gate electrode as a channel region. For example, amorphous silicon (a-Si), microcrystal silicon (μc-Si), or the like can be used for the semiconductor film 161. In addition, a liquid crystal layer (here, the third liquid crystal layer 131) constituting a sub-pixel (here, the third sub-pixel) that makes the potential of the capacitor line constant,
A capacitor element (here, the third capacitor element 132) is arranged in the middle of the pixel 100b, and a liquid crystal layer (here, a subpixel) that changes the potential of the capacitor line so as to be adjacent to the pixel 100b (up and down on the paper surface). The first liquid crystal layer 111 and the second liquid crystal layer 121) are disposed. As a result, the capacitance line (
Here, the first capacitor line 114 and the second capacitor line 124) can be easily shared by the upper and lower pixels.

In the first capacitor element 112 included in the first subpixel, the first capacitor wiring 114 is used as a first electrode, and the conductive film 163 provided over the first capacitor wiring 114 is used as a second electrode. Can be provided. In addition, the conductive film 163 and the first pixel electrode included in the first liquid crystal layer 111 are electrically connected. The conductive film 163 can be provided at the same time as the conductive film included in the signal line 102.

In the second capacitor element 122 included in the second subpixel, the second capacitor wiring 124 is used as a first electrode, and the conductive film 163 provided over the second capacitor wiring 124 is used as a second electrode. Can be provided. In addition, the conductive film 163 and the second pixel electrode included in the second liquid crystal layer 121 are electrically connected. The conductive film 163 can be provided at the same time as the conductive film included in the signal line 102.

In the third capacitor element 132 included in the third subpixel, the third capacitor wiring 134 is used as a first electrode, and the conductive film 163 provided over the third capacitor wiring 134 is used as a second electrode. Can be provided. In addition, the conductive film 163 and the third pixel electrode included in the third liquid crystal layer 131 are electrically connected. The conductive film 163 can be provided at the same time as the conductive film included in the signal line 102.

In addition, a liquid crystal layer (a third subpixel in this case) that makes the potential of the capacitor line constant (here, a third subpixel)
Here, the liquid crystal layer 131) and the capacitor (here, the third capacitor 132) are connected to the pixel 100.
a liquid crystal that constitutes a sub-pixel (here, the first sub-pixel and the second sub-pixel) that changes the potential of the capacitance line so as to be arranged in the middle of b and adjacent to it (in this case, above and below the page). Layers (here, the first liquid crystal layer 111 and the second liquid crystal layer 121) are arranged. Accordingly, the capacitor lines (here, the first capacitor line 114 and the second capacitor line 124) can be easily shared by the upper and lower pixels.

In addition, a slit may be provided in the pixel electrode constituting the liquid crystal layer. When providing a slit in the pixel electrode, it is preferable to provide it in consideration of the orientation of the liquid crystal (direction of the slit). For example,
The direction of the slit formed in the first pixel electrode constituting the first liquid crystal layer 111 of the first subpixel that changes the potential of the capacitor wiring, and the second subpixel that changes the potential of the capacitor wiring. The direction of the slit formed in the second pixel electrode constituting the second liquid crystal layer 121 is defined as the third liquid crystal layer 1.
Provided symmetrically with respect to 31. Further, in the third subpixel in which the potential of the capacitor wiring is not changed, the liquid crystal orientation (slit direction) in the third pixel electrode constituting the third liquid crystal layer 131.
Are provided so that different regions are formed. This makes it possible to widen the viewing angle.

In the configuration of FIG. 27, as shown in FIG. 17, the third sub-pixel 130 may not be provided with the third capacitor wiring 134 and the third capacitor 132 (FIG. 28).
. As a result, it is possible to improve the aperture ratio and the manufacturing yield.

Next, the layout of the pixel shown in FIG. 25 will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 29, a plurality of scanning lines per pixel (here, scanning lines 101 and 201).
Is provided. The first transistor 113 and the third transistor 133 are
A semiconductor film 162 provided below the scanning line 101 that can function as a gate electrode is used as a channel region. The second transistor 123 uses a semiconductor film 162 provided below the second scan line 201 that can function as a gate electrode as a channel region. For example, polycrystalline silicon (p-Si) can be used for the semiconductor film 162.

In the first capacitor element 112 included in the first subpixel, the first capacitor wiring 114 is used as a first electrode, and the semiconductor film 162 provided below the first capacitor wiring 114 is used as a second electrode. Can be provided. Note that in the case where the semiconductor film 162 is used as the second electrode, an impurity element is preferably introduced. Further, the semiconductor film 162 to be the second electrode and the first liquid crystal layer 1
11 are electrically connected to each other. By providing the semiconductor film 162 serving as the second electrode of the first capacitor wiring 114 at the same time as the semiconductor film 162 of the first transistor 113 and providing the first capacitor wiring 114 at the same time as the scanning line 101, the first transistor 1
The thirteen gate insulating films can be used as the insulating film of the first capacitor 112, and the capacitance can be increased.

In the second capacitor element 122 included in the second subpixel, the second capacitor wiring 124 is used as a first electrode, and the semiconductor film 162 provided below the second capacitor wiring 124 is used as a second electrode. Can be provided. Note that in the case where the semiconductor film 162 is used as the second electrode, an impurity element is preferably introduced. Further, the semiconductor film 162 to be the second electrode and the second liquid crystal layer 1
2nd pixel electrode which comprises 21 is electrically connected. By providing the semiconductor film 162 serving as the second electrode of the second capacitor wiring 124 at the same time as the semiconductor film 162 of the second transistor 123 and providing the second capacitor wiring 124 at the same time as the scanning line 201, the second transistor 1
Thus, the gate insulating film 23 can be used as the insulating film of the second capacitor element 122, and the capacitance can be increased.

The third capacitor element 132 included in the third subpixel includes the third capacitor wiring 134 as a first electrode, and the semiconductor film 162 provided below the third capacitor wiring 134 as a second electrode. Can be provided. Note that in the case where the semiconductor film 162 is used as the second electrode, an impurity element is preferably introduced. Further, the semiconductor film 162 to be the second electrode and the third liquid crystal layer 1
3rd pixel electrode which comprises 31 is electrically connected. By providing the semiconductor film 162 serving as the second electrode of the third capacitor wiring 134 at the same time as the semiconductor film 162 of the third transistor 133 and providing the third capacitor wiring 134 at the same time as the scanning line 101, the third transistor 1
The 33 gate insulating film can be used as the insulating film of the third capacitor 132, and the capacitance can be increased.

In addition, a liquid crystal layer (a third subpixel in this case) that makes the potential of the capacitor line constant (here, a third subpixel)
Here, the liquid crystal layer 131) and the capacitor (here, the third capacitor 132) are connected to the pixel 100.
a liquid crystal layer (here, a first sub-pixel and a second sub-pixel) constituting a sub-pixel (here, a first sub-pixel and a second sub-pixel) that changes the potential of the capacitor line so as to be arranged in the middle of b and adjacent to it (up and down the paper surface) Then, the first liquid crystal layer 111 and the second liquid crystal layer 121) are arranged. As a result, the capacitance line (here, the first
The capacitor line 114 and the second capacitor line 124) can be easily shared by the upper and lower pixels.

In addition, a slit may be provided in the pixel electrode constituting the liquid crystal layer. When providing a slit in the pixel electrode, it is preferable to provide it in consideration of the orientation of the liquid crystal (direction of the slit). For example,
The direction of the slit formed in the first pixel electrode constituting the first liquid crystal layer 111 of the first subpixel that changes the potential of the capacitor wiring, and the second subpixel that changes the potential of the capacitor wiring. The direction of the slit formed in the second pixel electrode constituting the second liquid crystal layer 121 is defined as the third liquid crystal layer 1.
Provided symmetrically with respect to 31. Further, in the third subpixel in which the potential of the capacitor wiring is not changed, the liquid crystal orientation (slit direction) in the third pixel electrode constituting the third liquid crystal layer 131.
Are provided so that different regions are formed. This makes it possible to widen the viewing angle.

In the configuration of FIG. 29, as shown in FIG. 26, the third sub-pixel 130 may not include the third capacitor wiring 134 and the third capacitor 132 (FIG. 30).
. As a result, it is possible to improve the aperture ratio and the manufacturing yield.

(Embodiment 5)
In this embodiment mode, a pixel structure of a display device is described. In particular, a pixel structure of a liquid crystal display device will be described.

A pixel structure in which each liquid crystal mode and a transistor are combined will be described with reference to a cross-sectional view of the pixel.

Note that as the transistor, a thin film transistor (TFT) including a non-single-crystal semiconductor layer typified by amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystalline (also referred to as semi-amorphous) silicon, or the like can be used.

Note that a top gate type, a bottom gate type, or the like can be used as a structure of the transistor. Note that as the bottom-gate transistor, a channel etch type, a channel protection type, or the like can be used.

FIG. 60 is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel in the case where a TN mode and a transistor are combined.
By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 60 to a liquid crystal display device, the liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost.

Features of the pixel structure shown in FIG. 60 will be described. The liquid crystal molecules 10118 shown in FIG.
It is a long and narrow molecule with a major axis and a minor axis. In order to show the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 10118, the length is expressed in FIG. That is, the liquid crystal molecules 1011 expressed in a long way
8, the direction of the major axis is parallel to the paper surface, and the shorter the liquid crystal molecule 10118 expressed, the closer the major axis direction is to the normal direction of the paper surface. That is, the liquid crystal molecules 10118 shown in FIG. 60 have a major axis direction of 90 degrees different between the liquid crystal molecules 10118 close to the first substrate 10101 and the liquid crystal molecules 10118 close to the second substrate 10116. Liquid crystal molecules 101
The direction of the 18 major axes is a direction that smoothly connects them. In other words, the liquid crystal molecules 10118 illustrated in FIG. 60 are interposed between the first substrate 10101 and the second substrate 10116 by 90.
The orientation is twisted.

Note that a case where a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as a transistor is described. In the case of using a transistor including an amorphous semiconductor, a liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost using a large-area substrate.

The liquid crystal display device has a basic part that displays an image, called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is bonded with two processed substrates with a gap of several micrometers,
It is manufactured by injecting a liquid crystal material between two substrates. In FIG. 60, the two substrates are
The first substrate 10101 and the second substrate 10116. Transistors and pixel electrodes are formed on the first substrate. The second substrate includes a light shielding film 10114 and a color filter 101.
15, a fourth conductive layer 10113, a spacer 10117, and a second alignment film 10112 are formed.

Note that the light-blocking film 10114 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10116. Shading film 1
In the case where 0114 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, the light shielding film 1011
When 4 is formed, a display device with little light leakage during black display can be obtained.

Note that the color filter 10115 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10116.
In the case where the color filter 10115 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. However, even when the color filter 10115 is not formed, a display device capable of color display by field sequential driving can be obtained. On the other hand, the color filter 1011
When forming 5, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that spherical spacers may be dispersed instead of the spacers 10117. When the spherical spacers are dispersed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, in the case where the spacer 10117 is formed, the position of the spacer does not vary, so that the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform, and a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.

Processing performed on the first substrate 10101 will be described.

First, the first insulating film 10102 is formed over the first substrate 10101 by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. Note that the first insulating film 10102 is not necessarily formed. The first insulating film 10102 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first conductive layer 10103 is formed over the first insulating film 10102 by a photolithography method,
It is formed by a laser direct drawing method or an ink jet method.

Next, a second insulating film 10104 is formed on the entire surface by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. In the second insulating film 10104, impurities from the substrate affect the semiconductor layer,
It has a function of preventing changes in characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first semiconductor layer 10105 and a second semiconductor layer 10106 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10105 and the second semiconductor layer 10106 are successively formed, and the shapes thereof are processed at the same time.

Next, the second conductive layer 10107 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that dry etching is preferably used as an etching method performed when the shape of the second conductive layer 10107 is processed. Note that the second conductive layer 10107 may be formed using a transparent material or a reflective material.

Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. An example of the process will be described. The second semiconductor layer 10106 is etched using the second conductive layer 10107 as a mask. Alternatively, etching may be performed using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10107 as the mask. Then, the portion of the first semiconductor layer 1 from which the second semiconductor layer 10106 has been removed.
0105 is a transistor and a channel region. By doing so, the number of masks can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a third insulating film 10108 is formed, and contact holes are selectively formed in the third insulating film 10108. Note that a contact hole may be formed in the second insulating film 10104 at the same time as a contact hole is formed in the third insulating film 10108. In addition,
The surface of the third insulating film 10108 is preferably as flat as possible. This is because the alignment of liquid crystal molecules is affected by the unevenness of the surface in contact with the liquid crystal.

Next, the third conductive layer 10109 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like.

Next, a first alignment film 10110 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10110 is formed,
In order to control the alignment of liquid crystal molecules, rubbing may be performed. The rubbing is a process of streaking the alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can be provided with orientation.

The first substrate 10101 manufactured as described above, the light-shielding film 10114, and the color filter 10
115, the fourth conductive layer 10113, the spacer 10117, and the second substrate 10116 provided with the second alignment film 10112 are attached to each other with a gap of several micrometers by a sealant. Then, a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates. Note that in the TN mode, the fourth conductive layer 10113 is formed over the entire surface of the second substrate 10116.

FIG. 61A shows MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Alignnm).
ent) is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel when a method and a transistor are combined. FIG.
By applying the pixel structure shown in (A) to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle, a high response speed, and a high contrast can be obtained.

Features of the pixel structure illustrated in FIG. 61A are described. The characteristics of the pixel structure of the MVA liquid crystal panel will be described. A liquid crystal molecule 10218 illustrated in FIG. 61A is an elongated molecule having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to show the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 10218, the length is expressed in FIG. That is, the long expressed liquid crystal molecule 10218 is
It is assumed that the direction of the major axis is parallel to the paper surface, and the shorter the liquid crystal molecules 10218 expressed, the closer the major axis direction is to the normal direction of the paper surface. In other words, the liquid crystal molecules 10218 illustrated in FIG. 61A are aligned so that the direction of the long axis is in the normal direction of the alignment film. Therefore, the liquid crystal molecules 10218 in the portion where the alignment control protrusion 10219 is located are aligned with the alignment control protrusion 102
It is oriented radially around 19. In this state, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Note that a case where a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as a transistor is described. In the case of using a transistor including an amorphous semiconductor, a liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost using a large-area substrate.

The liquid crystal display device has a basic part that displays an image, called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is bonded with two processed substrates with a gap of several micrometers,
It is manufactured by injecting a liquid crystal material between two substrates. In FIG. 61A, the two substrates are a first substrate 10201 and a second substrate 10216. Transistors and pixel electrodes are formed on the first substrate. The second substrate includes a light-blocking film 10214, a color filter 10215, a fourth conductive layer 10213, a spacer 10217, and a second alignment film 1021.
2 and an alignment control protrusion 10219 are formed.

Note that the light-blocking film 10214 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10216. Shading film 1
In the case where 0214 is not formed, the manufacturing cost can be reduced because the number of steps is reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, the light shielding film 1021
When 4 is formed, a display device with little light leakage during black display can be obtained.

Note that the color filter 10215 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10216.
In the case where the color filter 10215 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. However, even when the color filter 10215 is not manufactured, a display device capable of color display by field sequential driving can be obtained. On the other hand, the color filter 1021
When forming 5, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that spherical spacers may be dispersed over the second substrate 10216 instead of the spacers 10217. When the spherical spacers are dispersed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
In the case where the spacer 10217 is formed, the position of the spacer does not vary, so that the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform, and a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.

Processing performed on the first substrate 10201 is described.

First, the first insulating film 10202 is formed over the first substrate 10201 by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. Note that the first insulating film 10202 is not necessarily formed. The first insulating film 10202 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first conductive layer 10203 is formed over the first insulating film 10202 by a photolithography method.
It is formed by a laser direct drawing method or an ink jet method.

Next, a second insulating film 10204 is formed over the entire surface by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. In the second insulating film 10204, impurities from the substrate affect the semiconductor layer,
It has a function of preventing changes in characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first semiconductor layer 10205 and a second semiconductor layer 10206 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10205 and the second semiconductor layer 10206 are successively formed, and the shapes thereof are processed at the same time.

Next, the second conductive layer 10207 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that dry etching is preferably used as an etching method performed when the shape of the second conductive layer 10207 is processed. Note that as the second conductive layer 10207, a transparent material or a reflective material may be used.

Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. An example of the process will be described. The second semiconductor layer 10206 is etched using the second conductive layer 10207 as a mask. Alternatively, etching may be performed using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10207 as the mask. Then, the portion of the first semiconductor layer 1 from which the second semiconductor layer 10206 has been removed.
0205 is a transistor and a channel region. By doing so, the number of masks can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a third insulating film 10208 is formed, and contact holes are selectively formed in the third insulating film 10208. Note that a contact hole may be formed in the second insulating film 10204 at the same time as a contact hole is formed in the third insulating film 10208.

Next, the third conductive layer 10209 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an ink jet method, or the like.

Next, a first alignment film 10210 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10210 is formed,
In order to control the alignment of liquid crystal molecules, rubbing may be performed. The rubbing is a process of streaking the alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can be provided with orientation.

The first substrate 10201 manufactured as described above, the light shielding film 10214, and the color filter 10
215, the fourth conductive layer 10213, the spacer 10217, and the second substrate 10216 over which the second alignment film 10212 is formed are attached to each other with a gap of several micrometers by a sealant. Then, a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates. MVA
In the method, the fourth conductive layer 10213 is formed over the entire surface of the second substrate 10216.
Note that an alignment control protrusion 10219 is formed in contact with the fourth conductive layer 10213.
The shape of the orientation control protrusion 10219 is preferably a shape having a smooth curved surface.
By doing so, the alignment of the adjacent liquid crystal molecules 10218 becomes extremely close, so that alignment defects can be reduced. It is possible to reduce alignment film defects caused by alignment film disconnection.

FIG. 61 (B) shows a PVA (Patterned Vertical Alignment).
FIG. 3 is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel when a method and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 61B to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, a high response speed, and a high contrast can be obtained.

Features of the pixel structure illustrated in FIG. 61B are described. Liquid crystal molecule 1 shown in FIG.
0248 is an elongated molecule having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to show the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 10248, the length is expressed in FIG. In other words, the liquid crystal molecule 10248 expressed in a long direction has a long axis direction parallel to the paper surface, and the liquid crystal molecule 10248 expressed in a short direction has a long axis direction closer to the normal direction of the paper surface. . That is, the liquid crystal molecules 10248 illustrated in FIG. 61B are aligned so that the direction of the long axis thereof is in the normal direction of the alignment film. Therefore, the liquid crystal molecules 10248 in a portion where the electrode notch 10249 is present.
Are radially oriented around the boundary between the electrode notch 10249 and the fourth conductive layer 10243. In this state, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Note that a case where a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as a transistor is described. In the case of using a transistor including an amorphous semiconductor, a liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost using a large-area substrate.

The liquid crystal display device has a basic part that displays an image, called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is bonded with two processed substrates with a gap of several micrometers,
It is manufactured by injecting a liquid crystal material between two substrates. In FIG. 61B, the two substrates are a first substrate 10231 and a second substrate 10246. Transistors and pixel electrodes are formed on the first substrate. The second substrate includes a light shielding film 10244, a color filter 10245, a fourth conductive layer 10243, a spacer 10247, and the second alignment film 1.
0242 is formed.

Note that the light-blocking film 10244 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10246. Shading film 1
In the case where 0244 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. Meanwhile, the light shielding film 1024
When 4 is formed, a display device with little light leakage during black display can be obtained.

Note that the color filter 10245 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10246.
In the case where the color filter 10245 is not formed, the manufacturing cost can be reduced because the number of steps is reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. However, even when the color filter 10245 is not manufactured, a display device capable of color display by field sequential driving can be obtained. On the other hand, the color filter 1024
When forming 5, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that spherical spacers may be dispersed over the second substrate 10246 instead of the spacers 10247. When the spherical spacers are dispersed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
In the case of forming the spacer 10247, since the position of the spacer does not vary, the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform, and a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.

Processing performed on the first substrate 10231 will be described.

First, the first insulating film 10232 is formed over the first substrate 10231 by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. Note that the first insulating film 10232 is not necessarily formed. The first insulating film 10232 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first conductive layer 10233 is formed over the first insulating film 10232 by a photolithography method,
It is formed by a laser direct drawing method or an ink jet method.

Next, a second insulating film 10234 is formed over the entire surface by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. In the second insulating film 10234, impurities from the substrate affect the semiconductor layer,
It has a function of preventing changes in characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first semiconductor layer 10235 and a second semiconductor layer 10236 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10235 and the second semiconductor layer 10236 are successively formed, and the shapes thereof are processed at the same time.

Next, the second conductive layer 10237 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that dry etching is preferable as an etching method performed when the shape of the second conductive layer 10237 is processed. In addition,
As the second conductive layer 10237, a transparent material or a reflective material may be used.

Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. An example of the process will be described. The second semiconductor layer 10236 is etched using the second conductive layer 10237 as a mask. Alternatively, etching is performed using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10237. Then, the portion of the first conductive layer 10233 from which the second semiconductor layer 10236 is removed becomes a transistor and a channel region. By doing so, the number of masks can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a third insulating film 10238 is formed, and contact holes are selectively formed in the third insulating film 10238. Note that a contact hole may be formed in the second insulating film 10234 at the same time as the contact hole is formed in the third insulating film 10238. In addition,
The surface of the third insulating film 10238 is preferably as flat as possible. This is because the alignment of liquid crystal molecules is affected by the unevenness of the surface in contact with the liquid crystal.

Next, the third conductive layer 10239 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like.

Next, a first alignment film 10240 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10240 is formed,
In order to control the alignment of liquid crystal molecules, rubbing may be performed. The rubbing is a process of streaking the alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can be provided with orientation.

The first substrate 10231 manufactured as described above, the light-shielding film 10244, and the color filter 10
245, the fourth conductive layer 10243, the spacer 10247, and the second substrate 10246 on which the second alignment film 10242 is formed are attached to each other with a gap of several micrometers by a sealant. Then, a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates. PVA
In the method, pattern processing is performed on the fourth conductive layer 10243 and the electrode notch 10249 is formed.
Is formed. The shape of the electrode notch 10249 is not limited, but is preferably a shape in which a plurality of rectangles having different directions are combined. By doing so, a plurality of regions having different orientations can be formed, so that a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained. Note that the fourth conductive layer 10 at the boundary between the electrode notch 10249 and the fourth conductive layer 10243 is used.
The shape of 243 is preferably a smooth curve. By doing so, the alignment of the adjacent liquid crystal molecules 10248 becomes very close, so that alignment defects are reduced. Second alignment film 10
It is possible to reduce defects in the alignment film caused by the step 242 being cut off by the electrode notch 10249.

FIG. 62A is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel in the case where an IPS (In-Plane-Switching) method and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 62A to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle in principle and a small dependence of response speed on gray scale can be obtained.

Features of the pixel structure illustrated in FIG. Liquid crystal molecule 1 shown in FIG.
0318 is an elongated molecule having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to show the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 10318, the length is expressed in FIG. In other words, the liquid crystal molecule 10318 expressed in a long direction has a long axis direction parallel to the paper surface, and the liquid crystal molecule 10318 expressed in a short direction has a long axis direction closer to the normal direction of the paper surface. . That is, the liquid crystal molecules 10318 illustrated in FIG. 62A are aligned so that the direction of the long axis is always in the horizontal direction to the substrate. In FIG. 62A, orientation is shown in the absence of an electric field. However, when an electric field is applied to the liquid crystal molecules 10318, the orientation of the major axis always remains horizontal with the substrate, and the horizontal plane is maintained. Rotate with. In this state, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Note that a case where a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as a transistor is described. In the case of using a transistor including an amorphous semiconductor, a liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost using a large-area substrate.

The liquid crystal display device has a basic part that displays an image, called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is bonded with two processed substrates with a gap of several micrometers,
It is manufactured by injecting a liquid crystal material between two substrates. In FIG. 62A, the two substrates are a first substrate 10301 and a second substrate 10316. Transistors and pixel electrodes are formed on the first substrate. A light-blocking film 10314, a color filter 10315, a spacer 10317, and a second alignment film 10312 are formed over the second substrate.

Note that the light-blocking film 10314 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10316. Shading film 1
When 0314 is not formed, the manufacturing cost can be reduced because the number of steps is reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, the light shielding film 1031
When 4 is formed, a display device with little light leakage during black display can be obtained.

Note that the color filter 10315 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10316.
In the case where the color filter 10315 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that manufacturing cost can be reduced. However, even when the color filter 10315 is not formed, a display device capable of color display by field sequential driving can be obtained. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, the color filter 1031
When forming 5, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that spherical spacers may be dispersed over the second substrate 10316 instead of the spacers 10317. When the spherical spacers are dispersed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
When the spacer 10317 is formed, the position of the spacer does not vary, so that the distance between the two substrates can be uniform, and a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.

Processing performed on the first substrate 10301 is described.

First, the first insulating film 10302 is formed over the first substrate 10301 by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. Note that the first insulating film 10302 is not necessarily formed. The first insulating film 10302 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first conductive layer 10303 is formed over the first insulating film 10302 by a photolithography method.
It is formed by a laser direct drawing method or an ink jet method.

Next, a second insulating film 10304 is formed over the entire surface by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. In the second insulating film 10304, impurities from the substrate affect the semiconductor layer,
It has a function of preventing changes in characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first semiconductor layer 10305 and a second semiconductor layer 10306 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10305 and the second semiconductor layer 10306 are successively formed, and the shapes thereof are processed at the same time.

Next, the second conductive layer 10307 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that dry etching is preferably used as an etching method performed when the shape of the second conductive layer 10307 is processed. Note that as the second conductive layer 10307, a transparent material or a reflective material may be used.

Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. An example of the process will be described. The second semiconductor layer 10306 is etched using the second conductive layer 10307 as a mask. Alternatively, etching may be performed using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10307 as the mask. Then, the portion of the first semiconductor layer 1 from which the second semiconductor layer 10306 has been removed.
0305 becomes a transistor and a channel region. By doing so, the number of masks can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a third insulating film 10308 is formed, and contact holes are selectively formed in the third insulating film 10308. Note that a contact hole may be formed in the second insulating film 10304 at the same time as a contact hole is formed in the third insulating film 10308.

Next, the third conductive layer 10309 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Here, the shape of the third conductive layer 10309 is two comb teeth that are meshed with each other. One comb-like electrode is electrically connected to one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor, and the other comb-like electrode is electrically connected to the common electrode. By doing so, a horizontal electric field can be effectively applied to the liquid crystal molecules 10318.

Next, a first alignment film 10310 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10310 is formed,
In order to control the alignment of liquid crystal molecules, rubbing may be performed. The rubbing is a process of streaking the alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can be provided with orientation.

The first substrate 10301 manufactured as described above, the light shielding film 10314, and the color filter 10
315, the spacer 10317, and the second alignment film 10312 are attached to each other with a gap of several micrometers by a sealant. Then, a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates.

FIG. 62B is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel in the case where an FFS (Fringe Field Switching) method and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 62B to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle in principle and a small dependence of response speed on gray scale can be obtained.

Features of the pixel structure illustrated in FIG. 62B are described. Liquid crystal molecule 1 shown in FIG.
0348 is an elongated molecule having a major axis and a minor axis. In order to show the direction of the liquid crystal molecules 10348, the length is expressed in FIG. In other words, the liquid crystal molecule 10348 expressed in a long direction has a direction of the long axis parallel to the paper surface, and the liquid crystal molecule 10348 expressed in a short direction has a long axis direction closer to the normal direction of the paper surface. . That is, the liquid crystal molecules 10348 illustrated in FIG. 62B are aligned so that the direction of the long axis is always in the horizontal direction to the substrate. In FIG. 62B, orientation in a state without an electric field is shown. However, when an electric field is applied to the liquid crystal molecules 10348, the orientation of the major axis always remains horizontal with the substrate, and the horizontal plane is maintained. Rotate with. In this state, a liquid crystal display device with a large viewing angle can be obtained.

Note that a case where a bottom-gate transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as a transistor is described. In the case of using a transistor including an amorphous semiconductor, a liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost using a large-area substrate.

The liquid crystal display device has a basic part that displays an image, called a liquid crystal panel. The liquid crystal panel is bonded with two processed substrates with a gap of several micrometers,
It is manufactured by injecting a liquid crystal material between two substrates. In FIG. 62B, the two substrates are a first substrate 10331 and a second substrate 10346. Transistors and pixel electrodes are formed on the first substrate, and the light shielding film 10344 and the color filter 1 are formed on the second substrate.
0345, a spacer 10347, and a second alignment film 10342 are formed.

Note that the light-blocking film 10344 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10346. Shading film 1
In the case where 0344 is not formed, the manufacturing cost can be reduced because the number of steps is reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, the light shielding film 1034
When 4 is formed, a display device with little light leakage during black display can be obtained.

Note that the color filter 10345 is not necessarily formed over the second substrate 10346.
In the case where the color filter 10345 is not formed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. However, even when the color filter 10345 is not formed, a display device capable of color display by field sequential driving can be obtained. On the other hand, the color filter 1034
When forming 5, a display device capable of color display can be obtained.

Note that spherical spacers may be dispersed over the second substrate 10346 instead of the spacers 10347. When the spherical spacers are dispersed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure is simple, the yield can be improved. on the other hand,
In the case where the spacer 10347 is formed, since the position of the spacer does not vary, the distance between the two substrates can be made uniform, and a display device with little display unevenness can be obtained.

Processing performed on the first substrate 10331 will be described.

First, the first insulating film 10332 is formed over the first substrate 10331 by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. Note that the first insulating film 10332 is not necessarily formed. The first insulating film 10332 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first conductive layer 10333 is formed over the first insulating film 10332 by a photolithography method.
It is formed by a laser direct drawing method or an ink jet method.

Next, a second insulating film 10334 is formed over the entire surface by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. In the second insulating film 10334, impurities from the substrate affect the semiconductor layer,
It has a function of preventing changes in characteristics of the transistor.

Next, a first semiconductor layer 10335 and a second semiconductor layer 10336 are formed. Note that the first semiconductor layer 10335 and the second semiconductor layer 10336 are successively formed, and the shapes thereof are processed at the same time.

Next, the second conductive layer 10337 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Note that dry etching is preferably used as an etching method performed when the shape of the second conductive layer 10337 is processed. Note that the second conductive layer 10337 may be formed using a transparent material or a reflective material.

Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. An example of the process will be described. The second semiconductor layer 10336 is etched using the second conductive layer 10337 as a mask. Further, the mask is etched using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 10337. Then, the portion of the first semiconductor layer 103 from which the second semiconductor layer 10336 has been removed.
35 is a transistor and a channel region. By doing so, the number of masks can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a third insulating film 10338 is formed, and contact holes are selectively formed in the third insulating film 10338.

Next, the third conductive layer 10339 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like.

Next, a fourth insulating film 10349 is formed, and contact holes are selectively formed in the fourth insulating film 10349. Note that the surface of the fourth insulating film 10349 is preferably as flat as possible. This is because the alignment of liquid crystal molecules is affected by the unevenness of the surface in contact with the liquid crystal.

Next, the fourth conductive layer 10343 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Here, the third conductive layer 10339 has a comb shape.

Next, a first alignment film 10340 is formed. Note that after the first alignment film 10340 is formed,
In order to control the alignment of liquid crystal molecules, rubbing may be performed. The rubbing is a process of streaking the alignment film by rubbing the alignment film with a cloth. By performing rubbing, the alignment film can be provided with orientation.

The first substrate 10331 manufactured as described above, the light shielding film 10344, and the color filter 10
A liquid crystal panel can be manufactured by bonding 345, the spacer 10347, and the second alignment film 10342 with a sealant with a gap of several micrometers and injecting a liquid crystal material between the two substrates.

Here, materials that can be used for each conductive layer or each insulating film will be described.

The first insulating film 10102 in FIG. 60, the first insulating film 10202 in FIG. 61A, and FIG.
), The first insulating film 10302 in FIG. 62A, and the first insulating film 10332 in FIG. 62B, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film ( An insulating film such as SiOxNy can be used. Alternatively, the first insulating film 101
For 02, an insulating film having a stacked structure in which two or more films of a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or the like are combined can be used.

The first conductive layer 10103 in FIG. 60, the first conductive layer 10203 in FIG. 61A, and FIG.
), The first conductive layer 10303 in FIG. 62A, the first conductive layer 10303 in FIG. 62A, and the first conductive layer 10333 in FIG. Mo, Ti
Al, Nd, Cr, or the like can be used. Alternatively, Mo, Ti, Al, Nd, C
A stacked structure in which two or more of r and the like are combined can also be used.

The second insulating film 10104 in FIG. 60, the second insulating film 10204 in FIG. 61A, and FIG.
), The second insulating film 10304 in FIG. 62A, and the second insulating film 10334 in FIG. 62B, a thermal oxide film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or an oxide film. A silicon nitride film or the like can be used. Alternatively, a stacked structure in which two or more of a thermal oxide film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxynitride film, and the like are combined can be used. Note that a silicon oxide film is preferable in a portion in contact with the semiconductor layer. This is because the trap level at the interface with the semiconductor layer is reduced when a silicon oxide film is used. Note that a silicon nitride film is preferable in a portion in contact with Mo.
This is because the silicon nitride film does not oxidize Mo.

The first semiconductor layer 10105 in FIG. 60, the first semiconductor layer 10205 in FIG. 61A, and FIG.
FIG. 62B illustrates the first semiconductor layer 10235 in FIG. 62B, the first semiconductor layer 10305 in FIG.
As the first semiconductor layer 10335 in (B), silicon or silicon germanium (Si
Ge) or the like can be used.

The second semiconductor layer 10106 in FIG. 60, the second semiconductor layer 10206 in FIG.
FIG. 62B shows the second semiconductor layer 10236 in FIG. 62B, FIG. 62A shows the second semiconductor layer 10306 in FIG.
As the second semiconductor layer 10336 in (B), silicon containing phosphorus or the like can be used.

The second conductive layer 10107 and the third conductive layer 10109 in FIG. 60, the second conductive layer 10207 and the third conductive layer 10209 in FIG. 61A, the second conductive layer 10237 in FIG. The second conductive layer 10239, the second conductive layer 10307 in FIG. 62A, and the second conductive layer 1
As a material having transparency of the second conductive layer 10337, the third conductive layer 10339, and the fourth conductive layer 10343 in FIG. 62B, indium tin oxide in which tin oxide is mixed with indium oxide is used. (ITO) film, indium tin oxide (ITSO) film in which silicon oxide is mixed with indium tin oxide (ITO), indium zinc oxide (IZO) film in which zinc oxide is mixed in zinc oxide, zinc oxide film or oxide A tin film or the like can be used. Note that IZO is a transparent conductive material formed by sputtering using a target in which 2 to 20 wt% of zinc oxide (ZnO) is mixed with ITO.

The second conductive layer 10107 and the third conductive layer 10109 in FIG. 60, the second conductive layer 10207 and the third conductive layer 10209 in FIG. 61A, the second conductive layer 10237 in FIG. The second conductive layer 10239, the second conductive layer 10307 in FIG. 62A, and the second conductive layer 1
As materials having reflectivity for the second conductive layer 10337, the second conductive layer 10339, and the fourth conductive layer 10343 in FIG. 62B, Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W
Al or the like can be used. Alternatively, a two-layer structure in which Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, and Al are stacked, or a three-layer structure in which Al is sandwiched between metals such as Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, and W may be used.

The third insulating film 10108 in FIG. 60, the third insulating film 10208 in FIG. 61A, and FIG.
) Third insulating film 10238, FIG. 61B third conductive layer 10239, FIG. 62A third insulating film 10308, FIG. 62B third insulating film 10338 and fourth. Insulating film 10
As the material 349, an inorganic material (such as silicon oxide, silicon nitride, or silicon oxynitride) or a low dielectric constant organic compound material (such as a photosensitive or non-photosensitive organic resin material) can be used. Alternatively, a material containing siloxane can be used. Siloxane is a material in which a skeleton structure is formed by a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aryl group) is used.
Alternatively, a fluoro group may be used as a substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as a substituent.

The first alignment film 10110 in FIG. 60, the first alignment film 10210 in FIG. 61A, and FIG.
), The first alignment film 10310 in FIG. 61B, and the first alignment film 10340 in FIG. 62B can be a polymer film such as polyimide.

Next, a pixel structure in the case where each liquid crystal mode and a transistor are combined will be described with reference to a top view (layout diagram) of the pixel.

As the liquid crystal mode, TN (Twisted Nematic) mode, IPS (
In-Plane-Switching mode, FFS (Fringe Field)
Switching mode, MVA (Multi-domain Vertical)
Alignment mode, PVA (Patterned Vertical Ali)
gmnent), ASM (Axial Symmetric Aligned Mi)
cro-cell) mode, OCB (Optical Compensated Bir)
efficiency mode, FLC (Ferroelectric Liquid)
Crystal) mode, AFLC (Antiferroelectric Liquid)
d Crystal) or the like can be used.

Note that as the transistor, a thin film transistor (TFT) including a non-single-crystal semiconductor layer typified by amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystalline (also referred to as semi-amorphous) silicon, or the like can be used.

Note that a top gate type, a bottom gate type, or the like can be used as a structure of the transistor. As the bottom-gate transistor, a channel etch type, a channel protection type, or the like can be used.

FIG. 63 is an example of a top view of a subpixel in the case where a TN mode and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 63 to a liquid crystal display device, the liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost. Note that FIG. 63 shows the configuration of one subpixel for convenience of explanation. That is, one pixel can be provided by providing a plurality of subpixels having the structure shown in FIG.

63 includes a scanning line 10401, a video signal line 10402, and a capacitor line 1040.
3, a transistor 10404, a pixel electrode 10405, and a pixel capacitor 10406.

The scan line 10401 has a function of transmitting a signal (scan signal) to the pixel. Video signal line 10
Reference numeral 402 denotes a function for transmitting a signal (video signal) to a pixel. The scanning line 104
Since 01 and the video signal line 10402 are arranged in a matrix, they are formed of different conductive layers. Note that the scan line 10401. A semiconductor layer may be disposed at an intersection with the video signal line 10402. In this way, the scanning line 10401 is obtained. Video signal line 10
402 and the cross capacitance can be reduced.

The capacitor line 10403 is arranged in parallel with the pixel electrode 10405. A portion where the capacitor line 10403 and the pixel electrode 10405 overlap is a pixel capacitor 10406. Note that a part of the capacitor line 10403 extends along the video signal line 10402 so as to surround the video signal line 10402. By doing so, crosstalk can be reduced. Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which the potential of an electrode that should hold a potential changes with a change in potential of the video signal line 10402. Note that the capacitor line 10403 and the video signal line 1040
By disposing the semiconductor layer between the two, the cross capacitance can be reduced. In addition,
The capacitor line 10403 is formed using a material similar to that of the scan line 10401.

The transistor 10404 functions as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 10402 and the pixel electrode 10405. Note that one of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10404 is disposed so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10404. Thus, the channel width of the transistor 10404 is increased, so that switching ability can be improved. Note that the transistor 10404
The gate electrode is disposed so as to surround the semiconductor layer.

The pixel electrode 10405 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10404. The pixel electrode 10405 is an electrode for applying a signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 10402 to the liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10405 is rectangular. By doing so, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased. The pixel electrode 1040
As 5, a material having transparency or a material having reflectivity can be used. Alternatively, a material having transparency and a material having reflectivity may be combined and used for the pixel electrode 10405.

FIG. 64A is an example of a top view of a subpixel in the case where an MVA method and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 64A to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, a high response speed, and a high contrast can be obtained. In FIG. 64, for convenience of explanation, the configuration of one subpixel is shown. That is, one pixel can be provided by providing a plurality of subpixels having the structure shown in FIG.

64A includes a scanning line 10501, a video signal line 10502, and a capacitor line 1.
0503, a transistor 10504, a pixel electrode 10505, a pixel capacitor 10506, and an alignment control protrusion 10507.

The scanning line 10501 has a function of transmitting a signal (scanning signal) to a subpixel. Video signal line 1
0502 has a function for transmitting a signal (video signal) to a sub-pixel. Scan line 1
Since 0501 and the video signal line 10502 are arranged in a matrix, they are formed of different conductive layers. Note that the scan line 10501. A semiconductor layer may be disposed at an intersection with the video signal line 10502. In this way, the scanning line 10501 is obtained. The crossing capacitance with the video signal line 10502 can be reduced.

The capacitor line 10503 is arranged in parallel with the pixel electrode 10505. A portion where the capacitor line 10503 and the pixel electrode 10505 overlap with each other is a pixel capacitor 10506. Note that a part of the capacitor line 10503 extends along the video signal line 10502 so as to surround the video signal line 10502. By doing so, crosstalk can be reduced. Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which the potential of an electrode that should hold a potential changes with a change in potential of the video signal line 10502. Note that the capacitor line 10503 and the video signal line 1050
By disposing the semiconductor layer between the two, the cross capacitance can be reduced. In addition,
The capacitor line 10503 is formed using a material similar to that of the scan line 10501.

The transistor 10504 functions as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 10502 and the pixel electrode 10505. Note that one of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10504 is disposed so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10504. Thus, the channel width of the transistor 10504 is increased, so that switching ability can be improved. Note that the transistor 10504
The gate electrode is disposed so as to surround the semiconductor layer.

The pixel electrode 10505 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10504. The pixel electrode 10505 is an electrode for applying a signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 10502 to the liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10505 is rectangular. By doing so, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be increased. The pixel electrode 1050
As 5, a material having transparency or a material having reflectivity can be used. Alternatively, a material having transparency and a material having reflectivity may be combined and used for the pixel electrode 10505.

The orientation control protrusion 10507 is formed on the counter substrate. The alignment control protrusion 10507 has a function of radially aligning liquid crystal molecules. The shape of the alignment control protrusion 10507 is not limited. For example, the shape of the orientation control protrusion 10507 may be a dogleg shape. By doing so, it is possible to form a plurality of regions having different alignments of liquid crystal molecules. The viewing angle can be improved.

FIG. 64B is an example of a top view of a subpixel in the case where a PVA method and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 64B to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, a high response speed, and a high contrast can be obtained.

64B includes a scanning line 10511, a video signal line 10512, and a capacitor line 1.
0513, a transistor 10514, a pixel electrode 10515, a pixel capacitor 10516, and an electrode notch 10517.

The scanning line 10511 has a function of transmitting a signal (scanning signal) to a subpixel. Video signal line 1
0512 has a function for transmitting a signal (video signal) to a sub-pixel. Scan line 1
Since 0511 and the video signal line 10512 are arranged in a matrix, they are formed of different conductive layers. Note that the scan line 10511 is used. A semiconductor layer may be disposed at an intersection with the video signal line 10512. In this way, the scanning line 10511 is obtained. The crossing capacitance with the video signal line 10512 can be reduced.

The capacitor line 10513 is arranged in parallel with the pixel electrode 10515. A portion where the capacitor line 10513 and the pixel electrode 10515 overlap with each other is a pixel capacitor 10516. Note that a part of the capacitor line 10513 extends along the video signal line 10512 so as to surround the video signal line 10512. By doing so, crosstalk can be reduced. Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which the potential of an electrode that should hold a potential changes with a change in potential of the video signal line 10512. Note that the capacitor line 10513 and the video signal line 1051 are provided.
By disposing the semiconductor layer between the two, the cross capacitance can be reduced. In addition,
The capacitor line 10513 is formed using a material similar to that of the scan line 10511.

The transistor 10514 functions as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 10512 and the pixel electrode 10515. Note that one of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10514 is disposed so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10514. Thus, the channel width of the transistor 10514 is increased, so that switching ability can be improved. Note that the transistor 10514
The gate electrode is disposed so as to surround the semiconductor layer.

The pixel electrode 10515 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10514. The pixel electrode 10515 is an electrode for applying a signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 10512 to the liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10515 has a shape that matches the shape of the electrode notch 10517. Specifically, the electrode notch 10517
The shape is such that a portion in which the pixel electrode 10515 is not formed is formed in a portion without the mark. By doing so, it is possible to form a plurality of regions having different alignments of liquid crystal molecules. The viewing angle can be improved. Note that the pixel electrode 10515 can be formed using a transparent material or a reflective material. Alternatively, a material having transparency and a material having reflectivity may be combined and used for the pixel electrode 10515.

FIG. 65A is an example of a top view of a subpixel in the case where an IPS mode and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 65A to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle in principle and a small dependence of response speed on gray scale can be obtained. In FIG. 65, for convenience of explanation, the configuration of one subpixel is shown. That is, one pixel can be provided by providing a plurality of subpixels having the structure shown in FIG.

A subpixel illustrated in FIG. 65A includes a scanning line 10601, a video signal line 10602, a common electrode 10603, a transistor 10604, and a pixel electrode 10605.

The scanning line 10601 has a function of transmitting a signal (scanning signal) to a subpixel. Video signal line 1
0602 has a function for transmitting a signal (video signal) to a sub-pixel. Scan line 1
Since 0601 and the video signal line 10602 are arranged in a matrix, they are formed of different conductive layers. Note that at the intersection of the scanning line 10601 and the video signal line 10602,
A semiconductor layer may be disposed. In this way, the scanning line 10601 is obtained. Video signal line 1
0602 and the cross capacitance can be reduced. Note that the video signal line 10602 is formed in accordance with the shape of the pixel electrode 10605.

The common electrode 10603 is disposed in parallel with the pixel electrode 10605. Common electrode 1060
Reference numeral 3 denotes an electrode for generating a horizontal electric field. Note that the common electrode 10603 has a bent comb shape. Note that part of the common electrode 10603 extends along the video signal line 10602 so as to surround the video signal line 10602. By doing so, crosstalk can be reduced. Crosstalk is a phenomenon in which the potential of an electrode that should hold a potential changes with a change in potential of the video signal line 10602. Note that by disposing a semiconductor layer between the common electrode 10603 and the video signal line 10602, cross capacitance can be reduced. Note that a portion of the common electrode 10603 arranged in parallel with the scan line 10601 is formed using a material similar to that of the scan line 10601. Common electrode 106
The portion arranged in parallel with the pixel electrode 10605 of 03 is made of the same material as that of the pixel electrode 10605.

The transistor 10604 functions as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 10602 and the pixel electrode 10605. Note that one of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10604 is disposed so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10604. Thus, the channel width of the transistor 10604 is increased, so that switching ability can be improved. Note that the transistor 10604
The gate electrode is disposed so as to surround the semiconductor layer.

The pixel electrode 10605 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10604. The pixel electrode 10505 is an electrode for applying a signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 10602 to the liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10605 has a bent comb-like shape. By doing so, a transverse electric field can be applied to the liquid crystal molecules.
A plurality of regions having different alignment of liquid crystal molecules can be formed. The viewing angle can be improved. Note that the pixel electrode 10605 can be formed using a transparent material or a reflective material. Alternatively, a material having transparency and a material having reflectivity may be combined and used for the pixel electrode 10605.

Note that the comb-like portion of the common electrode 10603 and the pixel electrode 10605 may be formed of different conductive layers. For example, the comb-like portion of the common electrode 10603 is the scanning line 1
It may be formed of the same conductive layer as 0601 or the video signal line 10602. Similarly, the pixel electrode 10605 may be formed using the same conductive layer as the scan line 10601 or the video signal line 10602.

FIG. 65B is a top view of a subpixel in the case where the FFS method and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 65B to a liquid crystal display device, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle in principle and a small dependence of response speed on gray scale can be obtained.

The sub-pixel illustrated in FIG. 65B may include a scan line 10611, a video signal line 10612, a common electrode 10613, a transistor 10614, and a pixel electrode 10615.

The scanning line 10611 has a function of transmitting a signal (scanning signal) to a subpixel. Video signal line 1
0612 has a function for transmitting a signal (video signal) to a sub-pixel. Scan line 1
Since 0611 and the video signal line 10612 are arranged in a matrix, they are formed of different conductive layers. Note that the scan line 10611. A semiconductor layer may be disposed at an intersection with the video signal line 10612. In this way, the scanning line 10611 is obtained. The crossing capacitance with the video signal line 10612 can be reduced. Note that the video signal line 10612 is formed in accordance with the shape of the pixel electrode 10615.

The common electrode 10613 is uniformly formed below the pixel electrode 10615 and below the pixel electrode 10615 and the pixel electrode 10615. Note that as the common electrode 10613,
A material having transparency or a material having reflectivity can be used. Alternatively, a material having transparency and a material having reflectivity may be combined and used for the common electrode 10613.

The transistor 10614 functions as a switch for electrically connecting the video signal line 10612 and the pixel electrode 10615. Note that one of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10604 is disposed so as to be surrounded by the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 10614. Thus, the channel width of the transistor 10614 is increased, so that switching ability can be improved. Note that the transistor 10614
The gate electrode is disposed so as to surround the semiconductor layer.

The pixel electrode 10615 is electrically connected to one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 10614. The pixel electrode 10515 is an electrode for applying a signal voltage transmitted through the video signal line 10612 to the liquid crystal element. Note that the pixel electrode 10615 has a bent comb-like shape. By doing so, a transverse electric field can be applied to the liquid crystal molecules.
Note that the comb-like pixel electrode 10615 is disposed closer to the liquid crystal layer than the uniform portion of the common electrode 10613. A plurality of regions having different alignment of liquid crystal molecules can be formed.
The viewing angle can be improved. Note that the pixel electrode 10615 can be formed using a transparent material or a reflective material. Alternatively, a material having transparency and a material having reflectivity may be combined and used for the pixel electrode 10615.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied to and combined with the contents (may be a part) described in the drawings of another embodiment and examples. Or can be freely replaced. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each embodiment with a portion of another embodiment and an example.

Note that in this embodiment, the contents described in other embodiments and examples (may be a part)
Example when embodied, example when slightly modified, example when partially changed, example when improved, example when described in detail, example when applied, example with related parts And so on. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes and examples can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.

(Embodiment 6)
In the present embodiment, the peripheral portion of the liquid crystal panel will be described.

66 shows a backlight unit 20101 called an edge light type and the liquid crystal panel 2.
An example of a liquid crystal display device having 0107 is shown. The edge light type is a method in which a light source is arranged at the end of the backlight unit and the fluorescence of the light source is emitted from the entire light emitting surface.
The edge-light type backlight unit is thin and can save power.

The backlight unit 20101 includes a diffusion plate 20102, a light guide plate 20103, and a reflection plate 20.
104, a lamp reflector 20105 and a light source 20106.

The light source 20106 has a function of emitting light as necessary. For example, as the light source 20106, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube, a light emitting diode, an inorganic EL, an organic EL, or the like is used. The lamp reflector 20105 has a function of efficiently guiding the fluorescence from the light source 20106 to the light guide plate 20103. The light guide plate 20103 has a function of totally reflecting fluorescence and guiding light to the entire surface. The diffuser plate 20102 has a function of reducing unevenness in brightness. The reflector 20104 is
It has a function of reflecting and reusing light leaked downward from the light guide plate 20103 (the direction opposite to the liquid crystal panel 20107).

Note that a control circuit for adjusting the luminance of the light source 20106 is connected to the backlight unit 20101. With this control circuit, the luminance of the light source 20106 can be adjusted.

67 (A), (B), (C), and (D) are diagrams showing a detailed configuration of an edge light type backlight unit. Note that description of the diffusion plate, the light guide plate, and the reflection plate is omitted.

A backlight unit 20201 illustrated in FIG. 67A has a cold cathode tube 20203 as a light source.
It is the structure using. And in order to reflect the light from the cold cathode tube 20203 efficiently,
A ramp reflector 20202 is provided. Such a configuration is often used for a large display device because of the intensity of luminance from the cold cathode fluorescent lamp.

A backlight unit 20211 illustrated in FIG. 67B includes a light-emitting diode (L
ED) 20213 is used. For example, a white light emitting diode (W) 20
213 are arranged at predetermined intervals. A lamp reflector 20212 is provided to efficiently reflect light from the light emitting diode 20213.

Since the luminance of the light emitting diode is high, a structure using the light emitting diode is suitable for a large display device. Since the color reproducibility of the light emitting diode is excellent, the arrangement area can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frame of the display device.

Note that in the case where the light-emitting diode is mounted on a large display device, the light-emitting diode can be disposed on the back surface of the substrate. The light emitting diodes maintain a predetermined interval, and the light emitting diodes of each color are arranged in order. The color reproducibility can be improved by the arrangement of the light emitting diodes.

A backlight unit 20221 illustrated in FIG. 67C includes a light-emitting diode (LED) 20223, a light-emitting diode 20224 (LED), and a light-emitting diode (LED) 20225 for each color RGB as a light source. Each color RGB light emitting diode 20223 (L
ED), the light emitting diode 20224 (LED), and the light emitting diode 20225 (LED) are arranged at predetermined intervals. RGB light emitting diodes 20223 (LED)
By using the light emitting diode 20224 (LED) and the light emitting diode 20225 (LED), color reproducibility can be improved. A lamp reflector 20222 is provided to efficiently reflect light from the light emitting diode.

Since the luminance of the light emitting diode is high, a configuration using light emitting diodes of each color RGB as a light source is suitable for a large display device. Since the color reproducibility is excellent, the arrangement area can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frame of the display device.

Note that color display can be performed by sequentially lighting the RGB light emitting diodes according to time. This is the so-called field sequential mode.

In addition, the light emitting diode which emits white, and the light emitting diode 20223 (LED of each color RGB)
), A light emitting diode 20224 (LED), and a light emitting diode 20225 (LED) can be combined.

Note that in the case where the light-emitting diode is mounted on a large display device, the light-emitting diode can be disposed on the back surface of the substrate. The light emitting diodes maintain a predetermined interval, and the light emitting diodes of each color are arranged in order. The color reproducibility can be improved by the arrangement of the light emitting diodes.

A backlight unit 20231 illustrated in FIG. 67D includes a light-emitting diode (LED) 20233, a light-emitting diode (LED) 20234, and a light-emitting diode (LED) 20235 for each color RGB as a light source. For example, each color RGB light emitting diode (LE
D) 20233, light emitting diode 20234 (LED), light emitting diode 20235 (L
A plurality of colors (for example, green) having a low emission intensity among ED) are arranged. By using the light emitting diode 20233 (LED), the light emitting diode 20234 (LED), and the light emitting diode 20235 (LED) of each color RGB, color reproducibility can be improved. A lamp reflector 20232 is provided to efficiently reflect light from the light emitting diode.

Since the luminance of the light emitting diode is high, a configuration using light emitting diodes of each color RGB as a light source is suitable for a large display device. Since the color reproducibility of the light emitting diode is excellent, the arrangement area can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frame of the display device.

Note that color display can be performed by sequentially lighting the RGB light emitting diodes according to time. This is the so-called field sequential mode.

In addition, the light emitting diode which emits white, and the light emitting diode 20233 (LED of each color RGB)
), A light emitting diode 20234 (LED), and a light emitting diode 20235 (LED) can be combined.

Note that in the case where the light-emitting diode is mounted on a large display device, the light-emitting diode can be disposed on the back surface of the substrate. The light emitting diodes maintain a predetermined interval, and the light emitting diodes of each color are arranged in order. The color reproducibility can be improved by the arrangement of the light emitting diodes.

FIG. 70A illustrates an example of a liquid crystal display device including a backlight unit called a direct type and a liquid crystal panel. The direct type is a method in which a light source is arranged directly under a light emitting surface to emit fluorescence of the light source from the entire light emitting surface. The direct type backlight unit can efficiently use the amount of emitted light.

The backlight unit 20500 includes a diffusion plate 20501, a light shielding plate 20502, a lamp reflector 20503, and a light source 20504.

The light source 20504 has a function of emitting light as necessary. For example, as the light source 20505, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube, a light emitting diode, an inorganic EL, an organic EL, or the like is used. The lamp reflector 20503 has a function of efficiently guiding the fluorescence of the light source 20504 to the diffusion plate 20501 and the light shielding plate 20502. The light shielding plate 20502 has a function of reducing unevenness in brightness by increasing the light shielding as the light is stronger in accordance with the arrangement of the light sources 20504. The diffusion plate 20501 further has a function of reducing brightness unevenness.

Note that a control circuit for adjusting the luminance of the light source 20504 is connected to the backlight unit 20500. With this control circuit, the luminance of the light source 20504 can be adjusted.

FIG. 70B illustrates an example of a liquid crystal display device including a backlight unit called a direct type and a liquid crystal panel. The direct type is a method in which a light source is arranged directly under a light emitting surface to emit fluorescence of the light source from the entire light emitting surface. The direct type backlight unit can efficiently use the amount of emitted light.

The backlight unit 20510 includes a diffusion plate 20511, a light shielding plate 20512, a lamp reflector 20513, RGB light sources (R) 20514a, light sources (G) 20514b, and light sources (B) 20514c.

Each color RGB light source 20514a (R), light source 20514b (G) and light source 20514c (
B) has a function of emitting light as necessary. For example, light source 20514a (R), light source 2
As the 0514b (G) and the light source 20514c (B), a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube, a light emitting diode, an inorganic EL, an organic EL, or the like is used. The lamp reflector 20513 has a function of efficiently guiding the fluorescence of the light source 20514 to the diffusion plate 20511 and the light shielding plate 20512. The light-shielding plate 20512 has a function of reducing unevenness in brightness by increasing the light-shielding as the light is stronger in accordance with the arrangement of the light sources 20514. The diffusion plate 20511 further has a function of reducing brightness unevenness.

Note that the backlight unit 20510 is connected to a control circuit for adjusting the luminance of each color RGB light source 20514a (R), light source 20514b (G), and light source 20514c (B). By this control circuit, each color RGB light source 20514a (R), light source 20
The brightness of 514b (G) and the light source 20514c (B) can be adjusted.

FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a polarizing plate (also referred to as a polarizing film).

Polarizing film 20300 is protective film 20301, substrate film 20302, PVA
A polarizing film 20303, a substrate film 20304, an adhesive layer 20305, and a release film 20306 are included.

The PVA polarizing film 20303 has a function of generating light only in a certain vibration direction (linearly polarized light). Specifically, the PVA polarizing film 20303 includes molecules (polarizers) whose electron densities are greatly different from each other vertically and horizontally. The PVA polarizing film 20303 can produce linearly polarized light by aligning the directions of molecules in which the electron density is greatly different in the vertical and horizontal directions.

As an example, the PVA polarizing film 20303 is made of polyvinyl alcohol (Poly Vi).
Nyl Alcohol) is doped with an iodine compound, and the PVA film is pulled in a certain direction, whereby a film in which iodine molecules are arranged in a certain direction can be obtained. And the light parallel to the long axis of an iodine molecule is absorbed by the iodine molecule. In addition, a dichroic dye may be used instead of iodine for high durability use and high heat resistance use. The dye is preferably used in a liquid crystal display device that requires durability and heat resistance, such as an in-vehicle LCD or a projector LCD.

The PVA polarizing film 20303 is a film (substrate film 20302 that serves as a base material on both sides).
And the substrate film 20304), the reliability can be increased. PVA
The polarizing film 20303 may be sandwiched between highly transparent and highly durable triacetylrose (TAC) films. In addition, a board | substrate film and a TAC film function as a protective layer of the polarizer which the PVA polarizing film 20303 has.

One substrate film (substrate film 20304) has an adhesive layer 20305 attached to a glass substrate of a liquid crystal panel. Note that the adhesive layer 20305 is formed by applying an adhesive to a substrate film (substrate film 20304) on one side. Adhesive layer 203
05 is provided with a release film 20306 (separate film).

The other substrate film (substrate film 20302) is provided with a protective film 20301.

Note that a hard coat scattering layer (anti-glare layer) may be provided on the surface of the polarizing film 20300. The hard coat scattering layer has fine irregularities formed on the surface by AG treatment, and has an antiglare function for scattering external light, so that reflection of external light on the liquid crystal panel can be prevented. Surface reflection can be prevented.

Note that a plurality of optical thin film layers having different refractive indexes may be formed on the surface of the polarizing film 20300 (also referred to as anti-reflection treatment or AR treatment). The multilayered optical thin film layer having a plurality of refractive indexes can reduce the reflectance of the surface due to the light interference effect.

FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system block of the liquid crystal display device.

As shown in FIG. 69A, the signal line 20412 is connected to the signal line driver circuit 2 in the pixel portion 20405.
It is extended from 0403. In the pixel portion 20405, a scanning line 20410 is extended from the scanning line driver circuit 20404. A plurality of pixels are arranged in a matrix in the intersection region between the signal line 20412 and the scanning line 20410. Note that each of the plurality of pixels has a switching element. Therefore, a voltage for controlling the tilt of the liquid crystal molecules can be independently input to each of the plurality of pixels. A structure in which switching elements are provided in each intersection region in this way is called an active type. However, it is not limited to such an active type, and may be a passive type configuration. Since the passive type has no switching element in each pixel, the process is simple.

The driver circuit portion 20408 includes a control circuit 20402, a signal line driver circuit 20403, and a scan line driver circuit 20404. A video signal 20401 is input to the control circuit 20402. In response to the video signal 20401, the control circuit 20402 receives a signal line driver circuit 2040.
3 and the scanning line driving circuit 20404 are controlled. Therefore, the video signal 20401 is input to the signal line driver circuit 20403 and the scan line driver circuit 20404, respectively. In response to this control signal, the signal line driver circuit 20403 sends the video signal to the signal line 2041.
2, the scan line driver circuit 20404 inputs a scan signal to the scan line 20410. Then, a switching element included in the pixel is selected according to the scanning signal, and a video signal is input to the pixel electrode of the pixel.

Note that the control circuit 20402 also controls the power supply 20407 in accordance with the video signal 20401. The power supply 20407 has means for supplying power to the lighting means 20406. As the lighting unit 20406, an edge light type backlight unit or a direct type backlight unit can be used. However, a front light may be used as the illumination means 20406. The front light is a plate-like light unit that is mounted on the front side of the pixel portion and is configured by a light emitter and a light guide that illuminate the whole. By such illumination means,
The pixel portion can be illuminated uniformly with low power consumption.

As illustrated in FIG. 69B, the scan line driver circuit 20404 includes circuits that function as a shift register 20441, a level shifter 20442, and a buffer 20443. Signals such as a gate start pulse (GSP) and a gate clock signal (GCK) are input to the shift register 20441.

As shown in FIG. 69C, the signal line driver circuit 20403 includes a shift register 20431, a first latch 20432, a second latch 20433, a level shifter 20434, and a buffer 2.
A circuit functioning as 0435 is included. The circuit functioning as the buffer 20435 is a circuit having a function of amplifying a weak signal and includes an operational amplifier and the like. Level shifter 20
A signal such as a start pulse (SSP) is input to 434, and data (DATA) such as a video signal is input to the first latch 20432. The second latch 20433 has a latch (LAT
) Signals can be temporarily stored and input to the pixel portion 20405 all at once. This is called line sequential driving. Therefore, the second latch can be omitted if the pixel performs dot sequential driving instead of line sequential driving.

Note that in this embodiment, a known liquid crystal panel can be used. For example, a configuration in which a liquid crystal layer is sealed between two substrates can be used as the liquid crystal panel.
On one substrate, a transistor, a capacitor, a pixel electrode, an alignment film, or the like is formed. Note that a polarizing plate, a retardation plate, or a prism sheet may be disposed on the side opposite to the upper surface of one of the substrates. On the other substrate, a color filter, a black matrix, a common electrode, an alignment film, or the like is formed. Note that a polarizing plate or a retardation plate may be disposed on the side opposite to the upper surface of the other substrate. Note that the color filter and the black matrix may be formed on the upper surface of one of the substrates. Note that three-dimensional display can be performed by arranging slits (lattices) on the upper surface side of one substrate or the opposite side thereof.

In addition, it is possible to arrange | position a polarizing plate, a phase difference plate, and a prism sheet between two board | substrates, respectively. Alternatively, it can be integrated with either of the two substrates.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied to and combined with the contents (may be a part) described in the drawings of another embodiment and examples. Or can be freely replaced. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each embodiment with a portion of another embodiment and an example.

Note that in this embodiment, the contents described in other embodiments and examples (may be a part)
Example when embodied, example when slightly modified, example when partially changed, example when improved, example when described in detail, example when applied, example with related parts And so on. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes and examples can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.

(Embodiment 7)
In this embodiment, a method for driving a display device will be described. In particular, a method for driving a liquid crystal display device will be described.

A liquid crystal panel that can be used in the liquid crystal display device described in this embodiment has a structure in which a liquid crystal material is sandwiched between two substrates. Each of the two substrates includes an electrode for controlling an electric field applied to the liquid crystal material. A liquid crystal material is a material whose optical and electrical properties are changed by an electric field applied from the outside. Therefore, the liquid crystal panel
It is a device that can obtain desired optical and electrical properties by controlling a voltage applied to a liquid crystal material using an electrode of a substrate. A liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a fine image can be obtained by arranging a large number of electrodes side by side to form a pixel and individually controlling the voltage applied to the pixel.

Here, the response time of the liquid crystal material to the change in electric field is the distance between two substrates (cell gap).
Although it depends on the type of liquid crystal material, it is generally several milliseconds to several tens of milliseconds. Furthermore, when the change amount of the electric field is small, the response time of the liquid crystal material is further increased. This property causes obstacles in image display such as afterimages, tailing, and contrast reduction when displaying moving images on a liquid crystal panel, especially when changing from halftone to another halftone (change in electric field). Is small), the above-mentioned degree of failure becomes significant.

On the other hand, a problem peculiar to a liquid crystal panel using an active matrix is a change in write voltage due to constant charge driving. Hereinafter, constant charge driving in the present embodiment will be described.

A pixel circuit in the active matrix includes a switch for controlling writing and a capacitor for holding charge. The driving method of the pixel circuit in the active matrix is that the switch is turned on and a predetermined voltage is written in the pixel circuit, and then the switch is turned off and the charge in the pixel circuit is held (hold state). In the hold state, no charge is exchanged between the inside and outside of the pixel circuit (constant charge). Usually, the period in which the switch is off is several hundred times (the number of scanning lines) times longer than the period in which the switch is on. Therefore, it can be considered that the switch of the pixel circuit is almost off.
From the above, it is assumed that the constant charge driving in the present embodiment is a driving method in which the pixel circuit is in a hold state in most periods when the liquid crystal panel is driven.

Next, electrical characteristics of the liquid crystal material will be described. In the liquid crystal material, when the electric field applied from the outside changes, the optical properties change and the dielectric constant also changes. That is, when each pixel of the liquid crystal panel is considered as a capacitive element (liquid crystal element) sandwiched between two electrodes, the capacitive element is a capacitive element whose capacitance changes according to an applied voltage. This phenomenon is called dynamic capacitance.

As described above, when the capacitive element whose capacitance is changed by the applied voltage is driven by the above-described constant charge driving, the following problem occurs. That is, there is a problem that when the capacitance of the liquid crystal element changes in the hold state where no charge is transferred, the applied voltage also changes. This can be understood from the fact that the charge amount is constant in the relational expression (charge amount) = (capacitance) × (applied voltage).

For the above reasons, in the liquid crystal panel using the active matrix, the voltage in the hold state changes from the voltage in the writing state due to the constant charge driving. As a result, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is different from the change in the driving method that does not take the hold state. This is shown in FIG. FIG. 31A shows a control example of the voltage written in the pixel circuit, with time on the horizontal axis and absolute value of voltage on the vertical axis. FIG. 31B illustrates a control example of the voltage written to the pixel circuit when time is taken on the horizontal axis and voltage is taken on the vertical axis. In FIG. 31C, the horizontal axis represents time, the vertical axis represents the transmittance of the liquid crystal element,
FIG. 32 shows a change over time in the transmittance of the liquid crystal element when the voltage shown in FIG. 31A or FIG. 31B is written in the pixel circuit. 31A to 31C, a period F represents a voltage rewriting cycle, and the time for rewriting the voltage is described as t ₁ , t ₂ , t ₃ , t ₄ , and so on.

Here, the writing voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device is | V ₁ | for rewriting at time 0, and | V ₂ for rewriting at times t ₁ , t ₂ , t ₃ , t ₄ ,.
It is assumed that | (Refer to FIG. 31 (A))

Note that the polarity of the writing voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device may be periodically switched. (Inverted drive: see FIG. 31B) This method can prevent a direct current voltage from being applied to the liquid crystal as much as possible, thereby preventing image sticking or the like due to deterioration of the liquid crystal element. Note that the polarity switching period (inversion period) may be the same as the voltage rewriting period. In this case, since the inversion cycle is short, occurrence of flicker due to inversion driving can be reduced. Further, the inversion cycle may be a cycle that is an integral multiple of the voltage rewrite cycle. In this case, since the inversion period is long and the frequency of writing the voltage by changing the polarity can be reduced, the power consumption can be reduced.

FIG. 31C shows a change over time in the transmittance of the liquid crystal element when a voltage as illustrated in FIG. 31A or FIG. 31B is applied to the liquid crystal element. Here, the voltage | V ₁ is applied to the liquid crystal element.
| Is applied, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after enough time passes corresponds to TR _1. Similarly, the transmissivity of the liquid crystal element after the voltage | V ₂ | is applied to the liquid crystal element and a sufficient time has elapsed is defined as TR ₂ . When the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element changes from | V ₁ | to | V ₂ | at time t ₁ , the transmittance of the liquid crystal element does not immediately become TR ₂ as indicated by a broken line 30401, It changes slowly. For example, the rewriting period of the voltage, when the same as the frame period of the image signal of 60 Hz (16.7 msec), until the transmittance is changed to TR _2, it is necessary to time of several frames.

However, the smooth transmittance change with time as indicated by a broken line 30401 is obtained when the voltage | V ₂ | is accurately applied to the liquid crystal element. In an actual liquid crystal panel, for example, a liquid crystal panel using an active matrix, the voltage in the hold state changes from the voltage in the writing state due to constant charge driving. Instead of the time change as shown in Fig. 5, instead of the time change as shown by the solid line 30401. This is because the voltage changes due to the constant charge driving, and the target voltage cannot be reached by one writing. As a result, the response time of the transmissivity of the liquid crystal element is apparently longer than the original response time (broken line 30401), and there are noticeable obstacles in image display such as afterimage, tailing, and contrast reduction. It will cause.

By using the overdrive drive, it is possible to simultaneously solve the phenomenon that the original response time of the liquid crystal element and the apparent response time due to insufficient writing due to dynamic capacitance and constant charge drive become even longer. This is shown in FIG. FIG. 32A shows a control example of the voltage written in the pixel circuit, with time on the horizontal axis and absolute value of voltage on the vertical axis. FIG. 32B shows a control example of the voltage written to the pixel circuit when the horizontal axis represents time and the vertical axis represents voltage. In FIG. 32C, the horizontal axis represents time, the vertical axis represents the transmittance of the liquid crystal element, and the voltage represented by FIG. 32A or 32B is written in the pixel circuit. It shows the change in transmittance over time. 32A to 32C, a period F represents a voltage rewriting cycle, and the time for voltage rewriting is described as t ₁ , t ₂ , t ₃ , t ₄ , and so on.

Here, the writing voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device is | V ₁ | for rewriting at time 0, | V ₃ | for rewriting at time t ₁ , and times t ₂ , t ₃ , t.
₄ , it is assumed that | V ₂ | (Refer to FIG. 32 (A))

Note that the polarity of the writing voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device may be periodically switched. (Inversion driving: see FIG. 32B) By this method, it is possible to prevent a direct current voltage from being applied to the liquid crystal as much as possible, so that burn-in or the like due to deterioration of the liquid crystal element can be prevented. Note that the polarity switching period (inversion period) may be the same as the voltage rewriting period. In this case, since the inversion cycle is short, occurrence of flicker due to inversion driving can be reduced. Further, the inversion cycle may be a cycle that is an integral multiple of the voltage rewrite cycle. In this case, since the inversion period is long and the frequency of writing the voltage by changing the polarity can be reduced, the power consumption can be reduced.

FIG. 32C shows a change over time in the transmittance of the liquid crystal element when a voltage as shown in FIG. 32A or FIG. 32B is applied to the liquid crystal element. Here, the voltage | V ₁ is applied to the liquid crystal element.
| Is applied, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after enough time passes corresponds to TR _1. Similarly, the transmissivity of the liquid crystal element after the voltage | V ₂ | is applied to the liquid crystal element and a sufficient time has elapsed is defined as TR ₂ . Similarly, the voltage | V ₃ | is applied to the liquid crystal element, and the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after a sufficient time has elapsed is defined as TR ₃ . At time t ₁ , the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element changes from | V ₁ | to | V
_When it changes to ₃ |, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element tends to change to TR ₃ over several frames as indicated by a broken line 30501. However, the voltage | _{V 3} | applied at the end at time _{t 2,} later than time _{t 2,} the voltage | _{V 2} | is applied. Therefore, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not as indicated by the broken line 30501 but as indicated by the solid line 30502. here,
It is preferable to set the value of the voltage | V ₃ | so that the transmittance is approximately TR ₂ at the time t ₂ . Here, the voltage | V ₃ | is also referred to as an overdrive voltage.

That is, by changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ |, the response time of the liquid crystal element can be controlled to some extent. This is because the response time of the liquid crystal changes depending on the strength of the electric field. Specifically, the stronger the electric field, the shorter the response time of the liquid crystal element, and the weaker the electric field, the longer the response time of the liquid crystal element.

The overdrive voltage | V ₃ | is preferably changed according to the amount of voltage change, that is, the voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | that give the desired transmittances TR ₁ and TR _2. . This is because even if the response time of the liquid crystal element changes depending on the amount of change in voltage, the optimum response time can always be obtained by changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | accordingly. is there.

The overdrive voltage | V ₃ | is preferably changed according to the mode of the liquid crystal such as TN, VA, IPS, and OCB. This is because even if the response speed of the liquid crystal varies depending on the mode of the liquid crystal, an optimal response time can always be obtained by changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | accordingly.

Note that the voltage rewrite cycle F may be the same as the frame cycle of the input signal. In this case, since the peripheral drive circuit of the liquid crystal display device can be simplified, a liquid crystal display device with low manufacturing cost can be obtained.

Note that the voltage rewrite cycle F may be shorter than the frame cycle of the input signal. For example,
The voltage rewriting period F may be 1/2 times the frame period of the input signal, may be 1/3 times, or may be less than that. This method is effective when used in combination with measures for reducing the quality of moving images caused by hold driving of liquid crystal display devices, such as black insertion driving, backlight blinking, backlight scanning, and intermediate image insertion driving by motion compensation. is there. That is, since the response time of the required liquid crystal element is short because the countermeasure method for the deterioration of the moving image quality caused by the hold driving of the liquid crystal display device is relatively easy by using the overdrive driving method described in this embodiment. In addition, the response time of the liquid crystal element can be shortened. Although the response time of the liquid crystal element can be essentially shortened by the cell gap, the liquid crystal material, the liquid crystal mode, and the like, it is technically difficult. Therefore, it is very important to use a method of shortening the response time of the liquid crystal element from the driving method such as overdrive.

Note that the voltage rewriting period F may be longer than the frame period of the input signal. For example,
The voltage rewrite period F may be twice, three times, or more than the frame period of the input signal. This method is effective when used in combination with means (circuit) for determining whether or not voltage rewriting is not performed for a long period of time. That is, when the voltage is not rewritten for a long time, the operation of the circuit can be stopped during the period by not performing the voltage rewriting operation itself, so that a liquid crystal display device with low power consumption is obtained. Can do.

Next, a specific method for changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | according to the voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | that give the desired transmittances TR ₁ and TR ₂ will be described.

The overdrive circuit is a circuit for appropriately controlling the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | according to the voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | that give the desired transmittances TR ₁ and TR _2. The signal input to the drive circuit is a voltage | V that gives the transmittance TR _1
1 | and a signal related to the voltage | V ₂ | giving the transmittance TR ₂ , and a signal output from the overdrive circuit is a signal related to the overdrive voltage | V ₃ |. Here, as these signals, voltages applied to the liquid crystal element (| V ₁ |, | V ₂ |
, | V ₃ |) or a digital signal for applying a voltage to be applied to the liquid crystal element. Here, it is assumed that the signal related to the overdrive circuit is a digital signal.

First, an overall configuration of the overdrive circuit will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the input image signal 301 is used as a signal for controlling the overdrive voltage.
01a and 30101b are used. As a result of processing these signals, an output image signal 30104 is output as a signal for giving an overdrive voltage.

Here, voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | that give the desired transmittances TR ₁ and TR ₂ are:
Since the image signals are in frames adjacent to each other, the input image signals 30101a and 30101b are also preferably image signals in frames adjacent to each other. In order to obtain such a signal, the input image signal 30101a is input to the delay circuit 30102 in FIG. 33A, and the resulting output signal is input to the input image signal 3010.
1b. An example of the delay circuit 30102 is a memory. That is, in order to delay the input image signal 30101a by one frame, the input image signal 30101a is stored in the memory, and at the same time, the signal stored in the previous frame is stored in the memory as the input image signal 30101b. The input image signal 30101a and the input image signal 30101b are input to the correction circuit 30103 at the same time, so that image signals in adjacent frames can be handled. Then, by inputting image signals in adjacent frames to the correction circuit 30103, an output image signal 30104 can be obtained. Note that when a memory is used as the delay circuit 30102, a memory having a capacity capable of storing an image signal for one frame (that is, a frame memory) can be used in order to delay by one frame. By doing so, it is possible to have a function as a delay circuit without excessive or insufficient memory capacity.

Next, a delay circuit 30102 configured mainly for the purpose of reducing the memory capacity will be described. By using such a circuit as the delay circuit 30102, the memory capacity can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

As the delay circuit 30102 having such characteristics, specifically, a delay circuit as shown in FIG. 33B can be used. A delay circuit 30102 illustrated in FIG. 33B includes an encoder 30105, a memory 30106, and a decoder 30107.

The operation of the delay circuit 30102 shown in FIG. 33B is as follows. First, before storing the input image signal 30101a in the memory 30106, the encoder 3010
5 is used to perform compression processing. As a result, the size of data to be stored in the memory 30106 can be reduced. As a result, since the memory capacity can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Then, the compressed image signal is sent to the decoder 30107 where the decompression process is performed. As a result, the encoder 30105
It is possible to restore the previous signal that has been compressed. Here, the encoder 3010
5 and the decoder 30107 may be a reversible process. In this way, since the image signal is not deteriorated even after the compression / decompression process, the memory capacity can be reduced without degrading the quality of the image finally displayed on the apparatus. Further, the compression / decompression process performed by the encoder 30105 and the decoder 30107 may be an irreversible process. By doing so, the data size of the image signal after compression can be made very small, so that the memory capacity can be greatly reduced.

As a method for reducing the capacity of the memory, various methods can be used in addition to the methods listed above. Rather than compressing the image with an encoder, the color information of the image signal is reduced (for example, the color is reduced from 260,000 colors to 65,000 colors) or the number of data is reduced (the resolution is reduced). The method can be used.

Next, a specific example of the correction circuit 30103 will be described with reference to FIGS. The correction circuit 30103 is a circuit for outputting an output image signal having a certain value from two input image signals. Here, when the relationship between the two input image signals and the output image signal is non-linear and it is difficult to obtain by a simple calculation, a lookup table (LUT) may be used as the correction circuit 30103. Since the relationship between the two input image signals and the output image signal is obtained in advance in the LUT by measurement, the output image signals corresponding to the two input image signals can be obtained only by referring to the LUT. By using the LUT 30108 as the correction circuit 30103 (see FIG. 33C), the correction circuit 30103 can be realized without complicated circuit design or the like.

Here, since the LUT is one of the memories, it is preferable to reduce the memory capacity as much as possible in order to reduce the manufacturing cost. As an example of the correction circuit 30103 for realizing this, a circuit shown in FIG. Correction circuit 30103 shown in FIG.
Includes an LUT 30109 and an adder 30110. The LUT 30109 stores difference data between the input image signal 30101a and the output image signal 30104 to be output. That is, corresponding difference data is extracted from the LUT 30109 from the input image signal 30101a and the input image signal 30101b, and the extracted difference data and the input image signal 30 are extracted.
The output image signal 30104 can be obtained by adding 101a by the adder 30110. Note that the data stored in the LUT 30109 is the difference data, so that L
Reduction of the memory capacity of the UT can be realized. This is because the output image signal 30104 as it is.
This is because the data size of the difference data is smaller than that of the differential data, so that the memory capacity required for the LUT 30109 can be reduced.

Further, if the output image signal can be obtained by a simple operation such as four arithmetic operations of two input image signals, it can be realized by a combination of simple circuits such as an adder, a subtracter, and a multiplier.
As a result, it is not necessary to use an LUT, and the manufacturing cost can be greatly reduced.
As such a circuit, a circuit shown in FIG. (
E) includes a subtractor 30111, a multiplier 30112, and an adder 3
0113. First, a subtracter 30111 obtains a difference between the input image signal 30101a and the input image signal 30101b. Thereafter, the multiplier 30112 multiplies the difference value by an appropriate coefficient. Then, an output image signal 30104 can be obtained by adding a difference value obtained by multiplying the input image signal 30101a by an appropriate coefficient by the adder 30113. By using such a circuit, it is not necessary to use an LUT, and the manufacturing cost can be greatly reduced.

Note that by using the correction circuit 30103 illustrated in FIG. 33E under certain conditions, output of an inappropriate output image signal 30104 can be prevented. The conditions include an output image signal 30104 that gives an overdrive voltage and an input image signal 30101.
The difference value between a and the input image signal 30101b is linear. Then, the linearity gradient is used as a coefficient multiplied by the multiplier 30112. That is, it is preferable to use the correction circuit 30103 shown in FIG. 33E for a liquid crystal element having such properties. As a liquid crystal element having such properties, an IPS mode liquid crystal element in which the response speed is small in gradation dependency can be given. Thus, for example, by using the correction circuit 30103 shown in FIG. 33E for the IPS mode liquid crystal element, the manufacturing cost can be significantly reduced.
In addition, it is possible to obtain an overdrive circuit that can prevent an inappropriate output image signal 30104 from being output.

Note that a function equivalent to the circuits shown in FIGS. 33A to 33E may be realized by software processing. As for the memory used for the delay circuit, other memory included in the liquid crystal display device, memory included in a device that sends an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device (for example, a video card included in a personal computer or a similar device, etc.) Can be diverted. By doing so, not only can the manufacturing cost be reduced, but also the user can select the strength of overdrive, the situation of use, etc. according to his / her preference.

Next, driving for manipulating the potential of the common line will be described with reference to FIG. (
A) shows a plurality of pixel circuits when one common line is arranged for one scanning line in a display device using a capacitive display element such as a liquid crystal element. FIG. A pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 34A includes a transistor 30201, an auxiliary capacitor 30202, a display element 30203, a video signal line 30204, a scanning line 30205, and a common line 30206.

The gate electrode of the transistor 30201 is electrically connected to the scan line 30205, one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30201 is electrically connected to the video signal line 30204, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30201 Are electrically connected to one electrode of the auxiliary capacitor 30202 and one electrode of the display element 30203.
The other electrode of the auxiliary capacitor 30202 is electrically connected to the common line 30206.

First, in the pixel selected by the scanning line 30205, the transistor 30201 is turned on, so that the display element 30203 and the auxiliary capacitor 3 are connected through the video signal line 30204, respectively.
A voltage corresponding to the video signal is applied to 0202. At this time, the video signal is the common line 30.
When the lowest gradation is displayed for all the pixels connected to 206, or when the highest gradation is displayed for all the pixels connected to the common line 30206, the pixel It is not necessary to write a video signal via the video signal line 30204 respectively.
Instead of writing a video signal through the video signal line 30204, the voltage applied to the display element 30203 can be changed by moving the potential of the common line 30206.

Next, FIG. 34B shows a display device using a display element having a capacitive property such as a liquid crystal element when two common lines are arranged for one scanning line. It is a figure showing a plurality of pixel circuits. The pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 34B includes a transistor 30211, an auxiliary capacitor 30212, a display element 30213, a video signal line 30214, a scanning line 30215, a first common line 30216, and a second common line 30217. .

The gate electrode of the transistor 30211 is electrically connected to the scan line 30215, one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30211 is electrically connected to the video signal line 30214, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 30211 Is electrically connected to one electrode of the auxiliary capacitor 30212 and one electrode of the display element 30213.
In addition, the other electrode of the auxiliary capacitor 30212 is electrically connected to the first common line 30216.
In the pixel adjacent to the pixel, the other electrode of the auxiliary capacitor 30212 is electrically connected to the second common line 30217.

In the pixel circuit illustrated in FIG. 34B, since the number of pixels electrically connected to one common line is small, instead of writing a video signal through the video signal line 30214, the first common line 30216 is used. Alternatively, the frequency with which the voltage applied to the display element 30213 can be changed by moving the potential of the second common line 30217 is significantly increased. Further, source inversion driving or dot inversion driving is possible. By source inversion driving or dot inversion driving, flicker can be suppressed while improving element reliability.

Next, the scanning backlight will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a diagram showing a scanning backlight in which cold cathode tubes are juxtaposed. The scanning backlight shown in FIG. 35A includes a diffusion plate 30301 and N cold cathode tubes 30302-1 to 30302 -N. N cold cathode tubes 30302-1 to 30302 -N are juxtaposed behind the diffuser plate 30301, so that the N cold cathode tubes 30302-1 to 30302 -N scan with varying luminance. Can do.

A change in luminance of each cold cathode tube during scanning will be described with reference to FIG. First, the luminance of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp 30302-1 is changed for a certain time. Then, after that, the cold cathode tube 30
The luminance of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp 30302-2 arranged next to 302-1 is changed for the same time. In this way, the luminance is changed in order from the cold cathode fluorescent lamps 30302-1 to 30302-N. In FIG. 35C, the luminance to be changed for a certain time is smaller than the original luminance, but may be larger than the original luminance. Also, cold cathode fluorescent lamps 30302-1 to 3030
Although scanning up to 2-N is performed, scanning from cold cathode fluorescent lamps 30302-N to 30302-1 may be performed in the reverse direction.

By driving as shown in FIG. 35, the average luminance of the backlight can be reduced. Therefore, the power consumption of the backlight, which accounts for most of the power consumption of the liquid crystal display device, can be reduced.

An LED may be used as the light source of the scanning backlight. The scanning backlight in that case is as shown in FIG. The scanning backlight shown in FIG. 35B includes a diffusion plate 30311 and light sources 30312-1 to 30312 -N in which LEDs are juxtaposed. When the LED is used as the light source of the scanning backlight, the backlight is thin,
There is an advantage that can be lightened. Further, there is an advantage that the color reproduction range can be expanded. Further, LEs juxtaposed on each of the light sources 30312-1 to 30312 -N juxtaposed with LEDs.
Since D can also be scanned in the same manner, it can also be a dot scanning backlight.
If the point scanning type is adopted, the image quality of the moving image can be further improved.

Note that even when an LED is used as the light source of the backlight, it can be driven with the luminance changed as shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 8)
In this embodiment, various liquid crystal modes will be described.

First, various liquid crystal modes will be described with reference to cross-sectional views.

39A and 39B are schematic views of cross sections of a TN mode.

A liquid crystal layer 50100 is sandwiched between a first substrate 50101 and a second substrate 50102 which are arranged to face each other. A first electrode 501 is provided on an upper surface of the first substrate 50101.
05 is formed. A second electrode 50106 is formed on the top surface of the second substrate 50102. A first polarizing plate 50103 is provided on the side of the first substrate 50101 opposite to the liquid crystal layer. A second polarizing plate 50104 is disposed on the opposite side of the second substrate 50102 from the liquid crystal layer. Note that the first polarizing plate 50103 and the second polarizing plate 50104 are arranged to be crossed Nicols.

The first polarizing plate 50103 may be disposed on the upper surface of the first substrate 50101. The second polarizing plate 50104 may be disposed on the upper surface of the second substrate 50102.

It is sufficient that at least one (or both) of the first electrode 50105 and the second electrode 50106 has a light-transmitting property (a transmission type or a reflection type). Or both electrodes may have translucency and a part of one electrode may have reflectivity (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 36A is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is applied to the first electrode 50105 and the second electrode 50106 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode). Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged vertically,
The light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. And the 1st polarizing plate 50
Since 103 and the second polarizing plate 50104 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight cannot pass through the substrate. Therefore, black display is performed.

Note that by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50105 and the second electrode 50106, the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

FIG. 36B is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is not applied to the first electrode 50105 and the second electrode 50106. Since the liquid crystal molecules are aligned horizontally and rotated in a plane, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50103 and the second polarizing plate 50104 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed. This is a so-called normally white mode.

The liquid crystal display device having the structure illustrated in FIGS. 36A and 36B can perform full-color display by being provided with a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 50101 side or the second substrate 50102 side.

A known liquid crystal material may be used for the TN mode.

37A and 37B are schematic views of cross sections of the VA mode. The VA mode is a mode in which liquid crystal molecules are aligned so as to be perpendicular to the substrate when there is no electric field.

A liquid crystal layer 50200 is sandwiched between a first substrate 50201 and a second substrate 50202 which are arranged to face each other. On the top surface of the first substrate 50201, the first electrode 502 is provided.
05 is formed. A second electrode 50206 is formed on the top surface of the second substrate 50202. A first polarizing plate 50203 is provided on the side of the first substrate 50201 opposite to the liquid crystal layer. A second polarizing plate 50204 is provided on the opposite side of the second substrate 50202 from the liquid crystal layer. Note that the first polarizing plate 50203 and the second polarizing plate 50204 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

The first polarizing plate 50203 may be disposed on the upper surface of the first substrate 50201. The second polarizing plate 50204 may be disposed on the upper surface of the second substrate 50202.

It is sufficient that at least one (or both) of the first electrode 50205 and the second electrode 50206 has a light-transmitting property (a transmission type or a reflection type). Or both electrodes may have translucency and a part of one electrode may have reflectivity (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 37A is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is applied to the first electrode 50205 and the second electrode 50206 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode). Since the liquid crystal molecules are aligned horizontally,
Light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Then, the first polarizing plate 502
Since 03 and the second polarizing plate 50204 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, the light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed.

Note that the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled by controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode 50205 and the second electrode 50206. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

FIG. 37B is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is not applied to the first electrode 50205 and the second electrode 50206. Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged vertically, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50203 and the second polarizing plate 50204 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, black display is performed. This is a so-called normally black mode.

The liquid crystal display device having the structure illustrated in FIGS. 37A and 37B can perform full-color display by being provided with a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 50201 side or the second substrate 50202 side.

As the liquid crystal material used for the VA mode, a known material may be used.

37C and 37D are schematic views of cross sections of the MVA mode. The MVA mode is a method for mutually compensating the viewing angle dependency of each part.

A liquid crystal layer 50210 is sandwiched between a first substrate 50211 and a second substrate 50212 which are arranged to face each other. A first electrode 50211 is provided on an upper surface of the first substrate 50211.
15 is formed. A second electrode 50216 is formed on the top surface of the second substrate 50212. On the first electrode 50215, a first protrusion 502117 is formed for alignment control. A second protrusion 502118 is formed over the second electrode 50216 for alignment control. On the side opposite to the liquid crystal layer of the first substrate 50211, a first polarizing plate 50213 is provided.
Is arranged. On the side opposite to the liquid crystal layer of the second substrate 50212, a second polarizing plate 5021 is provided.
4 is arranged. Note that the first polarizing plate 50213 and the second polarizing plate 50214 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

The first polarizing plate 50213 may be disposed on the top surface of the first substrate 50211. The second polarizing plate 50214 may be disposed on the upper surface of the second substrate 50212.

It is only necessary that at least one (or both) of the first electrode 50215 and the second electrode 50216 have a light-transmitting property (a transmission type or a reflection type). Or both electrodes may have translucency and a part of one electrode may have reflectivity (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 37C is a schematic view of a cross section in the case where voltage is applied to the first electrode 50215 and the second electrode 50216 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode). Since the liquid crystal molecules are tilted and arranged with respect to the first protrusions 502117 and the second protrusions 502118, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50213 and the second polarizing plate 50214 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed.

Note that by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50215 and the second electrode 50216, the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

FIG. 37D is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is not applied to the first electrode 50215 and the second electrode 50216. Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged vertically, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50213 and the second polarizing plate 50214 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, black display is performed. This is a so-called normally black mode.

The liquid crystal display device having the structure illustrated in FIGS. 37C and 37D can perform full-color display by being provided with a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 50211 side or the second substrate 50212 side.

As the liquid crystal material used for the MVA mode, a known material may be used.

38A and 38B are schematic views of cross sections of the OCB mode. In the OCB mode, the alignment of the liquid crystal molecules forms an optically compensated state in the liquid crystal layer, and thus the viewing angle dependency is small. This state of the liquid crystal molecules is called bend alignment.

A liquid crystal layer 50300 is sandwiched between a first substrate 50301 and a second substrate 50302 which are arranged to face each other. A first electrode 503 is provided on an upper surface of the first substrate 50301.
05 is formed. A second electrode 50306 is formed on the top surface of the second substrate 50302. A first polarizing plate 50303 is provided on the opposite side of the first substrate 50301 from the liquid crystal layer. On the opposite side of the second substrate 50302 from the liquid crystal layer, a second polarizing plate 50304 is provided. Note that the first polarizing plate 50303 and the second polarizing plate 50304 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

The first polarizing plate 50303 may be disposed on the upper surface of the first substrate 50301. The second polarizing plate 50304 may be disposed on the upper surface of the second substrate 50302.

It is sufficient that at least one (or both) of the first electrode 50305 and the second electrode 50306 has a light-transmitting property (a transmission type or a reflection type). Or both electrodes may have translucency and a part of one electrode may have reflectivity (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 38A is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is applied to the first electrode 50305 and the second electrode 50306 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode). Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged vertically,
The light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. And the 1st polarizing plate 50
Since 303 and the second polarizing plate 50304 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, black display is performed.

Note that the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled by controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode 50305 and the second electrode 50306. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

FIG. 38B is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is not applied to the first electrode 50305 and the second electrode 50306. Since the liquid crystal molecules are in a bend alignment state, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50303 and the second polarizing plate 50304 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed. This is a so-called normally white mode.

The liquid crystal display device having the structure illustrated in FIGS. 38A and 38B can perform full-color display by being provided with a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 50301 side or the second substrate 50302 side.

A known material may be used as the liquid crystal material used in the OCB mode.

38C and 38D are schematic views of cross sections of the FLC mode or the AFLC mode.

A liquid crystal layer 50310 is sandwiched between a first substrate 50311 and a second substrate 50312 which are arranged to face each other. On the top surface of the first substrate 50311, the first electrode 503 is provided.
15 is formed. A second electrode 50316 is formed on the top surface of the second substrate 5031. A first polarizing plate 50313 is provided on the opposite side of the first substrate 50311 from the liquid crystal layer. A second polarizing plate 50314 is disposed on the opposite side of the second substrate 50312 from the liquid crystal layer. Note that the first polarizing plate 50313 and the second polarizing plate 50314 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

The first polarizing plate 50313 may be disposed on the upper surface of the first substrate 50311. The second polarizing plate 50314 may be disposed on the upper surface of the second substrate 5031.

It is only necessary that at least one (or both) of the first electrode 50315 and the second electrode 50316 have a light-transmitting property (transmission type or reflection type). Or both electrodes may have translucency and a part of one electrode may have reflectivity (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 38C is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is applied to the first electrode 50315 and the second electrode 50316 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode). Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side in a direction shifted from the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. And since the 1st polarizing plate 50313 and the 2nd polarizing plate 50314 are arrange | positioned so that it may become crossed Nicols, the light from a backlight passes a board | substrate. Therefore, white display is performed.

Note that the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50315 and the second electrode 50316. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

FIG. 38D is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is not applied to the first electrode 50315 and the second electrode 50316. Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. And since the 1st polarizing plate 50313 and the 2nd polarizing plate 50314 are arrange | positioned so that it may become crossed Nicols, the light from a backlight does not pass a board | substrate. Therefore, black display is performed. This is a so-called normally black mode.

The liquid crystal display device having the structure illustrated in FIGS. 38C and 38D can perform full-color display by being provided with a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 50311 side or the second substrate 50312 side.

As the liquid crystal material used in the FLC mode or AFLC mode, a known material may be used.

39A and 39B are schematic views of cross sections of the IPS mode. The IPS mode is a mode in which the alignment of liquid crystal molecules forms an optically compensated state in the liquid crystal layer, so that the liquid crystal molecules are always rotated in a plane with respect to the substrate, and the electrode is only on one substrate side. The provided horizontal electric field method is adopted.

A liquid crystal layer 50400 is sandwiched between a first substrate 50401 and a second substrate 50402 which are arranged to face each other. A first electrode 504 is provided on an upper surface of the first substrate 50401.
05 and the second electrode 50406 are formed. A first polarizing plate 50403 is provided on the side of the first substrate 50401 opposite to the liquid crystal layer. A second polarizing plate 50404 is provided on the opposite side of the second substrate 50402 from the liquid crystal layer. Note that the first polarizing plate 50403 and the second polarizing plate 50404 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

The first polarizing plate 50403 may be disposed on the upper surface of the first substrate 50401. The second polarizing plate 50404 may be disposed on the upper surface of the second substrate 50402.

It is sufficient that at least one (or both) of the first electrode 50405 and the second electrode 50406 has a light-transmitting property (a transmission type or a reflection type). Or both electrodes may have translucency and a part of one electrode may have reflectivity (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 39A is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is applied to the first electrode 50405 and the second electrode 50406 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode). Since the liquid crystal molecules are aligned along the lines of electric force deviated from the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50403 and the second polarizing plate 50404 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed.

Note that the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled by controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode 50405 and the second electrode 50406. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

FIG. 39B is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is not applied to the first electrode 50405 and the second electrode 50406. Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50403 and the second polarizing plate 50404 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, black display is performed. This is a so-called normally black mode.

The liquid crystal display device having the structure illustrated in FIGS. 39A and 39B can perform full-color display by being provided with a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 50401 side or the second substrate 50402 side.

As the liquid crystal material used for the IPS mode, a known material may be used.

39C and 39D are schematic views of cross sections of the FFS mode. The FFS mode is a mode in which the alignment of liquid crystal molecules forms an optically compensated state in the liquid crystal layer, so that the liquid crystal molecules are always rotated in a plane with respect to the substrate, and the electrode is only on one substrate side. The provided horizontal electric field method is adopted.

A liquid crystal layer 50410 is sandwiched between a first substrate 50411 and a second substrate 50412 which are arranged to face each other. A second electrode 504 is provided on the upper surface of the first substrate 50411.
16 is formed. An insulating film 50417 is formed on the top surface of the second electrode 50416. A second electrode 50416 is formed over the insulating film 50417. A first polarizing plate 50413 is provided on the side of the first substrate 50411 opposite to the liquid crystal layer. On the opposite side of the second substrate 50412 from the liquid crystal layer, a second polarizing plate 50414 is provided. In addition,
The first polarizing plate 50413 and the second polarizing plate 50414 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols.

The first polarizing plate 50413 may be disposed on the top surface of the first substrate 50411. The second polarizing plate 50414 may be disposed on the upper surface of the second substrate 50412.

It is only necessary that at least one (or both) of the first electrode 50415 and the second electrode 50416 have a light-transmitting property (a transmission type or a reflection type). Or both electrodes may have translucency and a part of one electrode may have reflectivity (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 39C is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is applied to the first electrode 50415 and the second electrode 50416 (referred to as a vertical electric field mode). Since the liquid crystal molecules are aligned along the lines of electric force deviated from the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50413 and the second polarizing plate 50414 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed.

Note that the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled by controlling voltage applied to the first electrode 50415 and the second electrode 50416. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

FIG. 39D is a schematic view of a cross section when voltage is not applied to the first electrode 50415 and the second electrode 50416. Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 50413 and the second polarizing plate 50414 are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, black display is performed. This is a so-called normally black mode.

The liquid crystal display device having the structure illustrated in FIGS. 39C and 39D can perform full-color display by being provided with a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 50411 side or the second substrate 50412 side.

As the liquid crystal material used for the FFS mode, a known material may be used.

Next, various liquid crystal modes will be described with reference to top views.

FIG. 40 is a top view of a pixel portion to which the MVA mode is applied. The MVA mode is a method for mutually compensating the viewing angle dependency of each part.

40 shows a first electrode 50501, a second electrode (50502a, 50502b, 5050).
2c) and the protrusion 50503 are shown. The first electrode 50501 is formed over the entire surface of the counter substrate. The second electrodes (50502a, 5050 are formed so that the shape is a dogleg shape.
2b, 50502c). The shape is the second electrode (50502a, 50502
b, 50502c), the second electrode (5050) is formed on the first electrode 50501.
2a, 50502b, 50502c).

The opening of the second electrode (50502a, 50502b, 50502c) functions like a protrusion.

When voltage is applied to the first electrode 50501 and the second electrode (50502a, 50502b, 50502c) (referred to as a vertical electric field mode), liquid crystal molecules are converted into the second electrode (50502a, 5502).
0502b, 50502c) and the protrusion 50503 are in a state of being tilted and arranged. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to be in crossed Nicols, white light is displayed because light from the backlight passes through the substrate.

Note that the first electrode 50501 and the second electrode (50502a, 50502b, 50502)
It is possible to control the state of the liquid crystal molecules by controlling the voltage applied to c). Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

When voltage is not applied to the first electrode 50501 and the second electrode (50502a, 50502b, 50502c), liquid crystal molecules are aligned vertically. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the panel, so that black display is performed. This is a so-called normally black mode.

As the liquid crystal material used for the MVA mode, a known material may be used.

41A, 41B, 41C, and 41D are top views of a pixel portion to which the IPS mode is applied. The IPS mode is a mode in which the alignment of liquid crystal molecules forms an optically compensated state in the liquid crystal layer, so that the liquid crystal molecules are always rotated in a plane with respect to the substrate, and the electrode is only on one substrate side. The provided horizontal electric field method is adopted.

In the IPS mode, the pair of electrodes are formed to have different shapes.

FIG. 41A illustrates a first electrode 50601 and a second electrode 50602. The first electrode 50601 and the second electrode 50602 have a wave shape.

FIG. 41B illustrates the first electrode 50611 and the second electrode 50612. The first electrode 50611 and the second electrode 50612 have a shape having concentric openings.

FIG. 41C illustrates a first electrode 50631 and a second electrode 50632. The first electrode 50631 and the second electrode 50632 have a comb-like shape and are partially overlapped.

FIG. 41D illustrates the first electrode 50641 and the second electrode 50642. The first electrode 50641 and the second electrode 50642 are comb-like and have a shape in which the electrodes are engaged with each other.

The first electrode (50601, 50611, 50621, 50631) and the second electrode (50
602, 50612, 50622, and 50632) are applied with a voltage (referred to as a vertical electric field method), the liquid crystal molecules are aligned along the lines of electric force deviated from the rubbing direction. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to be in crossed Nicols, white light is displayed because light from the backlight passes through the substrate.

Note that the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled by controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode (50601, 50611, 50621, 50631) and the second electrode (50602, 50612, 50622, 50632). is there. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

The first electrode (50601, 50611, 50621, 50631) and the second electrode (50
When no voltage is applied to 602, 50612, 50622, 50632), the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate, so that black display is performed. It is a so-called normally black mode.

As the liquid crystal material used for the IPS mode, a known material may be used.

42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D are top views of a pixel portion to which the FFS mode is applied. The FFS mode is a mode in which the alignment of liquid crystal molecules forms an optically compensated state in the liquid crystal layer, so that the liquid crystal molecules are always rotated in a plane with respect to the substrate, and the electrode is only on one substrate side. The provided horizontal electric field method is adopted.

In the FFS mode, the first electrode is formed on the upper surface of the second electrode so as to have various shapes.

FIG. 42A illustrates a first electrode 50701 and a second electrode 50702. The first electrode 50701 is bent in a dogleg shape. The second electrode 50702 may not be patterned.

FIG. 42B illustrates the first electrode 50711 and the second electrode 50712. The first electrode 50711 has a concentric shape. The second electrode 50712 may not be patterned.

FIG. 42C illustrates the first electrode 50731 and the second electrode 50732. The first electrode 50731 is comb-shaped and has a shape such that the electrodes mesh with each other. Second electrode 5073
2 may not be patterned.

FIG. 42D illustrates the first electrode 50741 and the second electrode 50742. The first electrode 50741 has a comb-like shape. The second electrode 50742 may not be patterned.

The first electrode (50701, 50711, 50721, 50731) and the second electrode (50
702, 50712, 50722, and 50732) (referred to as a vertical electric field method), the liquid crystal molecules are aligned along the lines of electric force deviated from the rubbing direction. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to be in crossed Nicols, white light is displayed because light from the backlight passes through the substrate.

Note that the state of liquid crystal molecules can be controlled by controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode (50701, 50711, 50721, 50731) and the second electrode (50702, 50712, 50722, 50732). is there. Therefore, since the amount of light from the backlight passing through the substrate can be controlled, a predetermined video display can be performed.

The first electrode (50701, 50711, 50721, 50731) and the second electrode (50
702, 50712, 50722, and 50732), liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to be crossed Nicols, light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate, so that black display is performed. It is a so-called normally black mode.

As the liquid crystal material used for the IPS mode, a known material may be used.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied to and combined with the contents (may be a part) described in the drawings of another embodiment and examples. Or can be freely replaced. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each embodiment with a portion of another embodiment and an example.

Note that in this embodiment, the contents described in other embodiments and examples (may be a part)
Example when embodied, example when slightly modified, example when partially changed, example when improved, example when described in detail, example when applied, example with related parts And so on. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes and examples can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.

(Embodiment 9)
In this embodiment, a structure and a manufacturing method of a transistor will be described.

FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an example of a structure and a manufacturing method of a transistor that can be included in a semiconductor device to which the present invention can be applied. FIG. 43A illustrates an example of a structure of a transistor that can be included in a semiconductor device to which the present invention can be applied. 43B to 43G illustrate an example of a method for manufacturing a transistor that can be included in a semiconductor device to which the present invention can be applied.

Note that the structure and manufacturing method of the transistor that can be included in the semiconductor device to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to those illustrated in FIGS.

First, an example of a structure of a transistor that can be included in a semiconductor device to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43A is a cross-sectional view of a plurality of transistors having different structures. Here, in FIG. 43A, a plurality of transistors having different structures are shown side by side; this is an expression for explaining a structure of a transistor that can be included in a semiconductor device to which the invention can be applied. Thus, the transistors that can be included in the semiconductor device to which the invention can be applied do not have to be actually juxtaposed as illustrated in FIG. 43A, and can be formed as needed.

Next, characteristics of each layer included in a transistor that can be included in a semiconductor device to which the present invention can be applied will be described.

As the substrate 110111, a glass substrate such as barium borosilicate glass or alumino borosilicate glass, a quartz substrate, a ceramic substrate, a metal substrate including stainless steel, or the like can be used. In addition, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate (PE
N), it is also possible to use a substrate made of a synthetic resin having flexibility such as plastic or acrylic represented by polyethylene-tersulfone (PES). By using a flexible substrate, a semiconductor device that can be bent can be manufactured. In addition, as long as the substrate has flexibility, the substrate area and the shape of the substrate are not greatly limited. Therefore, as the substrate 110111, for example, a substrate having one side of 1 meter or more and a rectangular shape is used. If used, productivity can be significantly improved. Such an advantage is a great advantage compared to the case of using a circular silicon substrate.

The insulating film 110112 functions as a base film. An alkali metal or alkaline earth metal such as Na is provided from the substrate 110111 in order to prevent adverse effects on the characteristics of the semiconductor element. As the insulating film 110112, an insulating film containing oxygen or nitrogen, such as silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y), or silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (x> y) It is possible to provide a single layer structure or a laminated structure thereof.
For example, in the case where the insulating film 110112 is provided with a two-layer structure, a silicon nitride oxide film may be provided as a first insulating film and a silicon oxynitride film may be provided as a second insulating film. Insulating film 110
When 112 is provided in a three-layer structure, a silicon oxynitride film is provided as a first insulating film, a silicon nitride oxide film is provided as a second insulating film, and a silicon oxynitride film is provided as a third insulating film Good.

The semiconductor layers 110113, 110114, and 110115 can be formed using an amorphous semiconductor or a semi-amorphous semiconductor (SAS). Alternatively, a polycrystalline semiconductor layer may be used. SAS is a semiconductor having an intermediate structure between amorphous and crystalline structures (including single crystal and polycrystal) and having a third state that is stable in terms of free energy and has a short-range order and a lattice. It includes a crystalline region with strain. At least some areas in the membrane
A crystal region of 0.5 to 20 nm can be observed. When silicon is the main component, the Raman spectrum is shifted to a lower wave number side than 520 cm ⁻¹ . In X-ray diffraction, diffraction peaks of (111) and (220) that are derived from the silicon crystal lattice are observed. As a compensation for dangling bonds (dangling bonds), hydrogen or halogen is contained at least 1 atomic% or more. The SAS is formed by glow discharge decomposition (plasma CVD) of a material gas. Examples of the material gas include SiH ₄ , Si ₂ H ₆ , SiH ₂ Cl ₂ , and SiHC.
l ₃ , SiCl ₄ , SiF ₄ or the like can be used. Alternatively, GeF ₄ may be mixed. This material gas may be diluted with H ₂ , or H ₂ and one or more kinds of rare gas elements selected from He, Ar, Kr, and Ne. The dilution rate is in the range of 2 to 1000 times. The pressure is generally in the range of 0.1 Pa to 133 Pa, and the power supply frequency is 1 MHz to 120 MHz, preferably 13 MHz to 60 MHz. The substrate heating temperature may be 300 ° C. or less. As an impurity element in the film, impurities of atmospheric components such as oxygen, nitrogen, and carbon are desirably 1 × 10 ²⁰ cm ⁻¹ or less, and in particular, the oxygen concentration is 5 × 10 ¹⁹ / cm ³ or less, preferably 1 × 10 ¹⁹ / c
m ³ or less. Here, an amorphous semiconductor layer is formed using a known material (a sputtering method, an LPCVD method, a plasma CVD method, or the like) with a material (eg, SixGe1-x) containing silicon (Si) as a main component. The crystalline semiconductor layer is crystallized by a known crystallization method such as a laser crystallization method, a thermal crystallization method using an RTA or furnace annealing furnace, or a thermal crystallization method using a metal element that promotes crystallization.

The insulating film 110116 includes silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), and silicon oxynitride (
A single-layer structure of an insulating film containing oxygen or nitrogen such as SiOxNy) (x> y) or silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (x> y), or a stacked structure thereof can be used.

The gate electrode 110117 can have a single-layer conductive film or a stacked structure of two-layer or three-layer conductive films. As a material of the gate electrode 110117, a known conductive film can be used. For example, a simple film of an element such as tantalum (Ta), titanium (Ti), molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (W), chromium (Cr), silicon (Si), or a nitride film of the element (typically Tantalum nitride film, tungsten nitride film, titanium nitride film), or
An alloy film combining the above elements (typically, a Mo—W alloy or a Mo—Ta alloy) or a silicide film of the above elements (typically, a tungsten silicide film or a titanium silicide film) can be used. Note that the single film, nitride film, alloy film, silicide film, and the like described above may be used as a single layer or may be stacked.

The insulating film 110118 is formed by a known means (such as sputtering or plasma CVD) by using silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y).
, An insulating film containing oxygen or nitrogen such as silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (x> y) or DLC (
A single-layer structure of a film containing carbon such as diamond-like carbon) or a laminated structure thereof can be used.

The insulating film 110119 is formed of siloxane resin, silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (
SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y), silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy)
(X> y) such as an insulating film having oxygen or nitrogen, a film containing carbon such as DLC (Diamond Like Carbon), or epoxy, polyimide, polyamide, polyvinyl phenol, benzocyclobutene, acrylic, etc. A single layer or a stacked structure of an organic material can be used. Note that a siloxane resin corresponds to a resin including a Si—O—Si bond.
Siloxane has a skeleton structure formed of a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon) is used. A fluoro group can also be used as a substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as a substituent. Note that in the semiconductor device applicable to the present invention, the insulating film 110119 can be provided directly so as to cover the gate electrode 110117 without providing the insulating film 110118.

The conductive film 110123 is made of Al, Ni, C, W, Mo, Ti, Pt, Cu, Ta, Au, M
A single element film of an element such as n, a nitride film of the element, an alloy film combining the elements, a silicide film of the element, or the like can be used. For example, as an alloy containing a plurality of the elements, an Al alloy containing C and Ti, an Al alloy containing Ni,
An Al alloy containing C and Ni, an Al alloy containing C and Mn, or the like can be used. In the case of providing a stacked structure, a structure in which Al is sandwiched between Mo, Ti, or the like can be employed. By carrying out like this, the tolerance with respect to the heat | fever and chemical reaction of Al can be improved.

Next, characteristics of each structure will be described with reference to cross-sectional views of a plurality of transistors having different structures shown in FIG.

110101 is a single drain transistor and can be manufactured by a simple method.
There are advantages in that the manufacturing cost is low and the yield can be increased. Here, the semiconductor layer 11011
3 and 110115 have different impurity concentrations, the semiconductor layer 110113 is used as a channel region, and the semiconductor layer 110115 is used as a source region and a drain region. in this way,
The resistivity of the semiconductor layer can be controlled by controlling the amount of impurities. Further, the electrical connection state between the semiconductor layer and the conductive film 110123 can be made close to ohmic connection. In addition,
As a method of separately forming semiconductor layers having different amounts of impurities, a method of doping impurities into the semiconductor layer using the gate electrode 110117 as a mask can be used.

110102 is a transistor having a taper angle greater than or equal to a certain value in the gate electrode 110117 and can be manufactured by a simple method, and thus has an advantage of low manufacturing cost and high yield. Here, the semiconductor layers 110113, 110114, and 110115 have different impurity concentrations, the semiconductor layer 110113 is a channel region, the semiconductor layer 110114 is a lightly doped drain (LDD) region, and the semiconductor layer 110.
115 is used as a source region and a drain region. Thus, the resistivity of the semiconductor layer can be controlled by controlling the amount of impurities. Further, the electrical connection state between the semiconductor layer and the conductive film 110123 can be made close to ohmic connection. In addition, since the LDD region is included, a high electric field is hardly applied inside the transistor, and deterioration of the element due to hot carriers can be suppressed. Note that as a method of separately forming semiconductor layers having different amounts of impurities, a method of doping impurities into the semiconductor layers using the gate electrode 110117 as a mask can be used. In 110102, since the gate electrode 110117 has a certain taper angle or more, a gradient can be given to the concentration of the impurity that passes through the gate electrode 110117 and is doped into the semiconductor layer. Regions can be formed.

110103 is a transistor in which the gate electrode 110117 is composed of at least two layers, and the lower gate electrode is longer than the upper gate electrode. In this specification, the shape of the upper gate electrode and the lower gate electrode is referred to as a hat shape. Gate electrode 110
Since the shape of 117 is a hat shape, an LDD region can be formed without adding a photomask. Note that, as in 110103, the LDD region is the gate electrode 11.
The structure overlapping with 0117, especially the GOLD structure (Gate Overlapped)
LDD). Note that the following method may be used as a method of making the shape of the gate electrode 110117 into a hat shape.

First, when patterning the gate electrode 110117, the lower gate electrode and the upper gate electrode are etched by dry etching so that the side surfaces are inclined (tapered). Subsequently, the upper-layer gate electrode is processed to be nearly vertical by anisotropic etching. Thereby, a gate electrode having a hat-shaped cross section is formed. Then twice,
A semiconductor layer 1101 used as a channel region is doped by doping an impurity element.
13. A semiconductor layer 110114 used as an LDD region and a semiconductor layer 110115 used as a source electrode and a drain electrode are formed.

Note that an LDD region overlapping the gate electrode 110117 is defined as a Lov region, and the gate electrode 11.
An LDD region that does not overlap with 0117 will be referred to as a Loff region. Where Lof
The f region has a high effect of suppressing the off-current value, but has a low effect of relaxing the electric field near the drain and preventing the deterioration of the on-current value due to hot carriers. On the other hand, the Lov region relaxes the electric field near the drain and is effective in preventing deterioration of the on-current value, but has a low effect of suppressing the off-current value. Therefore, it is preferable to manufacture a transistor having a structure corresponding to a required characteristic for each of various circuits. For example, in the case where a semiconductor device that can be applied to the present invention is used as a display device, a transistor having a Loff region is preferably used as the pixel transistor in order to suppress an off-state current value. On the other hand, as the transistor in the peripheral circuit, it is preferable to use a transistor having a Lov region in order to relax the electric field in the vicinity of the drain and prevent deterioration of the on-current value.

110104 is in contact with the side surface of the gate electrode 110117 and is in contact with the side wall 110121.
A transistor having By having the side wall 110121, an area overlapping with the side wall 110121 can be an LDD area.

110105 performs LDD (Lof) by doping a semiconductor layer using a mask.
f) A transistor in which a region is formed. Thus, the LDD region can be formed reliably and the off-state current value of the transistor can be reduced.

110106 performs LDD (Lov) by doping a semiconductor layer using a mask.
) Transistor in which a region is formed. Thus, the LDD region can be formed reliably, the electric field in the vicinity of the drain of the transistor can be relaxed, and the deterioration of the on-current value can be reduced.

Next, an example of a method for manufacturing a transistor that can be included in a semiconductor device to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIGS.

Note that the structure and manufacturing method of the transistor that can be included in the semiconductor device to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to those illustrated in FIGS.

In this embodiment, the insulating film 1 is formed on the surface of the substrate 110111, on the surface of the insulating film 110112, on the surface of the semiconductor layer 110113, on the surface of 110114, and on the surface of 110115.
On the surface of 10116, on the surface of the insulating film 110118, or on the surface of the insulating film 110119,
By oxidizing or nitriding using plasma treatment, the semiconductor layer or the insulating film can be oxidized or nitrided. In this manner, the surface of the semiconductor layer or the insulating film is modified by oxidizing or nitriding the semiconductor layer or the insulating film using plasma treatment, and compared with an insulating film formed by a CVD method or a sputtering method. Since a denser insulating film can be formed, defects such as pinholes can be suppressed and characteristics and the like of the semiconductor device can be improved.

First, the surface of the substrate 110111 is cleaned using hydrofluoric acid (HF), alkali, or pure water.
As the substrate 110111, a glass substrate such as barium borosilicate glass or alumino borosilicate glass, a quartz substrate, a ceramic substrate, a metal substrate including stainless steel, or the like can be used. In addition, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate (PE
N), it is also possible to use a plastic substrate typified by polyethersulfone (PES) or a substrate made of flexible synthetic resin such as acrylic. Here, the substrate 11
A case where a glass substrate is used as 0111 is shown.

Here, an oxide film or a nitride film may be formed on the surface of the substrate 110111 by performing plasma treatment on the surface of the substrate 110111 to oxidize or nitride the surface of the substrate 110111 (FIG. 43B). . Hereinafter, an insulating film such as an oxide film or a nitride film formed by performing plasma treatment on the surface is also referred to as a plasma treatment insulating film. In FIG. 43 (B)
The insulating film 110131 is a plasma processing insulating film. In general, when a semiconductor element such as a thin film transistor is provided on a substrate such as glass or plastic, an impurity element such as alkali metal or alkaline earth metal such as Na contained in glass or plastic is mixed in the semiconductor element. Contamination may affect the characteristics of the semiconductor element. But,
By nitriding the surface of a substrate made of glass or plastic, N contained in the substrate
Impurity elements such as alkali metal or alkaline earth metal such as a can be prevented from entering the semiconductor element.

Note that when the surface is oxidized by plasma treatment, an oxygen atmosphere (eg, oxygen (O ₂
) And a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) atmosphere, oxygen and hydrogen (H ₂ ) and a rare gas atmosphere, or dinitrogen monoxide and a rare gas atmosphere. )
Plasma treatment is performed at On the other hand, when the semiconductor layer is nitrided by plasma treatment, in a nitrogen atmosphere (for example, nitrogen (N ₂ ) and a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) atmosphere, or Plasma treatment is performed in an atmosphere of nitrogen, hydrogen, and a rare gas, or NH ₃ and a rare gas. As the rare gas, for example, Ar can be used. Alternatively, a gas in which Ar and Kr are mixed may be used. Therefore, the plasma processing insulating film includes a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) used for the plasma processing. For example, when Ar is used, Ar is contained in the plasma processing insulating film.

In the plasma treatment, the electron density is 1 × 10 ¹¹ cm ⁻³ in the gas atmosphere.
1 × 10 ¹³ cm ⁻³ or less and the plasma electron temperature is 0.5 ev or more and 1.5 eV.
It is preferred to do the following. Since the electron density of the plasma is high and the electron temperature in the vicinity of the object to be processed is low, damage to the object to be processed by the plasma can be prevented. In addition, since the electron density of plasma is as high as 1 × 10 ¹¹ cm ⁻³ or higher, an oxide or a nitride film formed by oxidizing or nitriding an irradiation object using plasma treatment is a CVD process.
Compared with a film formed by a method or a sputtering method, a film having excellent uniformity in film thickness and the like can be formed. Alternatively, since the electron temperature of plasma is as low as 1 eV or less, oxidation or nitridation can be performed at a lower temperature than conventional plasma treatment or thermal oxidation. For example, even if the plasma treatment is performed at a temperature that is 100 degrees or more lower than the strain point temperature of the glass substrate, the oxidation or nitridation treatment can be sufficiently performed. Note that a high frequency such as a microwave (2.45 GHz) can be used as a frequency for forming plasma. Note that the plasma treatment is performed using the above conditions unless otherwise specified.

Note that FIG. 43B illustrates the case where a plasma treatment insulating film is formed by performing plasma treatment on the surface of the substrate 110111; however, in this embodiment, the substrate 11011 is used.
This includes the case where a plasma processing insulating film is not formed on the surface of 1.

Note that in FIGS. 43C to 43G, a plasma treatment insulating film formed by plasma treatment of the surface of the object to be processed is not illustrated, but in this embodiment mode, the substrate 11 is not illustrated.
0111, insulating film 110112, semiconductor layers 110113, 110114, 110115,
This includes the case where a plasma treatment insulating film formed by performing plasma treatment exists on the surface of the insulating film 110116, the insulating film 110118, or the insulating film 110119.

Next, an insulating film 110112 is formed over the substrate 110111 by a known method (a sputtering method, an LPCVD method, a plasma CVD method, or the like) (FIG. 43C). As the insulating film 110112, silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y) can be used.

Here, a plasma treatment insulating film may be formed on the surface of the insulating film 110112 by performing plasma treatment on the surface of the insulating film 110112 and oxidizing or nitriding the insulating film 110112. By oxidizing the surface of the insulating film 110112, the surface of the insulating film 110112 can be modified to obtain a dense film with few defects such as pinholes. Insulating film 1101
By oxidizing the surface of 12, a plasma processing insulating film with a low N atom content can be formed. Therefore, when a semiconductor layer is provided on the plasma processing insulating film, the interface characteristics between the plasma processing insulating film and the semiconductor layer are improves. The plasma processing insulating film contains a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) used for the plasma processing. Note that the plasma treatment can be similarly performed under the above-described conditions.

Next, island-shaped semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114 are formed over the insulating film 110112 (
FIG. 43 (D)). The island-shaped semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114 are formed on the insulating film 110112 by using a known method (sputtering method, LPCVD method, plasma CVD method, or the like) with silicon (S
An amorphous semiconductor layer is formed using a material having i) as a main component (for example, Si _x Ge _1-x or the like), the amorphous semiconductor layer is crystallized, and the semiconductor layer is selectively etched. Can be provided. The amorphous semiconductor layer is crystallized by a laser crystallization method, a thermal crystallization method using an RTA or a furnace annealing furnace, a thermal crystallization method using a metal element that promotes crystallization, or a combination of these methods. It can carry out by well-known crystallization methods, such as a method. Note that here, the end portion of the island-shaped semiconductor layer is provided in a shape close to a right angle (θ = 85 to 100 °). Alternatively, the semiconductor layer 110114 serving as a low-concentration drain region is doped with impurities using a mask.
It may be formed by pinging.

Here, the surface of the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114 is subjected to plasma treatment, so that the semiconductor layer 1
By oxidizing or nitriding the surfaces of 10113 and 110114, the semiconductor layer 11011 is obtained.
3, a plasma treatment insulating film may be formed on the surface of 110114. For example, the semiconductor layer 11
When Si is used for 0113 and 110114, silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiNx) is formed as the plasma processing insulating film. Alternatively, the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114 may be oxidized by plasma treatment and then nitrided by performing plasma treatment again. In this case, silicon oxide (SiOx) is formed in contact with the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114, and silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (x>
y) is formed. Note that in the case of oxidizing the semiconductor layer by plasma treatment, in an oxygen atmosphere (for example, in an atmosphere of oxygen (O ₂ ) and a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe), or Plasma treatment is performed in oxygen and hydrogen (H ₂ ) and a rare gas atmosphere or dinitrogen monoxide and a rare gas atmosphere. On the other hand, when the semiconductor layer is nitrided by plasma treatment, nitrogen (N ₂ ) and a rare gas (He, Ne, Ar, Kr, X
including at least one of e), nitrogen, hydrogen and rare gas atmosphere or NH
3 and a rare gas atmosphere). As the rare gas, for example, Ar can be used. A gas in which Ar and Kr are mixed may be used. Therefore, the plasma processing insulating film includes a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) used for the plasma processing. For example, when Ar is used, Ar is contained in the plasma processing insulating film.

Next, an insulating film 110116 is formed (FIG. 43E). The insulating film 110116 is formed using a known means (a sputtering method, an LPCVD method, a plasma CVD method, or the like) using silicon oxide (SiOx).
), Silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y), silicon nitride oxide (
A single-layer structure of an insulating film containing oxygen or nitrogen such as SiNxOy) (x> y) or a stacked structure thereof can be used. Note that in the case where a plasma treatment insulating film is formed on the surfaces of the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114 by performing plasma treatment on the surfaces of the semiconductor layers 110113 and 110114, the plasma treatment insulating film can be used as the insulating film 110116. .

Here, the plasma treatment insulating film may be formed on the surface of the insulating film 110116 by performing plasma treatment on the surface of the insulating film 110116 and oxidizing or nitriding the surface of the insulating film 110116. Note that the plasma treatment insulating film is formed of a rare gas (He, Ne,
Including at least one of Ar, Kr, and Xe). Further, the plasma treatment can be similarly performed under the above-described conditions.

Alternatively, the insulating film 110116 may be oxidized by performing plasma treatment once in an oxygen atmosphere and then nitrided by performing plasma treatment again in a nitrogen atmosphere. In this manner, by performing plasma treatment on the insulating film 110116 and oxidizing or nitriding the surface of the insulating film 110116, the surface of the insulating film 110116 can be modified and a dense film can be formed. An insulating film obtained by performing plasma treatment is denser and has fewer defects such as pinholes than an insulating film formed by a CVD method or a sputtering method, so that characteristics of the thin film transistor can be improved.

Next, the gate electrode 110117 is formed (FIG. 43F). The gate electrode 110117 can be formed by a known means (a sputtering method, an LPCVD method, a plasma CVD method, or the like).

In 110101, by performing impurity doping after forming the gate electrode 110117, the semiconductor layer 110115 used as the source region and the drain region can be formed.

In 110102, by performing impurity doping after forming the gate electrode 110117, a semiconductor layer 110115 used as an LDD region and a semiconductor layer 110115 used as a semiconductor layer source region and a drain region can be formed.

In 110103, by performing impurity doping after forming the gate electrode 110117, a semiconductor layer 110115 used as an LDD region and a semiconductor layer 110115 used as a semiconductor layer source region and a drain region can be formed.

In 110104, a side wall 110121 is formed on the side surface of the gate electrode 110117.
110114 is used as an LDD region by performing impurity doping.
The semiconductor layer 110115 used as the semiconductor layer source region and the drain region can be formed.

The side wall 110121 is made of silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiNx).
Can be used. As a method of forming the side wall 110121 on the side surface of the gate electrode 110117, for example, after forming the gate electrode 110117, silicon oxide (
A method of etching a silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiNx) film by anisotropic etching after forming a film of SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiNx) by a known method can be used. Thus, silicon oxide (SiO 2) is formed only on the side surface of the gate electrode 110117.
x) or a silicon nitride (SiNx) film can be left, so that the side wall 110121 can be formed on the side surface of the gate electrode 110117.

In 110105, a mask 110122 is formed so as to cover the gate electrode 110117, and then impurity doping is performed to use it as an LDD (Loff) region 11.
A semiconductor layer 110115 used as a semiconductor layer source region and a drain region can be formed.

In 110106, by performing impurity doping after forming the gate electrode 110117, a semiconductor layer 110115 used as an LDD (Lov) region and a semiconductor layer 110115 used as a semiconductor layer source region and a drain region can be formed.

Next, an insulating film 110118 is formed (FIG. 43G). The insulating film 110118 is formed of silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (S) by a known means (such as sputtering or plasma CVD).
iNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y), silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (
It can be provided with a single layer structure of an insulating film containing oxygen or nitrogen such as x> y) or a film containing carbon such as DLC (diamond like carbon), or a laminated structure thereof.

Here, a plasma treatment insulating film may be formed on the surface of the insulating film 110118 by performing plasma treatment on the surface of the insulating film 110118 and oxidizing or nitriding the surface of the insulating film 110118. Note that the plasma treatment insulating film is formed of a rare gas (He, Ne,
Including at least one of Ar, Kr, and Xe). Further, the plasma treatment can be similarly performed under the above-described conditions.

Next, an insulating film 110119 is formed. The insulating film 110119 is formed by a known means (sputtering method, plasma CVD method, or the like) using silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxynitride (SiOxNy) (x> y), silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) ( In addition to insulating films containing oxygen or nitrogen such as x> y) and films containing carbon such as DLC (Diamond Like Carbon), epoxy, polyimide, polyamide, polyvinyl phenol, benzocyclobutene In addition, a single layer structure of an organic material such as acrylic or a siloxane resin, or a laminated structure thereof can be used. Note that a siloxane resin corresponds to a resin including a Si—O—Si bond. Siloxane has a skeleton structure formed of a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon) is used. A fluoro group can also be used as a substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as a substituent. The plasma processing insulating film contains a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) used for the plasma processing. For example, when Ar is used, the plasma processing insulating film is used. Ar is contained in the film.

In the case where an organic material such as polyimide, polyamide, polyvinyl phenol, benzocyclobutene, or acrylic, or a siloxane resin is used as the insulating film 110119, the insulating film 110119 is used.
The surface of the insulating film can be modified by oxidizing or nitriding the surface of the insulating film by plasma treatment. By modifying the surface, the strength of the insulating film 110119 is improved, and it is possible to reduce physical damage such as generation of cracks at the time of opening formation or the like and film reduction at the time of etching. In addition, when the surface of the insulating film 110119 is modified, adhesion with the conductive film is improved when the conductive film 110123 is formed over the insulating film 110119. For example, in the case where siloxane resin is used as the insulating film 110119 and nitridation is performed using plasma treatment, the surface of the siloxane resin is nitrided, so that a plasma treatment insulating film containing nitrogen or a rare gas is formed, and the physical strength is increased. improves.

Next, in order to form the conductive film 110123 electrically connected to the semiconductor layer 110115,
Contact holes are formed in the insulating film 110119, the insulating film 110118, and the insulating film 110116. Note that the shape of the contact hole may be tapered. By doing this,
The coverage of the conductive film 110123 can be improved.

FIG. 44 illustrates a cross-sectional structure of a bottom-gate transistor and a cross-sectional structure of a capacitor.

A first insulating film (insulating film 110502) is formed over the entire surface of the substrate 110501. The first insulating film has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate side from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor. That is, the first insulating film functions as a base film. Therefore, a highly reliable transistor can be manufactured. Note that as the first insulating film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy) is used.
) Or a stack of these layers can be used.

A first conductive layer (a conductive layer 110503 and a conductive layer 110504) is formed over the first insulating film. The conductive layer 110503 includes a portion functioning as the gate electrode of the transistor 110520. The conductive layer 110504 includes a portion functioning as the first electrode of the capacitor 110521. The first conductive layer includes Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, N
d, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, NA-Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge, or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

A second insulating film (insulating film 110522) is formed so as to cover at least the first conductive layer. The second insulating film functions as a gate insulating film. Note that as the second insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or a stacked layer thereof can be used.

Note that a silicon oxide film is preferably used as the second insulating film in contact with the semiconductor layer. This is because the trap level at the interface between the semiconductor layer and the second insulating film is reduced.

Note that in the case where the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, it is preferable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film in a portion in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.

A semiconductor layer is formed by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like on a part of the second insulating film which is formed so as to overlap with the first conductive layer. A part of the semiconductor layer is extended to a portion of the second insulating film that is not formed so as to overlap the first conductive layer. The semiconductor layer includes a channel formation region (a channel formation region 1105
10), an LDD region (LDD region 110508, LDD region 110509), and an impurity region (impurity region 110505, impurity region 110506, impurity region 110507). The channel formation region 110510 functions as a channel formation region of the transistor 110520. The LDD region 110508 and the LDD region 110509 function as an LDD region of the transistor 110520. Note that the LDD region 110508 and the LDD region 110509 are not necessarily required. The impurity region 110505 is formed in the transistor 11
0520 includes a portion functioning as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode. Impurity region 1
50506 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110520. The impurity region 110507 includes a portion functioning as the second electrode of the capacitor 110521.

A third insulating film (insulating film 110511) is formed on the entire surface. A contact hole is selectively formed in a part of the third insulating film. The insulating film 110511 has a function as an interlayer film. As the third insulating film, an inorganic material (silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxynitride, or the like), a low dielectric constant organic compound material (photosensitive or non-photosensitive organic resin material), or the like can be used. Alternatively, a material containing siloxane can be used. Siloxane is a material in which a skeleton structure is formed by a bond of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aromatic hydrocarbon) is used. Alternatively, a fluoro group may be used as a substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as a substituent.

A second conductive layer (a conductive layer 110512 and a conductive layer 110513) is formed over the third insulating film. The conductive layer 110512 is connected to the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110520 through a contact hole formed in the third insulating film. Therefore, the conductive layer 110512 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110520. The conductive layer 110513 includes a portion functioning as the first electrode of the capacitor 110521. As the second conductive layer, Ti, Mo, Ta
, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, NA-Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, G
e or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

Note that as a step after the second conductive layer is formed, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.

The structure of the transistor and the capacitor in the case where an amorphous silicon (a-Si: H) film is used for the semiconductor layer of the transistor will be described.

FIG. 45 illustrates a cross-sectional structure of a top-gate transistor and a cross-sectional structure of a capacitor.

A first insulating film (insulating film 110202) is formed over the entire surface of the substrate 110201. The first insulating film has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate side from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor. That is, the first insulating film functions as a base film. Therefore, a highly reliable transistor can be manufactured. Note that as the first insulating film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy) is used.
) Or a stack of these layers can be used.

Note that the first insulating film is not necessarily formed. In this case, the number of processes can be reduced. The manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure can be simplified, the yield can be improved.

A first conductive layer (a conductive layer 110203, a conductive layer 110204, and a conductive layer 110205) is formed over the first insulating film. The conductive layer 110203 includes a portion functioning as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 110220. Conductive layer 11020
4 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 110220. The conductive layer 110205 includes a portion functioning as the first electrode of the capacitor 110221. The first conductive layer includes Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, N
d, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, NA-Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge, or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

A first semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 110) is formed over the conductive layer 110203 and the conductive layer 110204.
206 and semiconductor layer 110207). The semiconductor layer 110206 includes a portion that functions as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode. The semiconductor layer 110207 includes
A portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode is included. Note that as the first semiconductor layer, silicon containing phosphorus or the like can be used.

The second layer is formed between the conductive layer 110203 and the conductive layer 110204 and over the first insulating film.
The semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 110208) is formed. Then, the semiconductor layer 110208
Is extended to the top of the conductive layer 110203 and the conductive layer 110204. The semiconductor layer 110208 includes a portion functioning as a channel region of the transistor 110220. Note that as the second semiconductor layer, an amorphous semiconductor layer such as amorphous silicon (a-Si: H) or a semiconductor layer such as a microcrystalline semiconductor (μ-Si: H) can be used. .

In order to cover at least the semiconductor layer 110208 and the conductive layer 110205, the second insulating film (
An insulating film 110209 and an insulating film 110210) are formed. The second insulating film functions as a gate insulating film. Note that as the second insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or a stacked layer thereof can be used.

Note that a silicon oxide film is preferably used as the second insulating film in contact with the second semiconductor layer. This is because the trap level at the interface between the second semiconductor layer and the second insulating film is reduced.

Note that in the case where the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, it is preferable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film in a portion in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.

A second conductive layer (a conductive layer 110211 and a conductive layer 110212) is formed over the second insulating film. The conductive layer 110211 includes a portion functioning as a gate electrode of the transistor 110220. The conductive layer 110212 functions as the second electrode or the wiring of the capacitor 110221. As the second conductive layer, Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, A
l, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, NA-Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge, or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

Note that as a step after the second conductive layer is formed, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.

FIG. 46 illustrates a cross-sectional structure of an inverted staggered (bottom gate) transistor and a cross-sectional structure of a capacitor. In particular, the transistor illustrated in FIG. 46 has a structure called a channel etch type.

A first insulating film (insulating film 110302) is formed over the entire surface of the substrate 110301. The first insulating film has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate side from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor. That is, the first insulating film functions as a base film. Therefore, a highly reliable transistor can be manufactured. Note that as the first insulating film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy) is used.
) Or a stack of these layers can be used.

Note that the first insulating film is not necessarily formed. In this case, the number of processes can be reduced. The manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure can be simplified, the yield can be improved.

A first conductive layer (a conductive layer 110303 and a conductive layer 110304) is formed over the first insulating film. The conductive layer 110303 includes a portion functioning as the gate electrode of the transistor 110320. The conductive layer 110304 includes a portion functioning as the first electrode of the capacitor 110321. As the first conductive layer, Ti, Mo, TB, Cr, W, Bl, N
d, Cu, Bg, Bu, Pt, NA-Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge, or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

A second insulating film (insulating film 110302) is formed so as to cover at least the first conductive layer. The second insulating film functions as a gate insulating film. Note that as the second insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or a stacked layer thereof can be used.

Note that a silicon oxide film is preferably used as the second insulating film in contact with the semiconductor layer. This is because the trap level at the interface between the semiconductor layer and the second insulating film is reduced.

Note that in the case where the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, it is preferable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film in a portion in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.

The first semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 11) is formed on a part of the second insulating film which is formed so as to overlap with the first conductive layer by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.
0306) is formed. A part of the semiconductor layer 110308 is extended to a portion of the second insulating film that is not formed so as to overlap with the first conductive layer. Semiconductor layer 11
0306 includes a portion functioning as a channel region of the transistor 110320. Note that as the semiconductor layer 110306, an amorphous semiconductor layer such as amorphous silicon (A-Si: H) or a semiconductor layer such as a microcrystalline semiconductor (μ-Si: H) can be used.

The second semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 110307 and semiconductor layer 110 is formed over part of the first semiconductor layer.
307) is formed. The semiconductor layer 110307 includes a portion that functions as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode. The semiconductor layer 110308 includes a portion that functions as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode. Note that as the second conductor layer, silicon containing phosphorus or the like can be used.

A second conductive layer (a conductive layer 110309, a conductive layer 1) is formed over the second semiconductor layer and the second insulating film.
10310 and a conductive layer 110311). The conductive layer 110309 includes a portion functioning as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 110320. The conductive layer 110310 includes a portion functioning as the other of the source and the drain electrode of the transistor 110320. The conductive layer 110312 includes a portion functioning as the second electrode of the capacitor 110321. As the second conductive layer, Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, N
d, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, NA-Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge, or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

Note that as a step after the second conductive layer is formed, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.

Here, an example of a process characterized by a channel etch transistor will be described. The first semiconductor layer and the second semiconductor layer can be formed using the same mask. In particular,
The first semiconductor layer and the second semiconductor layer are continuously formed. The first semiconductor layer and the second semiconductor layer are formed using the same mask.

Another example of a process characterized by a channel etch transistor will be described. The channel region of the transistor can be formed without using a new mask. In particular,
After the second conductive layer is formed, part of the second semiconductor layer is removed using the second conductive layer as a mask. Alternatively, part of the second semiconductor layer is removed using the same mask as the second conductive layer. Then, the first semiconductor layer formed under the removed second semiconductor layer becomes a channel region of the transistor.

FIG. 47 illustrates a cross-sectional structure of an inverted staggered (bottom gate) transistor and a cross-sectional structure of a capacitor. In particular, the transistor illustrated in FIGS. 47A and 47B has a structure called a channel protection type (channel stop type).

A first insulating film (insulating film 110402) is formed over the entire surface of the substrate 110401. The first insulating film has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate side from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor. That is, the first insulating film functions as a base film. Therefore, a highly reliable transistor can be manufactured. Note that as the first insulating film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy) is used.
) Or a stack of these layers can be used.

Note that the first insulating film is not necessarily formed. In this case, the number of processes can be reduced. The manufacturing cost can be reduced. Since the structure can be simplified, the yield can be improved.

A first conductive layer (a conductive layer 110403 and a conductive layer 110404) is formed over the first insulating film. The conductive layer 110403 includes a portion functioning as the gate electrode of the transistor 110420. The conductive layer 110404 includes a portion functioning as the first electrode of the capacitor 110421. As the first conductive layer, Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Cl, N
d, Cu, Cg, Cu, Pt, NC, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge, or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

A second insulating film (insulating film 110402) is formed so as to cover at least the first conductive layer. The second insulating film functions as a gate insulating film. Note that as the second insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or a stacked layer thereof can be used.

Note that a silicon oxide film is preferably used as the second insulating film in contact with the semiconductor layer. This is because the trap level at the interface between the semiconductor layer and the second insulating film is reduced.

Note that in the case where the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, it is preferable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film in a portion in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.

The first semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 11) is formed on a part of the second insulating film which is formed so as to overlap with the first conductive layer by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.
0406) is formed. A part of the semiconductor layer 110408 is extended to a portion of the second insulating film which is not formed so as to overlap with the first conductive layer. Semiconductor layer 11
0406 includes a portion functioning as a channel region of the transistor 110420. Note that as the semiconductor layer 110406, an amorphous semiconductor layer such as amorphous silicon (C—Si: H) or a semiconductor layer such as a microcrystalline semiconductor (μ-Si: H) can be used.

A third insulating film (insulating film 110412) is formed over part of the first semiconductor layer. The insulating film 110412 has a function of preventing the channel region of the transistor 110420 from being removed by etching. That is, the insulating film 110412 functions as a channel protective film (channel stop film). Note that as the third insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon oxynitride film (SiOxNy), or a stacked layer thereof can be used.

A second semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 110) is formed on a part of the first semiconductor layer and a part of the third insulating film.
407 and semiconductor layer 110408). The semiconductor layer 110407 includes a portion that functions as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode. The semiconductor layer 110408 includes:
A portion functioning as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode is included. Note that as the second conductor layer, silicon containing phosphorus or the like can be used.

A second conductive layer (a conductive layer 110409, a conductive layer 110410, and a conductive layer 110411) is formed over the second semiconductor layer. The conductive layer 110409 includes the transistor 110420.
A portion functioning as one of the source electrode and the drain electrode. The conductive layer 110410 includes
A portion functioning as the other of the source and the drain electrode of the transistor 110420 is included. The conductive layer 110411 includes a portion functioning as the second electrode of the capacitor 110421. As the second conductive layer, Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, A
u, Pt, NC, Si, Zn, Fe, Ca, Ge, or an alloy thereof can be used. Alternatively, a stack of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

Note that as a step after the second conductive layer is formed, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.

Here, an example of a process characterized by a channel protection transistor will be described. The first semiconductor layer, the second semiconductor layer, and the second conductive layer can be formed using the same mask.
At the same time, a channel region can be formed. Specifically, the first semiconductor layer is formed,
Next, a third insulating film (channel protective film, channel stop film) is formed using a mask,
Next, a second semiconductor layer and a second conductive layer are successively formed. Then, after the second conductive layer is formed, the first semiconductor layer, the second semiconductor layer, and the second conductive layer are formed using the same mask. However, since the first semiconductor layer below the third insulating film is protected by the third insulating film, it is not removed by etching. This portion (the portion of the first semiconductor layer in which the third insulating film is formed above) becomes the channel region.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied to and combined with the contents (may be a part) described in the drawings of another embodiment and examples. Or can be freely replaced. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each embodiment with a portion of another embodiment and an example.

Note that in this embodiment, the contents described in other embodiments and examples (may be a part)
Example when embodied, example when slightly modified, example when partially changed, example when improved, example when described in detail, example when applied, example with related parts And so on. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes and examples can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.

(Embodiment 10)
In this embodiment, an example of a display device, particularly a case where optical handling is performed will be described.

A rear projection display device 130100 illustrated in FIGS. 81A and 81B includes a projector unit 130111, a mirror 130112, and a screen panel 130101. In addition, a speaker 130102 and operation switches 130104 may be provided. The projector unit 130111 is disposed under the housing 130110 of the rear projection display device 130100, and the projection light that projects an image based on the image signal is reflected on the mirror 13.
Project toward 0112. The rear projection display device 130100 includes a screen panel 130.
101 is configured to display an image projected from the back surface of 101.

On the other hand, FIG. 82 shows a front projection display device 130200. Front projection display device 1
30200 includes a projector unit 130111 and a projection optical system 130201. The projection optical system 130201 is configured to project an image on a screen or the like disposed on the front surface.

A rear projection display device 130100 shown in FIG. 81 and a front projection display device 130 shown in FIG.
The configuration of the projector unit 130111 applied to 200 will be described below.

FIG. 83 shows a configuration example of the projector unit 130111. The projector unit 130111 includes a light source unit 130301 and a modulation unit 130304. The light source unit 130301 includes a light source optical system 13 including lenses.
0303 and a light source lamp 130302. The light source lamp 130302 is housed in the housing so that stray light does not diffuse. As the light source lamp 130302, for example, a high-pressure mercury lamp or a xenon lamp that can emit a large amount of light is used. The light source optical system 130303 includes an optical lens, a film having a polarizing function, a film for adjusting a phase difference, an IR film, and the like as appropriate. The light source unit 130301 is disposed so that the emitted light is incident on the modulation unit 130304. Modulation unit 1
Reference numeral 30304 denotes a plurality of display panels 130308, a color filter, a dichroic mirror 130305, a total reflection mirror 130306, a prism 130309, and a projection optical system 1303.
10 is provided. Light emitted from the light source unit 130301 is separated into a plurality of optical paths by the dichroic mirror 130305.

In each optical path, a color filter that transmits light of a predetermined wavelength or wavelength band, and the display panel 1
30308 is provided. A transmissive display panel 130308 modulates transmitted light based on a video signal. The light of each color transmitted through the display panel 130308 is converted into a prism 1303.
09 and enters the image through the projection optical system 130310 to display an image on the screen. In addition,
A Fresnel lens may be disposed between the mirror and the screen. The projection light projected by the projector unit 130111 and reflected by the mirror is converted into substantially parallel light by the Fresnel lens and projected onto the screen.

A projector unit 130111 shown in FIG. 84 includes a reflective display panel 130407,
The structure provided with 130408 and 130409 is shown.

A projector unit 130111 shown in FIG. 84 includes a light source unit 130301 and a modulation unit 130400. The light source unit 130301 may have the same configuration as that in FIG. The light from the light source unit 130301 is emitted from the dichroic mirror 13040.
1, 130402 and the total reflection mirror 130403 are divided into a plurality of optical paths and enter the polarization beam splitters 130404, 130405, and 130406. The polarizing beam splitters 130404, 130405, and 130406 are provided corresponding to the reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409 corresponding to the respective colors. The reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409 modulate reflected light based on the video signal. The light beams of the respective colors reflected by the reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409 are combined by being incident on the prism 130309 and projected through the projection optical system 13041.

Light emitted from the light source unit 130301 is transmitted through the dichroic mirror 130401 only in the red wavelength region and reflects in the green and blue wavelength regions. Further, the dichroic mirror 130402 reflects only light in the green wavelength region. The light in the red wavelength region that has passed through the dichroic mirror 130401 is reflected by the total reflection mirror 130403,
Light enters the polarization beam splitter 130404, light in the blue wavelength region enters the polarization beam splitter 130405, and light in the green wavelength region enters the polarization beam splitter 130406. The polarization beam splitters 130404, 130405, and 130406 have a function of separating incident light into P-polarized light and S-polarized light, and have a function of transmitting only P-polarized light. The reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409 polarize incident light based on the video signal.

Only S-polarized light corresponding to each color is incident on the reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409 corresponding to the respective colors. Note that the reflective display panels 130407, 130408,
130409 may be a liquid crystal panel. At this time, the liquid crystal panel operates in an electric field controlled birefringence mode (ECB). The liquid crystal molecules are vertically aligned with a certain angle with respect to the substrate. Accordingly, the display molecules of the reflective display panels 130407, 130408, and 130409 are oriented so that they are reflected without changing the polarization state of incident light when the pixel is in the off state. When the pixel is in the on state, the orientation state of the display molecules changes and the polarization state of incident light changes.

The projector unit 130111 shown in FIG. 84 is the rear projection display device 1 shown in FIG.
30100 and the front projection display device 130200 shown in FIG.

The projector unit shown in FIG. 85 has a single-plate configuration. A projector unit 130111 shown in FIG. 85A includes a light source unit 130301 and a display panel 1305.
07, a projection optical system 130511, and a retardation plate 130504. Projection optical system 130
Reference numeral 511 includes one or a plurality of lenses. The display panel 130507 may be provided with a color filter.

FIG. 85B shows a projector unit 130 that operates in a field sequential manner.
111 shows the configuration. The field sequential method is a method in which light of each color such as red, green, and blue is temporally shifted and sequentially incident on a display panel to perform color display without a color filter. In particular, when combined with a display panel having a high response speed with respect to input signal changes, a high-definition image can be displayed. In FIG. 85B, the light source unit 1303
A rotating color filter plate 130505 provided with a plurality of color filters such as red, green, and blue is provided between 01 and the display panel 130508.

A projector unit 130111 shown in FIG. 85C shows a configuration of a color separation method using a macro lens as a color display method. In this method, a microlens array 130506 is provided on the light incident side of the display panel 130509, and color display is realized by illuminating light of each color from each direction. Since the projector unit 130111 adopting this method has little light loss due to the color filter, the light source unit 13
The light from 0301 can be used effectively. FIG. 85 (C)
The projector unit 130111 includes a dichroic mirror 130501, a dichroic mirror 130502, and a dichroic mirror for red light 130503 so as to illuminate the display panel 130509 with light of each color from each direction.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied to and combined with the contents (may be a part) described in the drawings of another embodiment and examples. Or can be freely replaced. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each embodiment with a portion of another embodiment and an example.

Note that in this embodiment, the contents described in other embodiments and examples (may be a part)
Example when embodied, example when slightly modified, example when partially changed, example when improved, example when described in detail, example when applied, example with related parts And so on. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes and examples can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.

(Embodiment 11)
In this embodiment, the operation of the display device will be described.

FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a display device.

The display device 180100 includes a pixel portion 180101, a signal line driver circuit 180103, and a scan line driver circuit 180104. In the pixel portion 180101, a plurality of signal lines S1 to Sm are arranged to extend from the signal line driver circuit 180103 in the column direction. Pixel portion 180101
A plurality of scanning lines G 1 to Gn are arranged extending in the row direction from the scanning line driving circuit 180104. The pixels 180102 are arranged in a matrix where the plurality of signal lines S1 to Sm and the plurality of scanning lines G1 to Gn intersect each other.

Note that the signal line driver circuit 180103 has a function of outputting a signal to each of the signal lines S1 to Sn. This signal may be called a video signal. Note that the scan line driver circuit 180104
Has a function of outputting a signal to each of the scanning lines G1 to Gm. This signal may be called a scanning signal.

Note that the pixel 180102 includes at least a switching element connected to the signal line. This switching element is controlled to be turned on and off by the potential of the scanning line (scanning signal). The pixel 180102 is selected when the switching element is on, and the pixel 180102 is not selected when the switching element is off.

When the pixel 180102 is selected (selected state), a video signal is input from the signal line to the pixel 180102. Then, the state of the pixel 180102 (eg, luminance, transmittance, storage capacitor voltage, etc.) changes in accordance with the input video signal.

When the pixel 180102 is not selected (non-selected state), the video signal is the pixel 1801.
02 is not entered. However, since the pixel 180102 holds a potential corresponding to the video signal input at the time of selection, the pixel 180102 maintains the voltage (for example, luminance, transmittance, storage capacitor voltage, etc.) corresponding to the video signal.

Note that the structure of the display device is not limited to FIG. For example, a wiring (a scanning line, a signal line, a power supply line, a capacitor line, a common line, or the like) may be newly added depending on the structure of the pixel 180102. As another example, a circuit having various functions may be added.

FIG. 72 shows an example of a timing chart for explaining the operation of the display device.

The timing chart in FIG. 72 shows one frame period corresponding to a period for displaying an image for one screen. The period of one frame is not particularly limited, but is preferably at least 1/60 second or less so that a person viewing the image does not feel flicker.

The timing chart of FIG. 72 shows the first scanning line G1, the i-th scanning line Gi (scanning line G1).
1 to Gm), i + 1-th scanning line Gi + 1 and m-th scanning line Gm are respectively selected.

Note that at the same time as the scanning line is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the scanning line is also selected. For example, when the i-th scanning line Gi is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the i-th scanning line Gi is also selected.

Each of the scanning lines G1 to Gm is sequentially selected from the first scanning line G1 to the m-th scanning line Gm (hereinafter also referred to as scanning). For example, during the period when the i-th scanning line Gi is selected, scanning lines other than the i-th scanning line Gi (G1 to Gi-1, Gi + 1 to Gm).
) Is not selected. In the next period, the (i + 1) th scanning line Gi + 1 is selected. Note that a period during which one scanning line is selected is referred to as one gate selection period.

Therefore, when a scanning line in a certain row is selected, a plurality of pixels 180 connected to the scanning line.
A video signal is input to the signal line 102 from each of the signal lines G1 to Gm. For example, i
While the scanning line Gi of the row is selected, the plurality of pixels 180102 connected to the scanning line Gi of the i-th row input arbitrary video signals from the signal lines S1 to Sn, respectively.
Thus, each of the plurality of pixels 180102 can be controlled independently by the scanning signal and the video signal.

Next, a case where one gate selection period is divided into a plurality of subgate selection periods will be described.
FIG. 73 shows a timing chart in the case where one gate selection period is divided into two subgate selection periods (a first subgate selection period and a second subgate selection period).

Note that one gate selection period can be divided into three or more sub-gate selection periods.

The timing chart of FIG. 73 shows one frame period corresponding to a period for displaying an image for one screen. The period of one frame is not particularly limited, but is preferably at least 1/60 second or less so that a person viewing the image does not feel flicker.

One frame has two subframes (first subframe and second subframe).
It is divided into

The timing chart of FIG. 73 shows the i-th scanning line Gi, the i + 1-th scanning line Gi + 1, j
This shows the timing at which the scanning line Gj in the row (any one of the scanning lines Gi + 1 to Gm), the scanning line in the j + 1th row, and the scanning line Gj + 1 in the Gj + 1th row are selected.

Note that at the same time as the scanning line is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the scanning line is also selected. For example, when the i-th scanning line Gi is selected, the pixel 180102 connected to the i-th scanning line Gi is also selected.

Note that each of the scanning lines G1 to Gm is sequentially scanned within each sub-gate selection period. For example, in a certain gate selection period, the i-th scanning line Gi is selected in the first sub-gate selection period, and the j-th scanning line Gj is selected in the second sub-gate selection period.
Then, in one gate selection period, it is possible to operate as if scanning signals for two rows were selected at the same time. At this time, different video signals are input to the signal lines S1 to Sn in the first sub-gate selection period and the second sub-gate selection period. Therefore,
A plurality of pixels 180102 connected to the i-th row and a plurality of pixels 1 connected to the j-th row
Separate video signals can be input to the 80102.

Next, a driving method for converting the frame rate of input image data (also referred to as input frame rate) and the display frame rate (also referred to as display frame rate) will be described. The frame rate is the number of frames per second, and the unit is Hz.

In the present embodiment, the input frame rate does not necessarily match the display frame rate. When the input frame rate and the display frame rate are different, the frame rate can be converted by a circuit (frame rate conversion circuit) that converts the frame rate of the image data. Thus, even when the input frame rate and the display frame rate are different, display can be performed at various display frame rates.

When the input frame rate is higher than the display frame rate, display can be performed by converting a part of the input image data into various display frame rates by discarding part of the input image data.
In this case, since the display frame rate can be reduced, the operating frequency of the drive circuit for display can be reduced, and power consumption can be reduced. On the other hand, when the input frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate, all or part of the input image data is displayed a plurality of times. Another image is generated from the input image data. What is input image data? By using means such as generating an irrelevant image, it is possible to perform display by converting to various display frame rates. In this case, the quality of the moving image can be improved by increasing the display frame rate.

In the present embodiment, a frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate will be described in detail. Note that the frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate is larger than the display frame rate can be realized by executing the reverse procedure of the frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate. it can.

In the present embodiment, an image displayed at the same frame rate as the input frame rate is referred to as a basic image. On the other hand, an image that is displayed at a frame rate different from the basic image and that is displayed in order to match the input frame rate and the display frame rate is referred to as an interpolated image. As the basic image, the same image as the input image data can be used. The same image as the basic image can be used as the interpolation image. Furthermore, an image different from the basic image can be created, and the created image can be used as an interpolation image.

When creating an interpolated image, a method of detecting temporal changes (image motion) of the input image data and using these intermediate images as an interpolated image, an image multiplied by a coefficient in the luminance of the basic image A plurality of different images from the input image data, and presenting the plurality of images sequentially in time (one of the plurality of images as a basic image,
There is a method of causing the observer to perceive that an image corresponding to the input image data is displayed by using the rest as an interpolation image. As a method of creating a plurality of different images from input image data, there are a method of converting a gamma value of the input image data, a method of dividing a gradation value included in the input image data, and the like.

The intermediate state image (intermediate image) is an image obtained by detecting temporal changes (image motion) of input image data and interpolating the detected motion. Obtaining an intermediate image by such a method is referred to as motion compensation.

Next, a specific example of the frame rate conversion method will be described. According to this method, an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times frame rate conversion can be realized. Here, n and m are integers of 1 or more. The frame rate conversion method in the present embodiment can be handled by dividing it into a first step and a second step. Here, the first step is a step of converting the frame rate to an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times. Here, a basic image may be used as the interpolation image, or an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation may be used as the interpolation image. In the second step, a plurality of different images (sub-images) are created from the input image data or each of the images subjected to frame rate conversion in the first step, and the plurality of sub-images are temporally continuous. It is a step for performing the method of displaying. By using the method according to the second step, even though a plurality of different images are actually displayed, it is possible to make the human eye perceive as if the original image was displayed.

The frame rate conversion method in the present embodiment may use both the first step and the second step, omit the first step, and use only the second step. Step 2 may be omitted and only the first step may be used.

First, as a first step, an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times frame rate conversion will be described. (See FIG. 74) In FIG. 74, the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis represents various cases of n and m. The figure in FIG. 74 represents the schematic diagram of the displayed image, and represents the timing displayed by the horizontal position. Furthermore, it is assumed that the movement of the image is schematically represented by the points displayed in the figure. However, this is an example for explanation, and the displayed image is not limited to this. This method can be applied to various images.

The period Tin represents the cycle of the input image data. The period of the input image data corresponds to the input frame rate. For example, when the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the cycle of the input image data is 1/60 seconds. Similarly, if the input frame rate is 50 Hz,
The cycle of the input image data is 1/50 second. Thus, the period of the input image data (unit:
Second) is the reciprocal of the input frame rate (unit: Hz). Various input frame rates can be used. For example, 24 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz,
48 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz, 140 Hz, etc. can be mentioned. Where 2
4 Hz is a frame rate used for film movies and the like. 50 Hz is a frame rate used for PAL standard video signals and the like. 60 Hz is a frame rate used for NTSC video signals. 70 Hz is a frame rate used for a display input signal of a personal computer. 48Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz,
140 Hz is twice the frame rate. Note that the frame rate is not limited to double and may be various multiples. Thus, according to the method shown in this embodiment, frame rate conversion can be realized for input signals of various standards.

The procedure for frame rate conversion of an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times in the first step is as follows. As procedure 1, the display timing of the k-th interpolation image (k is an integer equal to or greater than 1; the initial value is 1) with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the kth interpolation image is
It is assumed that it is the time when a period obtained by multiplying the cycle of the input image data by k (m / n) has elapsed since the display of the first basic image. As a procedure 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the k-th interpolation image is an integer. If it is an integer, the (k (m / n) +1) th basic image is displayed at the display timing of the kth interpolation image, and the first step ends. If it is not an integer, go to step 3. As a procedure 3, an image used as the kth interpolation image is determined. Specifically, the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the k-th interpolation image is converted into the form of x + y / n. Here, x and y are integers, and y is a number smaller than n. When the kth interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the kth interpolation image is changed from the (x + 1) th basic image to (x + 2).
) Is an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion of the image up to the basic image by (y / n). When the kth interpolation image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th basic image can be used. A method for obtaining an intermediate image as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion of the image by (y / n) will be described in detail in another part. In step 4, the target interpolation image is moved to the next interpolation image. Specifically, the value of k is incremented by 1, and the procedure returns to procedure 1.

Next, in the procedure in the first step, the values of n and m are specifically shown and described in detail.

Note that the mechanism for executing the procedure in the first step may be implemented in the apparatus, or may be determined in advance at the design stage of the apparatus. If the mechanism for executing the procedure in the first step is mounted on the apparatus, the driving method can be switched so that the optimum operation according to the situation is performed. The situation here refers to the contents of the image data, the environment inside and outside the device (temperature, humidity, atmospheric pressure, light, sound, magnetic field, electric field, radiation dose,
Altitude, acceleration, moving speed, etc.), user settings, software version, etc. On the other hand, if the mechanism for executing the procedure in the first step is determined in advance at the device design stage, an optimal driving circuit can be used for each driving method, and the mechanism is determined. As a result, a reduction in manufacturing cost due to mass production effects can be expected.

When n = 1, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 1 (where n = 1 and m = 1 in FIG. 74), the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, in step 1, the display timing of the first interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolated image is the period of the input image data after the first basic image is displayed.
/ N) It is the time when a period of 1 time, that is, 1 time has passed.

Next, in procedure 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1, it is an integer. Accordingly, at the display timing of the first interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1), that is, the second basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 1, the k-th image is a basic image, the (k + 1) -th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is one time the cycle of input image data. To do.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 1 (n / m = 1), i-th (i is a positive integer)
Image data and (i + 1) th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the kth image (k is a positive integer) and the (k + 1) th image are input image data. The display apparatus is a method of driving a display device that sequentially displays images at intervals equal to the period of the image, wherein the kth image is displayed in accordance with the ith image data, and the k + 1th image is the i + 1th image. It is displayed according to data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 1, since the frame rate conversion circuit can be omitted, there is an advantage that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 1, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 1. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 1, there is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 1.

When n = 2 and m = 1, that is, when the conversion ratio (n / m) is 2 (location where n = 2 and m = 1 in FIG. 74), the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, in step 1, the display timing of the first interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolated image is the period of the input image data after the first basic image is displayed.
/ N) This is the time when a period that is doubled, that is, halved has elapsed.

Next, in procedure 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1/2, it is not an integer. Therefore, go to step 3.

In procedure 3, an image to be used as the first interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the factor 1/2 is set to x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 1/2, x = 0 and y = 1. When the first interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the first interpolation image is the (x +
1) That is, an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) or second basic image by y / n times, that is, ½ times. First
When the interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th, that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure so far, the display timing of the first interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the first interpolation image can be determined. Next, in procedure 4, the target interpolation image is moved from the first interpolation image to the second interpolation image. That is, k is changed from 1 to 2, and the procedure returns to step 1.

When k = 2, in step 1, the display timing of the second interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the second interpolated image is a point in time when the period of the input image data is multiplied by k (m / n), that is, 1 time has elapsed since the first basic image was displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the second interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the second interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1), that is, the second basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 2 (n / m = 2), the kth image is a basic image, and the kth image
The +1 image is an interpolation image, the k + 2 image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is ½ times the cycle of input image data.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 2 (n / m = 2), the i-th (i is a positive integer)
Image data and the (i + 1) th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the kth image (k is a positive integer), the (k + 1) th image, the k + 2th image, ,
A driving method of a display device that sequentially displays at intervals of 1/2 times the cycle of input image data, wherein the k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 1-th image is
The image from the i-th image data to the (i + 1) -th image data is displayed according to the image data corresponding to a movement that is halved, and the k + 2 image is displayed according to the (i + 1) -th image data. It is characterized by that.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 2 (n / m = 2), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are input. The image data is sequentially input at a constant cycle, and the kth (k is a positive integer) image, the (k + 1) th image, and the (k + 2) th image are ½ times the cycle of the input image data. Driving the display device sequentially, wherein the k th image is displayed according to the i th image data, and the k + 1 th image is displayed.
Is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 2 image is displayed according to the i + 1-th image data.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 2, it is also called double speed drive or simply double speed drive.
For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 120 Hz (
120 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed twice for one input image. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
It brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect. This is related to the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to so-called dynamic capacitance, in which the capacitance of the liquid crystal element varies depending on the applied voltage. That is, by making the display frame rate larger than the input frame rate, it is possible to increase the frequency of the image data write operation, thereby reducing obstacles such as moving image tailing and afterimage caused by insufficient write voltage due to dynamic capacitance. be able to. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 120 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 120 Hz and setting the AC drive frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes.

When n = 3, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 3 (n = 3, m = 1 in FIG. 74), the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, in step 1, the display timing of the first interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolated image is the period of the input image data after the first basic image is displayed.
/ N) is the time when a period of 1/3 times has elapsed.

Next, in procedure 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, go to step 3.

In procedure 3, an image to be used as the first interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 1/3 is set to x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 1/3, x = 0 and y = 1. When the first interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the first interpolation image is the (x +
1) That is, an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) th or second basic image by y / n times, that is, 1/3 times. First
When the interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th, that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure so far, the display timing of the first interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the first interpolation image can be determined. Next, in procedure 4, the target interpolation image is moved from the first interpolation image to the second interpolation image. That is, k is changed from 1 to 2, and the procedure returns to step 1.

When k = 2, in step 1, the display timing of the second interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the second interpolated image is a point in time when a period in which the cycle of the input image data is k (m / n) times, that is, 2/3 times has elapsed since the first basic image is displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the second interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 2/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, go to step 3.

In procedure 3, an image to be used as the second interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 2/3 is set to x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 2/3, x = 0 and y = 2. When the second interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the second interpolation image is the (x +
1) That is, an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) or second basic image by y / n times, that is, 2/3 times, is used. Second
When the interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th, that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure so far, the display timing of the second interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the second interpolation image can be determined. Next, in procedure 4, the target interpolation image is moved from the second interpolation image to the third interpolation image. That is, k is changed from 2 to 3, and the procedure returns to step 1.

When k = 3, in step 1, the display timing of the third interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the third interpolated image is the time when the period of the input image data cycle k (m / n) times, that is, 1 time has elapsed since the display of the first basic image.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the third interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the third interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1), that is, the second basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 3 (n / m = 3), the kth image is the basic image, and the kth image
The +1 image is an interpolation image, the k + 2 image is an interpolation image, the k + 3 image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/3 times the cycle of input image data. To do.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3 (n / m = 3), the i-th (i is a positive integer)
Image data and the (i + 1) th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the kth image (k is a positive integer), the (k + 1) th image, the k + 2th image, , K
+3 images are sequentially displayed at intervals of 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data, wherein the kth image is displayed according to the i th image data, The k + 1-th image is a movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data.
The k + 2 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion that is 2/3 times the motion from the i-th image to the i + 1-th image. The k + 3th image is displayed according to the i + 1th image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 3 (n / m = 3), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are input. The image data is sequentially input at a constant cycle, and the k-th image (k is a positive integer), the k + 1-th image, the k + 2-th image, and the k + 3-th image are input in the cycle of the input image data. A display device driving method for sequentially displaying images at an interval of 1/3 times, wherein the kth image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 1-th image is the i-th image data. And the k + th
The second image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 3 image is displayed according to the i + 1-th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 3, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 3, there is an advantage that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 3.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3, it is also called triple speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 180 Hz (180 Hz drive). Then, for one input image, the image is continuously displayed three times. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, the AC drive of the liquid crystal display device and 180 Hz
It is also effective to combine driving. That is, the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device is set to 180H.
z, and the frequency of AC driving is an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 45 Hz, 9
By setting the frequency to 0 Hz, 180 Hz, 360 Hz, etc., flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes.

n = 3, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 3/2 (the place where n = 3 and m = 2 in FIG. 74).
In this case, the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, procedure 1
Then, the display timing of the 1st interpolation image with respect to a 1st basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolation image is the period of the input image data after the first basic image is displayed.
This is the time when (m / n) times, ie, 2/3 times, has elapsed.

Next, in procedure 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 2/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, go to step 3.

In procedure 3, an image to be used as the first interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 2/3 is set to x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 2/3, x = 0 and y = 2. When the first interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the first interpolation image is the (x +
1) That is, an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion of the image from the first basic image to the (x + 2) or second basic image by y / n times, that is, 2/3 times, is used. First
When the interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th, that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure so far, the display timing of the first interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the first interpolation image can be determined. Next, in procedure 4, the target interpolation image is moved from the first interpolation image to the second interpolation image. That is, k is changed from 1 to 2, and the procedure returns to step 1.

When k = 2, in step 1, the display timing of the second interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the second interpolated image is a point in time when a period in which the period of the input image data is k (m / n) times, that is, 4/3 times has elapsed since the first basic image is displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the second interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 4/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, go to step 3.

In procedure 3, an image to be used as the second interpolation image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 4/3 is set to x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 4/3, x = 1 and y = 1. When the second interpolation image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the second interpolation image is the (x +
1) An intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement of an image from the second basic image to the (x + 2) or third basic image by y / n times, that is, 1/3 times. Second
When the interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th, that is, the second basic image can be used.

By the procedure so far, the display timing of the second interpolation image and the image to be displayed as the second interpolation image can be determined. Next, in procedure 4, the target interpolation image is moved from the second interpolation image to the third interpolation image. That is, k is changed from 2 to 3, and the procedure returns to step 1.

When k = 3, in step 1, the display timing of the third interpolation image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the third interpolated image is the point in time when the period of the input image data period is multiplied by k (m / n), that is, twice after the first basic image is displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the third interpolation image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 2, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the third interpolation image, the (k (m / n) +1), that is, the third basic image is displayed, and the first step is ended.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 3/2 (n / m = 3/2), the kth image is a basic image, the k + 1th image is an interpolation image, and the k + 2 image is an interpolation image. The k + 3 image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 2/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3/2 (n / m = 3/2), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data, the (i + 1) -th image data, and the (i + 2) -th image data. Are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the k-th image (k is a positive integer) and the (k + 1) -th image data.
, The k + 2 image, and the k + 3 image are sequentially displayed at intervals of 2/3 times the cycle of the input image data, and the kth image is The i-th image data is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the (k + 1) -th image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement that is 2/3 times the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data. The k + 2 image is displayed in accordance with image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i + 1th image to the i + 2 image by 1/3, and the k + 3 image is the i + 2th image. It is displayed according to image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 3/2 (n / m = 3/2), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data, the i + 1-th image data, , The (i + 2) th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the kth image (k is a positive integer), the (k + 1) th image, the (k + 2) th image, and the (k + 3) th image data. A display device that sequentially displays images at intervals of 2/3 times the cycle of input image data, wherein the kth image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and The k + 1 image is displayed according to the i th image data, the k + 2 image is displayed according to the i + 1 image data, and the k + 3 image is displayed according to the i + 2 image data. It is characterized by being.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 3/2, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3/2. Further, when the conversion ratio is 3/2, the conversion ratio is 3 /
There is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case of larger than 2.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3/2, it is also called 3/2 speed drive or 1.5 times speed drive. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 90
Hz (90 Hz drive). Then, for two input images, the images are continuously displayed three times. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, compared to driving methods with a large driving frequency such as 120 Hz driving (double speed driving) and 180 Hz driving (triple speed driving), the operation frequency of the circuit for obtaining an intermediate image can be reduced by motion compensation, so that an inexpensive circuit can be used. Manufacturing cost and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, if the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so
It brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect against obstacles such as afterimages. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC driving and 90 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device is 90 Hz, the frequency of AC drive is an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 3
By setting the frequency to 0 Hz, 45 Hz, 90 Hz, 180 Hz, etc., flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes.

Although the details of the procedure for positive integers n and m other than the above are omitted, the conversion ratio can be set as an arbitrary rational number (n / m) by following the frame rate conversion procedure in the first step. it can. Of the combinations of positive integers n and m, the conversion ratio (n /
Combinations that can be reduced by m) can be handled in the same manner as the conversion ratio after reduction.

For example, when n = 4, m = 1, that is, when the conversion ratio (n / m) is 4 (location where n = 4, m = 1 in FIG. 74), the k-th image is the basic image, and the k + 1-th image. Is an interpolated image, the k-th image
The +2 image is an interpolation image, the k + 3 image is an interpolation image, the k + 4 image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is ¼ times the cycle of input image data. To do.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4 (n / m = 4), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are input image data. As the input image, the kth image (k is a positive integer), the (k + 1) th image, the (k + 2) th image, the (k + 3) th image, and the (k + 4) th image. A display device driving method for sequentially displaying data at intervals of 1/4 times a data cycle, wherein the k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 1-th image is the first image data. displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the image data of i to the i + 1-th image data by ¼.
The k + 2 image is displayed in accordance with image data corresponding to a motion that is 1/2 the motion from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data, and the k + 3 image is the i-th image data. That the movement from the image data to the (i + 1) -th image data is displayed according to the image data corresponding to the movement that is 3/4 times, and the (k + 4) -th image is displayed according to the (i + 1) -th image data. Features.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 4 (n / m = 4), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are input. The image data is sequentially input at a constant cycle, and the kth image (k is a positive integer), the k + 1th image, the k + 2th image, the k + 3th image, and the k + 4th image, A driving method of a display device that sequentially displays at intervals of 1/4 times the cycle of input image data, wherein the k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 1-th image is Displayed according to the i-th image data, the k + 2 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k-th image data.
The +3 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 4 image is displayed according to the i + 1-th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 4, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4. Further, when the conversion ratio is 4, there is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 4.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4, it is also referred to as quadruple speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 240 Hz (240 Hz drive). Then, four images are continuously displayed for one input image. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, 120
Compared to driving methods with a low driving frequency such as Hz driving (double speed driving) and 180 Hz driving (triple speed driving), an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation with higher accuracy can be used as an interpolation image. The movement can be smoothed, and the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 240 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 240 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes.

Further, for example, n = 4, m = 3, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 4/3 (n = n in FIG. 74).
4 and m = 3), the kth image is a basic image, the k + 1th image is an interpolation image, the k + 2 image is an interpolation image, and the k + 3 image is an interpolation image. Yes, k + 4
The image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4/3 (n / m = 4/3), the i th (
The image data of i is a positive integer), the (i + 1) th image data, the (i + 2) th image data, and the (i + 3) th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the k (k
Is a positive integer) image, (k + 1) th image, (k + 2) th image, (k + 3) th image, and kth image
+4 images are sequentially displayed at intervals of 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data, and the kth image is displayed according to the i th image data, The k + 1-th image has a movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data by 3
The k + 2 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion that is ½ times the motion from the i + 1th image to the i + 2 image. The k + 3 image is displayed from the i + 2 image to the i th image.
+3 is displayed according to the image data corresponding to the movement up to 1/4 of the movement up to the image,
The k + 4 image is displayed according to the i + 3 image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 4/3 (n / m = 4/3), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data, the (i + 1) -th image data, , The (i + 2) th image data and the (i + 3) th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the kth
(K is a positive integer) image, (k + 1) th image, (k + 2) th image, (k + 3) th image,
A display device driving method for sequentially displaying k + 4 images at intervals of 3/4 times the cycle of input image data, wherein the kth image is displayed according to the i-th image data. ,
The k + 1-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, the k + 2 image is displayed according to the i + 1-th image data, and the k + 3 image is added to the i + 2 image data. Therefore, the k + 4 image is displayed according to the i + 3 image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 4/3, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4/3. Further, when the conversion ratio is 4/3, the conversion ratio is 4 /
There is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case of larger than 3.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4/3, it is also referred to as 4/3 times speed driving or 1.25 times speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 8
0 Hz (80 Hz drive). Then, four images are continuously displayed for three input images. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, compared to driving methods with a large driving frequency such as 120 Hz driving (double speed driving) and 180 Hz driving (triple speed driving), the operation frequency of the circuit for obtaining an intermediate image can be reduced by motion compensation, so that an inexpensive circuit can be used. Manufacturing cost and power consumption can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 80 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device is 80 Hz, the frequency of AC driving is an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (for example,
By setting the frequency to 40 Hz, 80 Hz, 160 Hz, 240 Hz, etc., flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes.

Further, for example, n = 5, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 5 (n = 5 in FIG. 74).
m = 1), the kth image is a basic image, the k + 1th image is an interpolation image, the k + 2 image is an interpolation image, and the k + 3 image is an interpolation image. The k + 4 image is an interpolation image, the k + 5 image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5 (n / m = 5), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are input image data. Are sequentially input in a certain cycle, and are kth (k is a positive integer) image, k + 1th image, k + 2th image, k + 3th image, k + 4th image, and k + 5th image. Are sequentially displayed at intervals of 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data, wherein the k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 1-th image data is displayed. Is displayed in accordance with image data corresponding to a movement that is 1/5 times the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data, and the k + 2 image is the i-th image data. 2/5 from the first to the i + 1th image data The k + 3 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a motion obtained by multiplying the motion from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data by 3/5. And the k + 4 image is
The image from the i-th image data to the (i + 1) -th image data is displayed according to image data corresponding to a 4 / 4-fold movement, and the k + 5 image is displayed according to the (i + 1) -th image data. It is characterized by that.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 5 (n / m = 5), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are input. The image data is sequentially input at a constant cycle, and the kth image (k is a positive integer), the k + 1th image, the k + 2th image, the k + 3th image, the k + 4th image, and the k + 5th image. And the k-th image are sequentially displayed at intervals of 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.
Displayed according to the i-th image data, the k + 1-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, the k + 2 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 3 Are displayed according to the i-th image data, the k + 4 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 5 image is
It is displayed according to the (i + 1) th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 5, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 5, there is an advantage that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5, it is also referred to as 5 × speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 300 Hz (300 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed five times for one input image. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, 120
Compared to driving methods with a low driving frequency such as Hz driving (double speed driving) and 180 Hz driving (triple speed driving), an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation with higher accuracy can be used as an interpolation image. The movement can be smoothed, and the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC driving and 300 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 300 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 100 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes.

Further, for example, n = 5, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 5/2 (n = n in FIG. 74).
5 and m = 2), the kth image is a basic image, the k + 1th image is an interpolation image, the k + 2 image is an interpolation image, and the k + 3 image is an interpolation image. Yes, k + 4
The image is an interpolation image, the k + 5th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

More specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5/2 (n / m = 5/2), the i-th (
(i is a positive integer) image data, (i + 1) -th image data, and (i + 2) -th image data are sequentially input as input image data in a certain cycle, and the k-th (k is a positive integer) image. , The (k + 1) th image, the (k + 2) th image, the (k + 3) th image, the (k + 4) th image, and the (k + 5) th image are sequentially displayed at intervals of 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data. A display device driving method, wherein the k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k +
1 image is displayed in accordance with image data corresponding to a movement that is 2/5 times the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1-th image data, and the k + 2 image is the i-th image data.
Are displayed in accordance with image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the image data to the i + 1th image data by 4/5, and the k + 3 image is displayed from the i + 1th image data to the i + 2th image data. The k + 4 image is displayed according to 3/5 times the movement from the (i + 1) th image data to the (i + 2) th image data. The k + 5 image is displayed according to the i + 2 image data.

As another specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 5/2 (n / m = 5/2), the i-th (i is a positive integer) image data, the i + 1-th image data, , The (i + 2) th image data are sequentially input as input image data at a constant cycle, and the kth image (k is a positive integer), the (k + 1) th image, the (k + 2) th image, and the (k + 3) th image data. Image, k + 4th image, k + th
And a display device driving method for sequentially displaying the 5th image at an interval of 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data, wherein the kth image is displayed according to the ith image data, The k + 1-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and the k + 2 image is
Displayed according to the i-th image data, the k + 3 image is displayed according to the i + 1-th image data, the k + 4 image is displayed according to the i + 1-th image data, and the k + 5th Is displayed according to the i + 2th image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 5/2, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/2. Further, when the conversion ratio is 5/2, there is an advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5, it is also called 5/2 speed driving or 2.5 times speed driving. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 150H.
z (150 Hz drive). Then, for two input images, the images are continuously displayed five times. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. In particular, compared to a driving method with a low driving frequency such as 120 Hz driving (double speed driving), an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation with higher accuracy can be used as an interpolated image. It is possible to significantly improve the quality of moving images. Furthermore, compared with a driving method having a high driving frequency such as 180 Hz driving (three times speed driving), the operation frequency of a circuit for obtaining an intermediate image can be reduced by motion compensation, so that an inexpensive circuit can be used, and manufacturing cost and power consumption can be reduced. Can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC driving and 150 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device is set to 150 Hz.
And the frequency of AC driving is an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 50
Hz, 75 Hz, 150 Hz, etc.) can reduce flicker that appears due to AC driving to a level that is not perceived by human eyes.

Thus, the conversion ratio can be set as an arbitrary rational number (n / m) by variously setting the positive integers n and m. Detailed explanation is omitted, but in the range where n is 10 or less,
n = 1, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 1 (1 × speed driving, 60 Hz),
n = 2, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 2 (double speed drive, 120 Hz),
n = 3, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 3 (triple speed drive, 180 Hz),
n = 3, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 3/2 (3/2 double speed drive, 90 Hz),
n = 4, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 4 (4 × speed driving, 240 Hz),
n = 4, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 4/3 (4/3 double speed drive, 80 Hz),
n = 5, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/1 (5 × speed driving, 300 Hz),
n = 5, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/2 (5/2 double speed drive, 150 Hz),
n = 5, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/3 (5/3 double speed drive, 100 Hz),
n = 5, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/4 (5/4 double speed drive, 75 Hz),
n = 6, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6 (6 × speed driving, 360 Hz),
n = 6, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6/5 (6/5 double speed drive, 72 Hz),
n = 7, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7 (7 × speed drive, 420 Hz),
n = 7, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/2 (7/2 double speed drive, 210 Hz),
n = 7, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/3 (7/3 double speed drive, 140 Hz),
n = 7, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/4 (7/4 double speed drive, 105 Hz),
n = 7, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/5 (7/5 double speed drive, 84 Hz),
n = 7, m = 6, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/6 (7/6 double speed drive, 70 Hz),
n = 8, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8 (8 × speed drive, 480 Hz),
n = 8, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/3 (8/3 double speed drive, 160 Hz),
n = 8, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/5 (8/5 double speed drive, 96 Hz),
n = 8, m = 7, ie conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/7 (8/7 double speed drive, 68.6 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9 (9 × speed drive, 540 Hz),
n = 9, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/2 (9/2 double speed drive, 270 Hz),
n = 9, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/4 (9/4 double speed drive, 135 Hz),
n = 9, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/5 (9/5 double speed drive, 108 Hz),
n = 9, m = 7, ie conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/7 (9/7 double speed drive, 77.1 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 8, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/8 (9/8 double speed drive, 67.5 Hz)
,
n = 10, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10 (10 × speed driving, 600 Hz),
n = 10, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/3 (10/3 double speed drive, 200H
z),
n = 10, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/7 (10/7 double speed drive, 85.7)
Hz),
n = 10, m = 9, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/9 (10/9 double speed drive, 66.7)
Hz),
The above combinations are possible. The frequency notation is an example when the input frame rate is 60 Hz. For other input frame rates, the value obtained by integrating the respective conversion ratios with the input frame rate is the drive frequency.

In the case where n is an integer greater than 10, specific numbers of n and m are not mentioned, but the frame rate conversion procedure in the first step can be applied to various n and m. Is clear.

Note that the conversion ratio can be determined depending on how much of the displayed image includes an image that can be displayed without performing motion compensation in the input image data. Specifically, the smaller m is, the larger the ratio of images that can be displayed without performing motion compensation on the input image data. If the frequency of motion compensation is low, the frequency of operation of the circuit that performs motion compensation can be reduced, so that power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, motion compensation can accurately reflect images that contain errors (image motion is accurately reflected). The possibility that an intermediate image) is not created can be reduced, and the image quality can be improved. As such a conversion ratio, in the range where n is 10 or less, for example, 1, 2, 3, 3/2, 4,
5,5 / 2,6,7,7 / 2,8,9,9 / 2,10. When such a conversion ratio is used, particularly when an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation is used as an interpolated image, the image quality can be increased and the power consumption can be reduced. This is because when m is 2, the number of images that can be displayed without performing motion compensation on the input image data is relatively large (there is only ½ of the total number of input image data). ,
This is because the frequency of performing motion compensation decreases. Furthermore, when m is 1, the number of images that can be displayed without performing motion compensation on the input image data is large (equal to the total number of input image data), and motion compensation is not performed. is there. On the other hand, as m is larger, an intermediate image created by highly accurate motion compensation can be used, so that there is an advantage that the motion of the image can be made smoother.

When the display device is a liquid crystal display device, the conversion ratio can be determined according to the response time of the liquid crystal element. Here, the response time of the liquid crystal element is the time from when the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element is changed until the liquid crystal element responds. In the case where the response time of the liquid crystal element varies depending on the amount of change in voltage applied to the liquid crystal element, the average value of response times in a plurality of typical voltage changes can be obtained. Alternatively, the response time of the liquid crystal element is MPRT (Movin
g Picture Response Time).
The conversion ratio can be determined by frame rate conversion so that the image display cycle is close to the response time of the liquid crystal element. Specifically, the response time of the liquid crystal element is preferably a time from a value obtained by integrating the cycle of the input image data and the reciprocal of the conversion ratio to a value about half of this value. By doing so, it is possible to obtain an image display cycle that matches the response time of the liquid crystal element, so that the image quality can be improved. For example, when the response time of the liquid crystal element is 4 milliseconds or more and 8 milliseconds or less, double speed driving (120 Hz driving) can be performed. This is because the image display cycle of 120 Hz drive is about 8 milliseconds, and half of the image display cycle of 120 Hz drive is about 4 milliseconds. Similarly, for example, in the case where the response time of the liquid crystal element is 3 milliseconds or more and 6 milliseconds or less, the triple-speed driving (180 Hz driving) can be performed, and the response time of the liquid crystal element is 5
In the case of milliseconds to 11 milliseconds, 1.5 times speed driving (90 Hz driving) can be performed, and in the case where the response time of the liquid crystal element is 2 milliseconds to 4 milliseconds, quadruple speed driving (240 Hz driving) When the response time of the liquid crystal element is 6 milliseconds or more and 12 milliseconds or less, 1
. 25-times speed driving (80 Hz driving) can be performed. The same applies to other drive frequencies.

Note that the conversion ratio can also be determined by the trade-off between the quality of moving images, power consumption, and manufacturing cost. That is, increasing the conversion ratio can improve the quality of the moving image, while reducing the conversion ratio can reduce power consumption and manufacturing cost. That is, each conversion ratio in the range where n is 10 or less has the following advantages.

When the conversion ratio is 1, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 1, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 1. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about one time the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about ½ times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 3. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 3/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 3/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 2/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 4. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 4/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 4/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 2/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5/4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5/4. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 4/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 6, the moving image quality can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 6, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 6. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/6 times the period of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 6/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 6/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 6/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/6 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 2/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/4. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 4/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/6, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/6, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/6. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 6/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8/7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8/7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8/7. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 7/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 2/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/4. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 4/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/5. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/7. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 7/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/8, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/8, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/8. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 8/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

A conversion ratio of 10 can improve the quality of the video compared to a conversion ratio of less than 10,
The power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10. Furthermore, m
Therefore, high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/10 times the cycle of the input image data,
The image quality can be improved.

When the conversion ratio is 10/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 10/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10/3. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 10/7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 10/7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10/7. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 7/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 10/9, the quality of the moving image can be improved compared to the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 10/9, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10/9. Furthermore, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 9/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

It is obvious that each conversion ratio in the range where n is larger than 10 has the same advantage.

Next, as a second step, an image according to the input image data or each image whose frame rate is converted to an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times in the first step (referred to as an original image). ), A method of creating a plurality of different images (sub-images) and presenting the plurality of sub-images continuously in time will be described. In this way, even though a plurality of images are actually presented, it is possible to make human eyes perceive that one original image is displayed.

Here, among the sub-images created from one original image, the sub-image displayed first is referred to as a first sub-image. Here, it is assumed that the timing for displaying the first sub-image is the same as the timing for displaying the original image determined in the first step. on the other hand,
The sub image displayed after that will be referred to as a second sub image. The timing for displaying the second sub-image can be arbitrarily determined regardless of the timing for displaying the original image determined in the first step. Note that the image to be actually displayed is an image created from the original image by the method in the second step. Various images can be used as the original image for creating the sub-image. The number of sub-images is not limited to two and may be larger than two. In the second step, the number of sub-images is expressed as J (J is an integer of 2 or more). At this time, the sub-image displayed at the same timing as the original image determined in the first step is called the first sub-image, and the sub-image displayed subsequently is displayed. The second sub-image, the third sub-image to the J-th sub-image are referred to according to the order in which they are arranged.

There are various methods for creating a plurality of sub-images from one original image. The main methods include the following methods. One is a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image. One is a method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images. One is a method of using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image.

Here, the method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images can be further divided into a plurality of methods. The main methods are as follows. One is a method in which at least one sub-image is a black image (referred to as a black insertion method). One is
When the brightness of the original image is divided into a plurality of ranges and the brightness in the range is controlled, a method using only one sub-image among all the sub-images (referred to as a time-division gradation control method). ). One is a method in which one sub-image is a bright image in which the gamma value of the original image is changed and the other sub-image is a dark image in which the gamma value of the original image is changed (referred to as a gamma complement method). ).

Each of the methods listed above is briefly described. The method of using the original image as it is as the sub image uses the original image as it is as the first sub image. Further, the original image is used as it is as the second sub-image. When this method is used, a circuit for newly creating a sub-image is not operated or it is not necessary to use the circuit itself, so that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. In particular, in a liquid crystal display device, the first
In this step, it is preferable to use this method after performing frame rate conversion using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as an interpolated image. This is because the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation is used as an interpolated image, and the same image is repeatedly displayed while smoothing the motion of the moving image, resulting in a lack of writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance of the liquid crystal element. This is because obstacles such as tailing and afterimage can be reduced.

Next, in the method for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, a method for setting the brightness of the image and the length of the period during which the sub-image is displayed will be described in detail. J represents the number of sub-images and is an integer of 2 or more. Lowercase j is distinct from uppercase J. Let j be an integer from 1 to J.
In normal hold driving, the pixel brightness is L, the period of the original image data is T,
The brightness L _j of the pixels in the sub-image of the _j, the length T _j of the period in which the sub image is displayed in the first _j, and when taking a product for L _j and T _j, from which the j = 1 Total up to j = J (L
₁ T ₁ + L ₂ T ₂ + ˜ + L _J T _J ) is preferably equal to the product of L and T (LT) (the brightness is unchanged). Moreover, the sum of _{T j,} j = 1 through j = J (T
₁ + T ₂ + to + T _J ) is preferably equal to T (the display cycle of the original image is maintained). Here, the fact that the brightness remains unchanged and the display cycle of the original image is maintained is referred to as a sub-image distribution condition.

Of the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the black insertion method is a method in which at least one sub-image is a black image. By doing so, since the display method can be made to be an impulse type in a pseudo manner, it is possible to prevent the quality of the moving image from being deteriorated due to the hold type display method. Here, it is preferable to follow the sub-image distribution condition in order to prevent the brightness of the display image from being reduced due to the insertion of the black image. However, if the brightness of the display image is acceptable (such as dark surroundings), or if the user is set to allow the brightness of the display image to be reduced, the sub image It is not necessary to follow the distribution conditions. For example, one sub image may be the same as the original image, and the other sub image may be a black image. In this case, power consumption can be reduced compared to when the sub image distribution condition is followed. Furthermore, in a liquid crystal display device, when one sub-image is set to increase the overall brightness of the original image without limiting the maximum brightness, the brightness of the backlight is increased. Thus, the sub-image distribution condition may be realized. In this case, since the sub image distribution condition can be satisfied without controlling the voltage value written to the pixel, the operation of the image processing circuit can be omitted and the power consumption can be reduced.

The black insertion method is characterized in that L _{j of} all pixels is set to 0 in any one sub-image. By doing so, since the display method can be made to be an impulse type in a pseudo manner, it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the quality of the moving image due to the hold type display method.

Of the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the time-division gradation control method divides the brightness of the original image into a plurality of ranges, and controls the brightness in the range. This is a method that uses only one of the sub-images. By doing so, the display method can be made to be a pseudo impulse type without lowering the brightness, so that the deterioration of the quality of the moving image due to the hold method being the display method can be prevented.

As a method of dividing the brightness of the original image into a plurality of ranges, the maximum brightness value (L _max )
There is a method of dividing by the number of sub-images. For example, in a display device in which the brightness from 0 to L _max can be adjusted in 256 steps (gradation 0 to gradation 255), when the number of sub-images is 2, gradation 0 to gradation 127 Is displayed, the brightness of one sub-image is adjusted in the range of gradation 0 to gradation 255, while the brightness of the other sub-image is set to gradation 0,
When displaying gradations 128 to 255, the brightness of one sub-image is set to gradation 255.
On the other hand, the brightness of the other sub-image is adjusted in the range of gradation 0 to gradation 255. By doing so, it can be perceived by human eyes as if the original image was displayed, and it can be made to be a pseudo impulse type, so that the quality of the moving image is deteriorated due to the hold type. Can be prevented. Note that the number of sub-images may be greater than two. For example, when the number of sub-images is 3, the brightness level of the original image (gradation 0 to gradation 2
55) is divided into three. Depending on the number of brightness levels of the original image and the number of sub-images, the number of brightness levels may not be divisible by the number of sub-images, but they are included in the respective brightness ranges after division. Even if the number of brightness levels is not exactly the same, they may be appropriately distributed.

Note that the time-division gradation control method is also preferable because when the sub-image distribution condition is satisfied, the brightness is not reduced and the same image as the original image can be displayed.

Of the methods that distribute the brightness of the original image to multiple sub-images, the gamma complement method uses one sub-image as a bright image with the gamma characteristics of the original image changed, and the other sub-image as the gamma of the original image. This is a method of obtaining a dark image with changed characteristics. By doing so, the display method can be made to be a pseudo impulse type without lowering the brightness, so that the deterioration of the quality of the moving image due to the hold method being the display method can be prevented. Here, the gamma characteristic is the degree of brightness with respect to the brightness level (gradation). Usually, the gamma characteristic is adjusted to be close to linear. This is because a smooth gradation can be obtained if the change in brightness is proportional to the gradation that is the stage of brightness. In the gamma interpolation method, the gamma characteristic of one of the sub-images is shifted from the linearity, and is adjusted so that it is brighter than the linearity in the intermediate brightness (halftone) region (the halftone becomes a brighter image than the original). )
. Then, the gamma characteristic of the other sub-image is also shifted from the linearity, and is adjusted so as to be darker than the linear in the same halftone region (the halftone becomes an image darker than the original). Here, the amount by which one sub-image is lighter than linear and the amount by which the other sub-image is darker than linear are
It is preferable to make them approximately equal for all gradations. By doing so, it can be perceived by the human eye as if the original image was displayed, and deterioration in the quality of the moving image due to the hold type can be prevented. Note that the number of sub-images may be greater than two. For example, if the number of sub-images is 3, if the gamma characteristics of each of the three sub-images are adjusted so that the total amount from linear to bright and the total amount from linear to dark are approximately equal Good.

Note that the gamma complementing method is also preferable because it can display the same image as the original image without lowering brightness by satisfying the sub-image distribution condition. further,
In the gamma complement method, since the change in the brightness L _j of each sub-image with respect to the gradation follows the gamma curve, each sub-image can display the gradation smoothly by itself,
Finally, it has the advantage of improving the quality of the image perceived by the human eye.

The method of using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub image is a method in which one sub image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation from the preceding and succeeding images. By doing so, the motion of the image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved.

Next, the relationship between the timing for displaying the sub image and the method for creating the sub image will be described. The timing for displaying the first sub-image is the same as the timing for displaying the original image determined in the first step, and the timing for displaying the second sub-image is the same as the timing determined in the first step. Although it can be arbitrarily determined regardless of the timing of displaying the image, the sub image itself may be changed according to the timing of displaying the second sub image. In this way, even when the timing for displaying the second sub-image is changed variously, it can be perceived by the human eye as if the original image was displayed. Specifically, if the timing for displaying the second sub-image is advanced, the first sub-image is brightened and the second
The sub-image can be made darker. Furthermore, when the timing for displaying the second sub-image is delayed, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. This is because the brightness perceived by human eyes varies depending on the length of the period during which an image is displayed. More specifically, the brightness perceived by the human eye becomes brighter as the image display period is longer and darker as the image display period is shorter. That is, by increasing the timing for displaying the second sub-image, the length of the period for displaying the first sub-image is shortened, and the length of the period for displaying the second sub-image is increased. As it is, the first sub-image is dark and the second sub-image is bright and perceived by human eyes. As a result, an image different from the original image is perceived by the human eye.
The sub-image can be brighter and the second sub-image can be darker. Similarly, the second
By delaying the timing for displaying the second sub-image, the length of the period for displaying the first sub-image becomes longer, and the length of the period for displaying the second sub-image becomes shorter. The sub-image can be darker and the second sub-image can be brighter.

Based on the above description, the processing procedure in the second step is shown below.
As procedure 1, a method for creating a plurality of sub-images from one original image is determined. More specifically, a method of creating a plurality of sub-images includes a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image, a method of distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images, and an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image. Can be selected from the methods used as
As procedure 2, the number J of sub-images is determined. J is an integer of 2 or more.
As procedure 3, the brightness L _j of the pixel in the j-th sub image and the length T _{j of the} period during which the j-th sub image is displayed are determined according to the method selected in procedure 1. According to the procedure 3, the length of the period during which each sub image is displayed and the brightness of each pixel included in each sub image are specifically determined.
As the procedure 4, the original image is processed according to the items determined in the procedures 1 to 3 and actually displayed.
In step 5, the target original image is moved to the next original image. And it returns to the procedure 1.

Note that the mechanism for executing the procedure in the second step may be implemented in the apparatus, or may be predetermined in the apparatus design stage. If a mechanism for executing the procedure in the second step is mounted on the apparatus, it is possible to switch the driving method so that the optimum operation according to the situation is performed. The situation here refers to the contents of the image data, the environment inside and outside the device (temperature, humidity, atmospheric pressure, light, sound, magnetic field, electric field, radiation dose,
Altitude, acceleration, moving speed, etc.), user settings, software version, etc. On the other hand, if the mechanism for executing the procedure in the second step is determined in advance at the device design stage, an optimum driving circuit for each driving method can be used, and the mechanism is determined. As a result, a reduction in manufacturing cost due to mass production effects can be expected.

Next, various driving methods determined by the procedure in the second step will be described in detail by specifically showing the values of n and m in the first step.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, when a method using the original image as it is as a sub-image is selected, the driving method is as follows.

The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are sequentially prepared with a constant period T, and the period T is J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-images. Divided into display periods,
The i-th image data is data that allows each of a plurality of pixels to have a unique brightness L, and each of the j-th sub-images (j is an integer of 1 to J) has a unique brightness. L
_j is a juxtaposed image, and is displayed during the j-th sub-image display period T _j , and the L, T, L _j , and T _j are sub-image distribution. A driving method of a display device that satisfies a condition, wherein the brightness L _j of each pixel included in the j-th sub-image is L _j = L for each pixel in all _j. To do. Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared at a fixed period T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the driving method.

When the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like that.
In FIG. 75, the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis represents various n and m used in the first step.

For example, in the first step, when n = 1, m = 1, that is, when the conversion ratio (n / m) is 1, the driving method as shown in the location of n = 1, m = 1 in FIG. Become. At this time, the display frame rate is twice the frame rate of the input image data (double speed driving). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 120 Hz (120 Hz driving). Then, an image is continuously displayed twice for one input image data. Here, in the case of the double speed drive, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than the double speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where it is larger than the double speed. Furthermore, in the procedure 1 of the second step,
By selecting a method that uses the original image as a sub-image as it is, it is possible to stop the operation of a circuit that creates an intermediate image by motion compensation, or to omit the circuit itself from the device. Can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 120 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device is 120 Hz, the AC drive frequency is an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz).
, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about ½ times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 2, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 2, the drive method is as shown in FIG. 75 where n = 2 and m = 1. At this time, the display frame rate is four times (four times speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 240 Hz (240 Hz drive). Then, four images are continuously displayed for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of the quadruple speed drive, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than the quadruple speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than the quadruple speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
Since the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, it brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 240 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 240 Hz and setting the AC drive frequency to an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), flicker that appears due to AC drive is It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 3, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 3, the drive method is as shown in FIG. 75 where n = 3 and m = 1. At this time, the display frame rate is 6 times (6 × speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 360 Hz (360 Hz drive). Then, six images are continuously displayed for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 6 × speed driving, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is lower than 6 × speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is higher than 6 × speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
Since the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, it brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. It is also effective to combine AC driving and 360 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 360 Hz and setting the frequency of AC driving to an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 180 Hz, etc.), flicker that appears due to AC driving is It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/6 times the period of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 3, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 3/2, the driving method is as shown at n = 3 and m = 2 in FIG.
At this time, the display frame rate is three times (three times speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 180 Hz (180 Hz drive). An image is displayed three times in succession for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Where 3
In the double speed drive, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than the triple speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than the triple speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 180 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 180 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 180 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 4, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 4, the driving method is as shown at n = 4 and m = 1 in FIG. At this time, the display frame rate is 8 times (8 times speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, when the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 480 Hz (480 Hz drive). Then, an image is continuously displayed 8 times for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 8 × speed driving, the quality of moving images can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is lower than 8 × speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is higher than 8 × speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Furthermore, when the display device is an active matrix liquid crystal display device,
Since the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, it brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is effective to combine the AC drive and 480 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 480 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 4, m = 3, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 4/3, the driving method is as shown in FIG. 75 where n = 4 and m = 3.
At this time, the display frame rate is 8/3 times the frame rate of the input image data (8
/ 3 times speed driving). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 160 Hz (160 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed eight times for the three input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 8/3 times speed driving, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than 8/3 times speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where it is larger than 8/3 times speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage.
Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC driving and 160 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 160 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 40 Hz, 80 Hz, 160 Hz, 320 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 5, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 5, the drive method is as shown in FIG. 75 where n = 5 and m = 1. At this time, the display frame rate is 10 times (10 times speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 600 Hz (600 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed ten times for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. here,
In the case of 10 × speed driving, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than 10 × speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where it is larger than 10 × speed. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. It is also effective to combine the AC drive and 600 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 600 Hz and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz, etc.), It can be reduced to a level not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 5, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m
) Is 5/2, the driving method is as shown in FIG. 75 where n = 5 and m = 2.
At this time, the display frame rate is 5 times (5 times speed driving) the frame rate of the input image data. Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 300 Hz (300 Hz drive). Then, the image is continuously displayed five times for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Here, in the case of 5 × speed driving, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is lower than 5 × speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is higher than 5 × speed. In addition, the second
In step 1 of step 1, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus. Power consumption and device manufacturing costs can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, it is also effective to combine AC driving and 300 Hz driving of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device is 300 Hz, the AC driving frequency is an integer multiple or a fraction thereof (
For example, by setting the frequency to 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 100 Hz, etc., flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

As described above, in the procedure 1 in the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub image is selected,
In the procedure 2 in the second step, the number of sub-images is determined to be 2,
In the procedure 3 in the second step, if it is determined that T1 = T2 = T / 2,
Since the display frame rate can be further doubled with respect to the frame rate conversion of the conversion ratio determined by the values of n and m in this step, the quality of the moving image can be further improved. Furthermore, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the display frame rate is lower than the display frame rate, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the display frame rate is higher than the display frame rate.
Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. further,
By increasing the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof, flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes. Furthermore, the response time of the liquid crystal element is the period of the input image data (
By applying to a liquid crystal display device that is about 1 / (twice the conversion ratio)), the image quality can be improved.

Although detailed description is omitted, it is clear that the same advantages can be obtained in cases other than the conversion ratio raised above. For example, in the range where n is 10 or less, in addition to those listed above,
n = 5, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/3 (10/3 double speed drive, 200 Hz)
,
n = 5, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/4 (5/2 double speed drive, 150 Hz),
n = 6, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6 (12 × speed drive, 720 Hz),
n = 6, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6/5 (12/5 double speed drive, 144 Hz)
,
n = 7, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7 (14 × speed drive, 840 Hz),
n = 7, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/2 (7-times speed drive, 420 Hz),
n = 7, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/3 (14/3 double speed drive, 280 Hz)
,
n = 7, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/4 (7/2 double speed drive, 210 Hz),
n = 7, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/5 (14/5 double speed drive, 168 Hz)
,
n = 7, m = 6, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/6 (7/3 double speed drive, 140 Hz),
n = 8, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8 (16 × speed driving, 960 Hz),
n = 8, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/3 (16/3 double speed drive, 320 Hz)
,
n = 8, m = 5, ie conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/5 (16/5 double speed drive, 192 Hz)
,
n = 8, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/7 (16/7 double speed drive, 137 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9 (18 × speed driving, 1080 Hz),
n = 9, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/2 (9-times speed driving, 540 Hz),
n = 9, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/4 (9/2 double speed drive, 270 Hz),
n = 9, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/5 (18/5 double speed drive, 216 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 7, ie conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/7 (18/7 double speed drive, 154 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 8, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/8 (9/4 double speed drive, 135 Hz),
n = 10, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10 (20 × speed drive, 1200 Hz),
n = 10, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/3 (20/3 double speed drive, 400H
z),
n = 10, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/7 (20/7 double speed drive, 171H
z),
n = 10, m = 9, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/9 (20/9 double speed drive, 133H
z),
The above combinations are possible. The frequency notation is an example when the input frame rate is 60 Hz. For other input frame rates, a value obtained by integrating twice the respective conversion ratios with the input frame rate is the drive frequency.

In the case where n is an integer greater than 10, specific numbers of n and m are not mentioned, but it is clear that the procedure in the second step can be applied to various n and m. .

When J = 2, it is particularly effective if the conversion ratio in the first step is greater than 2. This is because if the number of sub-images is relatively small in the second step, such as J = 2, the conversion ratio in the first step can be increased accordingly. Such conversion ratio is 3, 4, 5, 5/2, 6, 7 in the range where n is 10 or less.
7/2, 7/3, 8, 8/3, 9, 9/2, 9/4, 10, 10/3.
When the display frame rate after the first step is such a value, an advantage of reducing the number of sub-images in the second step (reducing power consumption and manufacturing cost, etc.) by setting J = 3 or more. In addition, it is possible to achieve both the advantages (high quality of moving images, reduction of flicker, etc.) due to the large final display frame rate.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where T ₂ = T / 2 has been described has been described, it is obvious that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T ₁ <T ₂ is determined, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined that T ₁ > T ₂ in the procedure 3 in step S1, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. However, when the method of using the original image as it is as the sub image is selected in the procedure 1 as in the above driving method, it may be displayed as it is without changing the brightness of the sub image. This is because in this case, since the images used as the sub images are the same, the original image can be displayed properly regardless of the display timing of the sub images.

Further, in the procedure 2, it is obvious that the number J of sub-images may be determined to a value other than 2 instead of 2. In this case, the display frame rate can be further increased to J times the frame rate conversion of the conversion ratio determined by the values of n and m in the first step, so that the quality of the moving image is further improved. Is possible. Furthermore, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the display frame rate is lower than the display frame rate, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the display frame rate is higher than the display frame rate. Further, in the procedure 1 of the second step, the method of using the original image as it is as the sub-image is selected, so that the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and device manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, by increasing the driving frequency of the liquid crystal display device and setting the AC driving frequency to an integral multiple or a fraction thereof, flickers that appear due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes. it can. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about (1 / (J times the conversion ratio)) times the cycle of the input image data.

For example, when J = 3, the quality of the moving image can be improved more than when the number of sub-images is smaller than 3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the number of sub-images is larger than 3. Have advantages. Further, the response time of the liquid crystal element is (1 of the cycle of the input image data.
By applying to a liquid crystal display device that is approximately / (3 times the conversion ratio)) times, the image quality can be improved.

Furthermore, for example, when J = 4, the quality of the moving image can be improved particularly when the number of sub-images is smaller than 4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost are reduced as compared with the case where the number of sub-images is larger than 4. It has the advantage of being able to. Furthermore, by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1 / (4 times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data, the image quality can be improved.

Furthermore, for example, when J = 5, the quality of the moving image can be improved particularly when the number of sub-images is smaller than 5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost are reduced as compared with the case where the number of sub-images is larger than 5. It has the advantage that it can. Furthermore, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is approximately 1 / (5 times the conversion ratio) times the cycle of the input image data.

Furthermore, even if J is other than those listed above, it has similar advantages.

When J = 3 or more, the conversion ratio in the first step can take various values. In particular, when the conversion ratio in the first step is relatively small (2 or less), J = 3
The above is effective. This is because if the display frame rate after the first step is relatively small, J can be increased by that amount in the second step. Such a conversion ratio is 1, 2, 3/2, 4/3, in the range where n is 10 or less.
5/3, 5/4, 6/5, 7/4, 7/5, 7/6, 8/7, 9/5, 9/7, 9/8,
10/7, 10/9. Of these, the conversion ratio is 1, 2, 3/2, 4/3, 5 /
The case of 3, 5/4 is illustrated in FIG. As described above, when the display frame rate after the first step is a relatively small value, by setting J = 3 or more, the advantage of the small display frame rate in the first step (the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced). Reduction) and the advantages (high quality of moving images, reduction of flicker, etc.) due to a large final display frame rate can be achieved at the same time.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, when the black insertion method is selected among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images, the driving method is as follows.

The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are sequentially prepared with a constant period T, and the period T is J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-images. Divided into display periods,
The i-th image data is data that allows each of a plurality of pixels to have a unique brightness L, and each of the j-th sub-images (j is an integer of 1 to J) has a unique brightness. L
_j is a juxtaposed image, and is displayed during the j-th sub-image display period T _j , and the L, T, L _j , and T _j A driving method of a display device that satisfies the condition, wherein at least one j, the brightness L _{j of} all pixels included in the j-th sub-image is L _j = 0. Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared at a fixed period T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the driving method.

It should be noted that the above driving method can be implemented in combination with respect to various n and m used in the first step.

When the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like that. Since the characteristics and advantages of the driving method (display timings at various n and m) shown in FIG. 75 have already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but in procedure 1 in the second step, the brightness of the original image It is clear that the same advantage is obtained when the black insertion method is selected among the methods for distributing the image to a plurality of sub-images. For example, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved.
Furthermore, when the display frame rate is high, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and when the display frame rate is low, power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes.

Among the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images in the procedure 1 of the second step, a characteristic advantage of selecting the black insertion method is that an intermediate image is created by motion compensation. Since the operation of the circuit can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device,
The power consumption and the manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced. Furthermore, since the impulse-type display method can be made pseudo regardless of the gradation value included in the image data, the quality of the moving image can be improved.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where T ₂ = T / 2 has been described has been described, it is obvious that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T ₁ <T ₂ is determined, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined that T ₁ > T ₂ in the procedure 3 in step S1, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. However, when the black insertion method is selected in the method of distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images in the procedure 1 as in the above driving method, the brightness of the sub-image is not changed. Alternatively, it may be displayed as it is. because,
In this case, if the brightness of the sub-image is not changed, the entire brightness of the original image is only darkened and displayed. In other words, by actively using this method for controlling the brightness of the display device, the brightness can be controlled while improving the quality of the moving image.

Further, in the procedure 2, it is obvious that the number J of sub-images may be determined to a value other than 2 instead of 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, a detailed description is omitted here. Of the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in the procedure 1 in the second step, the black insertion method is used. Obviously, the selected case has similar advantages. For example, the response time of the liquid crystal element is 1 / (J times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data
) The image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device of about double.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, when the time-division gradation control method is selected from among the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images, the driving method is as follows.

The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are sequentially prepared with a constant period T, and the period T is J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-images. Divided into display periods,
The i-th image data is data that allows each of a plurality of pixels to have a unique brightness L. The unique brightness L has a maximum value L _max , and the j-th (j is 1). The sub-image of (an integer less than or equal to J) is an image that is formed by juxtaposing a plurality of pixels each having a unique brightness L _j , and is displayed only during the j-th sub-image display period T _j. , T, L _j , T _j , a driving method of a display device that satisfies a sub-image distribution condition,
In displaying the inherent brightness L, from (j−1) × L _max / J to J × L _max
The adjustment of the brightness in the brightness range of / J is performed by adjusting the brightness in only one sub-image display period among the J sub-image display periods. Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared at a fixed period T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the driving method.

It should be noted that the above driving method can be implemented in combination with respect to various n and m used in the first step.

When the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like that.
Since the characteristics and advantages of the driving method (display timings at various n and m) shown in FIG. 75 have already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but in procedure 1 in the second step, the brightness of the original image It is clear that the same advantage is obtained when the time-division gradation control method is selected among the methods for distributing the image to a plurality of sub-images. For example, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display frame rate is high, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and when the display frame rate is low, power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes.

Among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images in the procedure 1 of the second step, the characteristic advantage of selecting the time-division gradation control method is that the intermediate image is obtained by motion compensation. Since the operation of the circuit for generating the circuit can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, the power consumption and the manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced. further,
Since a pseudo impulse display method can be used, the quality of moving images can be improved and the brightness of the display device does not decrease, so that power consumption can be further reduced.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where T ₂ = T / 2 has been described has been described, it is obvious that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T ₁ <T ₂ is determined, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined that T ₁ > T ₂ in the procedure 3 in step S1, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved.

Further, in the procedure 2, it is obvious that the number J of sub-images may be determined to a value other than 2 instead of 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, detailed description is omitted here, but among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in step 1 in the second step, time-division gradation Obviously, when the control method is selected, it has similar advantages. For example, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1 / (J times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, when the gamma complement method is selected among the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images, the driving method is as follows.

The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are sequentially prepared with a constant period T, and the period T is J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-images. Divided into display periods,
The i-th image data is data that allows each of a plurality of pixels to have a unique brightness L, and each of the j-th sub-images (j is an integer of 1 to J) has a unique brightness. L
_j is a juxtaposed image, and is displayed during the j-th sub-image display period T _j , and the L, T, L _j , and T _j are divided into sub-image distributions. A driving method of a display device that satisfies the conditions, and in each sub-image, the brightness change characteristic with respect to gradation is shifted from linear, and the total amount of brightness shifted from linear to brighter is calculated from the linearity. The total amount of brightness shifted to the darker side is approximately equal in all gradations. Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared at a fixed period T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the driving method.

It should be noted that the above driving method can be implemented in combination with respect to various n and m used in the first step.

When the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. It will be like that.
Since the features and advantages of the driving method (display timings at various n and m) shown in FIG. 75 have already been described, detailed description will be omitted here, but in step 1 in the second step, the brightness of the original image It is clear that the same advantage is obtained when the gamma complement method is selected among the methods for distributing the image to a plurality of sub-images. For example, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, when the display frame rate is high, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and when the display frame rate is low, power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against a failure such as a trailing image or an afterimage. Furthermore, flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a level that is not perceived by human eyes.

In the procedure 1 of the second step, among the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, a characteristic advantage of selecting the gamma complement method is that an intermediate image is created by motion compensation. Since the operation of the circuit can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, the power consumption and the manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced. Furthermore, since the impulse-type display method can be made pseudo regardless of the gradation value included in the image data, the quality of the moving image can be improved. Further, the sub-image may be obtained by directly gamma-converting the image data. In this case, there is an advantage that the gamma value can be controlled variously depending on the magnitude of the motion of the moving image. Further, the image data may not be directly gamma-converted, and the sub-image with the changed gamma value may be obtained by changing the reference voltage of the digital-analog converter circuit (DAC). In this case, since the image data is not directly gamma-converted, a circuit for performing gamma conversion can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, so that power consumption and manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced. . Further, in the gamma complement method, since the change in the brightness L _j of each sub-image with respect to the gradation follows the gamma curve, each sub-image can display the gradation smoothly by itself, and finally the human The image quality perceived by the eyes is also improved.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where T ₂ = T / 2 has been described has been described, it is obvious that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T ₁ <T ₂ is determined, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined that T ₁ > T ₂ in the procedure 3 in step S1, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. As in the above driving method, the procedure 1
In the method of distributing the brightness of the original image to the plurality of sub-images, when the gamma method is selected, the gamma value may be changed when the brightness of the sub-image is changed. That is, the gamma value may be determined according to the display timing of the second sub-image. In this way, a circuit that changes the brightness of the entire image can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, so that power consumption and manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced.

Further, in the procedure 2, it is obvious that the number J of sub-images may be determined to a value other than 2 instead of 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, detailed description is omitted here, but among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in step 1 in the second step, time-division gradation Obviously, when the control method is selected, it has similar advantages. For example, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1 / (J times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described in detail.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, a method of using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image is selected. In the procedure 2 in the second step, the number of sub-images is 2
And in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T1 = T2 = T / 2 is determined, the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step is as follows.

The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and the (i + 1) -th image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T, and the k-th (k is a positive integer) image, the k + 1-th image, , The k + 2 image sequentially at intervals of ½ times the period of the original image data, wherein the kth image is displayed according to the i th image data. And the k + 1 th image is
The image from the i-th image data to the (i + 1) -th image data is displayed according to the image data corresponding to a movement that is halved, and the k + 2 image is displayed according to the (i + 1) -th image data. It is characterized by that. Here, the original image data created in the first step can be used as the image data sequentially prepared at a fixed period T. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the driving method.

It should be noted that the above driving method can be implemented in combination with respect to various n and m used in the first step.

In the procedure 1 in the second step, the characteristic advantage of selecting the method using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image is that the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation in the procedure in the first step is selected. When the interpolated image is used, the method for obtaining the intermediate image used in the first step can be used as it is in the second step. That is, a circuit for obtaining an intermediate image by motion compensation can be used not only in the first step but also in the second step, so that the circuit can be used effectively and the processing efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the movement of the image can be further smoothed, the quality of the moving image can be further improved.

Here, in step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined to be 2, and in step 3, T ₁ =
Although the case where T ₂ = T / 2 has been described has been described, it is obvious that the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in the procedure 3 in the second step, when T ₁ <T ₂ is determined, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined that T ₁ > T ₂ in the procedure 3 in step S1, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made lighter. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. In this way, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. As in the above driving method, in step 2,
When a method using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image is selected, the brightness of the sub-image need not be changed. This is because the image in the intermediate state is completed as an image by itself, so that even if the display timing of the second sub-image changes, the image perceived by human eyes does not change. In this case, since the circuit that changes the brightness of the entire image can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, power consumption and manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced.

Further, in the procedure 2, it is obvious that the number J of sub-images may be determined to a value other than 2 instead of 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, detailed description will be omitted here, but the same applies when the method using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as the sub image is selected in step 1 in the second step. Obviously, it has many advantages. For example, the image quality can be improved by applying to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1 / (J times the conversion ratio) of the cycle of the input image data.

Next, a specific example of a frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate and the display frame rate are different will be described with reference to FIG. In the method shown in FIGS. 77A to 77C, it is assumed that a circular area on the image is an area whose position changes depending on the frame, and a triangular area on the image is an area whose position hardly changes depending on the frame. Yes. However,
This is an example for explanation, and the displayed image is not limited to this. The methods shown in FIGS. 77A to 77C can be applied to various images.

FIG. 77A shows a case where the display frame rate is twice the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 2). When the conversion ratio is 2, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 2. Furthermore, when the conversion ratio is 2, there is an advantage that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 2. 77 (
A) schematically shows the temporal change of the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. Here, the image of interest is referred to as a p-th image (p is a positive integer). The image displayed next to the image of interest is the (p + 1) th image,
For the sake of convenience, how far away from the image of interest the image that is displayed before the image of interest is displayed, such as the (p-1) -th image. I will do it. The image 180701 is the pth image, the image 180702 is the (p + 1) th image, the image 180703 is the (p + 2) th image, the image 180704 is the (p + 3) th image, the image1
It is assumed that 80705 is the (p + 4) th image. The period Tin represents the cycle of the input image data. Note that FIG. 77A illustrates the case where the conversion ratio is 2, and thus the period Tin
Is twice as long as the period from when the p-th image is displayed until the (p + 1) -th image is displayed.

Here, the (p + 1) -th image 180702 is changed from the p-th image 180701 to the (p + 2) -th image.
It may be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the p-th image 180701 and the (p + 2) -th image 180703 by detecting the amount of change in the image up to the image 180703. In FIG. 77A, the state of the image in the intermediate state is represented by a region whose position changes with the frame (circular region) and a region whose position does not substantially change with the frame (triangular region). That is, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) th image 180702 is an intermediate position between the position in the pth image 180701 and the position in the (p + 2) image 180703. That is, the (p + 1) th image 180702 is obtained by performing motion compensation and interpolating image data. Thus, smooth display can be performed by performing motion compensation on an object having motion on the image and interpolating the image data.

Further, the (p + 1) -th image 180702 includes the p-th image 180701 and the (p + 2) -th image.
The image may be an image in which the brightness of the image is controlled according to a certain rule. For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), the fixed rule is L when the representative luminance of the p-th image 180701 is L and the representative luminance of the (p + 1) -th image 180702 is Lc. Lc may have a relationship of L> Lc. Preferably
There may be a relationship of 0.1L <Lc <0.8L. More desirably, 0.2L <L
There may be a relationship of c <0.5L. Or conversely, there may be a relationship of L <Lc between L and Lc. Desirably, there may be a relationship of 0.1Lc <L <0.8Lc.
More desirably, there may be a relationship of 0.2Lc <L <0.5Lc. By doing so, the display can be made pseudo-impulse type, so that an afterimage of the eye can be suppressed.

Note that typical luminance of an image will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

In this way, there are two different causes for moving image blur (that is, the movement of the image is not smooth,
And the afterimage of the eye) can be solved at the same time to greatly reduce motion blur.

Further, for the (p + 3) -th image 180704, the (p + 2) -th image 180703 is also used.
It may also be created from the (p + 4) th image 180705 using a similar method. That is, the (p + 3) -th image 180704 is changed from the (p + 2) -th image 180703 to the (p + 2) -th image 180704.
By detecting the amount of change in the image up to +4) image 180705, the (p + 2) th image 1
The image may be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the 80703 and the (p + 4) th image 180705, and the image brightness may be controlled according to a certain rule.

FIG. 77B shows a case where the display frame rate is three times the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 3). FIG. 77 (B) schematically shows the temporal change of the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. An image 180711 is a p-th image, an image 1807
12 is a (p + 1) th image, and image 180713 is a (p + 2) th image, image 180714.
Is the (p + 3) th image, image 180715 is the (p + 4) th image, image 180716 is the (p + 5) th image, and image 180717 is the (p + 6) th image. The period Tin represents the cycle of the input image data. Note that FIG. 77B illustrates a case where the conversion ratio is 3, so that the period Tin is three times the period from when the p-th image is displayed until when the (p + 1) -th image is displayed. It becomes length.

Here, the (p + 1) -th image 180712 and the (p + 2) -th image 180713 detect the amount of change in the image from the p-th image 180711 to the (p + 3) -th image 180714, and thereby the p-th image 180711. It may also be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the (p + 3) -th image 180714. In FIG. 77B, the state of the image in the intermediate state is represented by a region (a circular region) whose position is changed by the frame and a region (a triangular region) whose position is not substantially changed by the frame. That is, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) th image 180712 and the (p + 2) image 180713 is set to a position intermediate between the position in the pth image 180711 and the position in the (p + 3) image 180714. Specifically, when the amount of movement of the circular area detected from the p-th image 180711 and the (p + 3) image 180714 is X, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) -th image 180712 is It may be a position displaced about (1/3) X from the position in the p-th image 180711. Furthermore, the (p + 2) -th image 1807
The position of the circular area in 13 is (2/3) from the position in the p-th image 180711.
) The position may be displaced by about X. That is, the (p + 1) th image 180712 and the (p + 2) image 180713 are obtained by performing motion compensation and interpolating image data. Thus, smooth display can be performed by performing motion compensation on an object having motion on an image and interpolating image data.

Furthermore, the (p + 1) -th image 180712 and the (p + 2) -th image 180713 are created so as to be in an intermediate state between the p-th image 180711 and the (p + 3) -th image 180714, and the brightness of the image is constant. The image may be controlled according to the rules. The certain rule is, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the representative luminance of the p-th image 180711 is L,
The representative luminance of the (p + 1) image 180712 is Lc1, and the (p + 2) th image 180713 is.
When Lc2 is a representative luminance, L> Lc1 or L in L, Lc1, and Lc2
There may be a relationship of> Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, 0.1 L <Lc
There may be a relationship of 1 = Lc2 <0.8L. More preferably, 0.2L <Lc =
There may be a relationship of Lc2 <0.5L. Or, conversely, in L, Lc1, and Lc2, there may be a relationship of L <Lc1 or L <Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, there may be a relationship of 0.1Lc1 = 0.1Lc2 <L <0.8Lc1 = 0.8Lc2. More preferably, 0.2Lc1 = 0.2Lc2 <L <0.5Lc1 = 0.5
There may be a relationship of Lc2. By doing so, the display can be made pseudo-impulse type, so that an afterimage of the eye can be suppressed. Or you may make it the image which changes a brightness | luminance appear alternately. By doing so, the cycle in which the luminance changes can be shortened, and flicker can be reduced.

In this way, there are two different causes for moving image blur (that is, the movement of the image is not smooth,
And the afterimage of the eye) can be solved at the same time to greatly reduce motion blur.

Further, the (p + 4) image 180715 and the (p + 5) image 180716 may also be created from the (p + 3) image 180714 and the (p + 6) image 180717 using the same method. That is, the (p + 4) -th image 180715 and the (p + 5) -th image 180716 are detected by detecting the amount of change in the image from the (p + 3) -th image 180714 to the (p + 6) -th image 180717 (p + 3). Image 18071
The image may be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the fourth and (p + 6) th images 180717, and the image brightness may be controlled according to a certain rule.

Note that when the method of FIG. 77B is used, since the display frame rate is large, the movement of the image can follow the movement of the eyes well, and the movement of the image can be displayed smoothly. Can be greatly reduced.

In FIG. 77C, the display frame rate is 1.5 times the input frame rate (conversion ratio 1.5).
). FIG. 77C schematically shows the temporal change of the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. Image 180721 is the pth image, image 1
80722 is the (p + 1) -th image, image 180723 is the (p + 2) -th image, and image 180
Suppose that 724 is the (p + 3) th image. Although not actually displayed, the image 180725 is input image data, and the (p + 1) th image 180722 and the (p
+2) image 180723 may be used to create the image. The period Tin represents the cycle of the input image data. Note that FIG. 77C illustrates the case where the conversion ratio is 1.5, and thus the period Tin is a period from the display of the p-th image to the display of the (p + 1) -th image. .5 times longer.

Here, the (p + 1) -th image 180722 and the (p + 2) -th image 180723 are transmitted from the p-th image 180721 through the image 180725 to the (p + 3) -th image 180724.
The image may be an image created so as to be in an intermediate state between the p-th image 180721 and the (p + 3) -th image 180724 by detecting the change amount of the image up to. In FIG. 77C, the state of the image in the intermediate state is represented by a region (a circular region) whose position is changed by the frame and a region (a triangular region) whose position is not substantially changed by the frame.
That is, the position of the circular area in the (p + 1) th image 180722 and the (p + 2) th image 180723 is an intermediate position between the position in the pth image 180721 and the position in the (p + 3) image 180724. That is, the (p + 1) th image 180
The 722 and the (p + 2) -th image 180723 are obtained by performing motion compensation and interpolating image data. Thus, smooth display can be performed by performing motion compensation on an object having motion on an image and interpolating image data.

Further, the (p + 1) -th image 180722 and the (p + 2) -th image 180723 are created so as to be in an intermediate state between the p-th image 180721 and the (p + 3) -th image 180724, and the brightness of the image is constant. The image may be controlled according to the rules. The certain rule is, for example, as shown in FIG. 77C, the representative luminance of the p-th image 180721 is L,
The typical luminance of the (p + 1) -th image 180722 is Lc1, and the (p + 2) -th image 180723.
When Lc2 is a representative luminance, L> Lc1 or L in L, Lc1, and Lc2
There may be a relationship of> Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, 0.1 L <Lc
There may be a relationship of 1 = Lc2 <0.8L. More preferably, 0.2L <Lc =
There may be a relationship of Lc2 <0.5L. Or, conversely, in L, Lc1, and Lc2, there may be a relationship of L <Lc1 or L <Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, there may be a relationship of 0.1Lc1 = 0.1Lc2 <L <0.8Lc1 = 0.8Lc2. More preferably, 0.2Lc1 = 0.2Lc2 <L <0.5Lc1 = 0.5
There may be a relationship of Lc2. By doing so, the display can be made pseudo-impulse type, so that an afterimage of the eye can be suppressed. Or you may make it the image which changes a brightness | luminance appear alternately. By doing so, the cycle in which the luminance changes can be shortened, and flicker can be reduced.

In this way, there are two different causes for moving image blur (that is, the movement of the image is not smooth,
And the afterimage of the eye) can be solved at the same time to greatly reduce motion blur.

Note that when the method in FIG. 77C is used, the display frame rate is low, so that the time for writing a signal to the display device can be extended. Therefore, the clock frequency of the display device can be reduced, so that power consumption can be reduced. In addition, since the processing speed for performing motion compensation can be reduced, power consumption can be reduced.

Next, typical luminance of an image will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (A) to (D
The diagram shown in () schematically represents a temporal change in the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. FIG. 78E illustrates an example of a method for measuring the luminance of an image in a certain region.

As a method of measuring the luminance of an image, there is a method of measuring the luminance individually for each pixel constituting the image. When this method is used, it is possible to measure the brightness strictly to the details of the image.

However, since the method of measuring the luminance individually for each pixel constituting the image is very labor intensive, another method may be used. As another method for measuring the luminance of the image, there is a method of paying attention to a certain area in the image and measuring the average luminance of the area. By this method, the brightness of the image can be easily measured. In the present embodiment, the luminance obtained by the method of measuring the average luminance of a certain area in the image is referred to as the representative luminance of the image for convenience.

Then, in order to obtain the representative luminance of the image, a description will be given below of which region in the image is focused.

FIG. 78A shows an example of a method in which the luminance of a region (a triangular region) where the position does not substantially change with respect to the change of the image is set as the representative luminance of the image. The period Tin is the cycle of the input image data, the image 180801 is the pth image, the image 180802 is the (p + 1) th image, and the image 18
0803 is the (p + 2) -th image, the first area 180804 is the luminance measurement area in the p-th image 180801, the second area 180805 is the luminance measurement area in the (p + 1) -th image 180802, and the third area 180806 is the first area. The luminance measurement areas in the (p + 2) image 180803 are respectively shown. Here, the first to third regions may be substantially the same as the spatial position in the apparatus. That is, by measuring the representative luminance of the image in the first to third regions, it is possible to obtain the temporal change in the representative luminance of the image.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, the luminance measured in the first region 180804 is L,
When the luminance measured in the second region 180805 is Lc, if Lc <L, the display can be said to be a pseudo impulse type. In such a case, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) of the image with respect to time changes is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, the larger one for each of the first region 180804 and the second region 180805, the second region 180805 and the third region 180806, and the first region 180804 and the third region 180806, respectively. It can be the ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the change amount of the typical luminance of the image with respect to the change of time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. If the relative luminance is 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative luminance is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of moving images can be improved, and power consumption and flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 78B shows an example of a method of measuring the luminance of the area divided into tiles and setting the average value as the representative luminance of the image. The period Tin is the period of the input image data, and the image 1808
11 is the p-th image, image 180812 is the (p + 1) -th image, and image 180813 is the (p-th) image.
+2) image, the first region 180814 is the luminance measurement region in the p-th image 180811, the second region 180815 is the luminance measurement region in the (p + 1) -th image 180812, and the third region 180816 is the (p + 2) -th image. The luminance measurement areas in the image 180813 are respectively shown. Here, the first to third regions may be substantially the same as the spatial position in the apparatus. That is, by measuring the representative luminance of the image in the first to third regions, it is possible to obtain the temporal change in the representative luminance of the image.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, if Lc is an average value in all areas of luminance measured in the first area 180814 and Lc is an average value in all areas of luminance measured in the second area 180815, then Lc <L. In other words, it can be said that the display is a pseudo impulse type. In such a case, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) of the image with respect to time changes is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, the larger one of the first region 180814 and the second region 180815, the second region 180815 and the third region 180816, and the first region 180814 and the third region 180816, respectively. It can be the ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the change amount of the typical luminance of the image with respect to the change of time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. If the relative luminance is 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative luminance is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of moving images can be improved, and power consumption and flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 78C shows an example of a method of measuring the luminance of the central region of the image and setting the average value as the representative luminance of the image. The period Tin is the period of the input image data, the image 180821 is the pth image, the image 180822 is the (p + 1) th image, the image 180823 is the (p + 2) image, and the first region 180824 is the luminance in the pth image 180821. The measurement area, the second area 180825 represents the luminance measurement area in the (p + 1) -th image 180822, and the third area 180826 represents the luminance measurement area in the (p + 2) -th image 180823, respectively.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, the luminance measured in the first region 180824 is L,
When the luminance measured in the second region 180825 is Lc, if Lc <L, the display can be said to be a pseudo impulse type. In such a case, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) of the image with respect to time changes is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, the larger one for each of the first region 180824 and the second region 180825, the second region 180825 and the third region 180826, and the first region 180824 and the third region 180826, respectively. It can be the ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the change amount of the typical luminance of the image with respect to the change of time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. If the relative luminance is 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative luminance is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of moving images can be improved, and power consumption and flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 78D illustrates an example of a method in which the luminance of a plurality of points sampled from the entire image is measured and the average value is used as the representative luminance of the image. The period Tin is the cycle of the input image data,
An image 180831 is a pth image, an image 180832 is a (p + 1) th image, an image 1808
33 is the (p + 2) -th image, the first region 180834 is the luminance measurement region in the p-th image 180831, the second region 180835 is the luminance measurement region in the (p + 1) -th image 180832, and the third region 180836 is the first region. The luminance measurement regions in the (p + 2) image 180833 are respectively shown.

By measuring the representative luminance of the image, it can be determined whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, if Lc is an average value in all regions of luminance measured in the first region 180834 and Lc is an average value in all regions of luminance measured in the second region 180835, Lc <L. In other words, it can be said that the display is a pseudo impulse type. In such a case, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improved.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical amount of change in luminance (relative luminance) of the image with respect to time changes is in the following range. As the relative luminance, for example, the larger one for each of the first region 180834 and the second region 180835, the second region 180835 and the third region 180836, and the first region 180834 and the third region 180836. It can be the ratio of the smaller luminance to the luminance. That is, when the change amount of the typical luminance of the image with respect to the change of time is 0, the relative luminance is 100%. If the relative luminance is 80% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, if the relative luminance is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 10% or more, power consumption can be reduced and flicker can be suppressed. In particular, the relative luminance is 2
If it is 0% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is,
If the relative luminance is 10% or more and 80% or less, the quality of moving images can be improved, and power consumption and flicker can be reduced. Furthermore, if the relative luminance is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced.

FIG. 78E is a diagram showing a measurement method in the luminance measurement region in the diagrams shown in FIGS. 78A to 78D. A region 180841 is a luminance measurement region of interest, and a point 180842 is a luminance measurement point in the luminance measurement region 180841. Since the measurement target range of a luminance measuring device with high temporal resolution may be small, when the region 180841 is large, the entire region is not measured, but the region 180841 is pointed as shown in FIG. The brightness of the region 180841 may be obtained by measuring at a plurality of points without unevenness in the shape, and calculating the average value.

When the image has a combination of the three primary colors R, G, and B, the measured luminance is R, G
, B may be combined, R and G combined, G and B combined, B and R combined, and each of R, G, B It may be brightness.

Next, a method of detecting the movement of the image included in the input image data and creating an intermediate state image,
A method for controlling the driving method according to the movement of the image included in the input image data will be described.

With reference to FIG. 79, an example of a method of detecting an image motion included in input image data and creating an intermediate image will be described. FIG. 79A illustrates a case where the display frame rate is twice the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 2). FIG. 79A schematically shows a method of detecting the motion of an image using the horizontal axis as time. The period Tin is the cycle of the input image data, the image 180901 is the pth image, and the image 180902 is the (p + 1) th
And image 180903 represent the (p + 2) -th image, respectively. In the image, a first region 180904, a second region 180905, and a third region 180906 are provided as time-independent regions.

First, in the (p + 2) -th image 180903, the image is divided into a plurality of tile-shaped areas, and attention is paid to the image data in the third area 180906, which is one of the areas.

Next, in the p-th image 180901, attention is focused on a range larger than the third region 180906 centered on the third region 180906. Here, a range larger than the third region 180906 centering on the third region 180906 is a data search range. The data search range is 180907 for the range in the horizontal direction (X direction) and 1809 for the range in the vertical direction (Y direction).
08. Note that the horizontal range 180907 and the vertical range 180908 of the data search range may be ranges in which the horizontal range and the vertical range of the third region 180906 are respectively expanded by about 15 pixels.

Then, an area having image data most similar to the image data in the third area 180906 is searched within the data search range. As a search method, a least square method or the like can be used. As a result of the search, the first region 18090 is the region having the most similar image data.
Suppose that 4 is derived.

Next, a vector 180909 is derived as an amount representing a difference in position between the derived first region 180904 and the third region 180906. The vector 180909 is referred to as a motion vector.

In the (p + 1) th image 180902, the vector 180910 obtained from the motion vector 180909 and the third region 18 in the (p + 2) image 180903 are displayed.
A second region 180905 is formed by the image data in 0906 and the image data in the first region 180904 in the p-th image 180901.

Here, the vector 180910 obtained from the motion vector 180909 is referred to as a displacement vector. The displacement vector 180910 has a role of determining a position where the second region 180905 is formed. The second region 180905 is formed at a position separated from the third region 180906 by a displacement vector 180910. The displacement vector 180910 may be an amount obtained by multiplying the motion vector 180909 by a coefficient (1/2).

The image data in the second area 180905 in the (p + 1) -th image 180902 is the same as the image data in the third area 180906 in the (p + 2) -th image 180903, and the p-th image.
The image data in the first area 180904 in the image 180901 may be determined. For example, the second region 1809 in the (p + 1) th image 180902
The image data in 05 is the third region 18090 in the (p + 2) -th image 180903.
6 and the average value of the image data in the first area 180904 in the p-th image 180901.

In this way, the second region 180905 in the (p + 1) th image 180902 corresponding to the third region 180906 in the (p + 2) th image 180903 can be formed. It should be noted that the above processing is also performed on other regions in the (p + 2) -th image 180903, so that the (p + 1) -th image 180902 is in an intermediate state between the (p + 2) -th image 180903 and the p-th image 180901. Can be formed.

FIG. 79B illustrates a case where the display frame rate is three times the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 3). FIG. 79 (B) schematically shows a method for detecting the motion of an image with the horizontal axis as time. The period Tin is the cycle of the input image data, and the image 1809
11 is the p-th image, image 180912 is the (p + 1) -th image, and image 180913 is the (p-th) image.
The (+2) image and the image 180914 represent the (p + 3) th image, respectively. Also,
The first area 180915 and the second area 1809 are areas that do not depend on time in the image.
16, a third area 180917 and a fourth area 180918 are provided.

First, in the (p + 3) -th image 180914, the image is divided into a plurality of tile-shaped areas, and attention is paid to the image data in the fourth area 180918 which is one of the areas.

Next, in the p-th image 180911, attention is focused on a range larger than the fourth region 180918 centered on the fourth region 180918. Here, a range larger than the fourth area 180918 around the fourth area 180918 is a data search range. The data search range is 180919 in the horizontal direction (X direction) and 1809 in the vertical direction (Y direction).
20 Note that the horizontal range 180919 and the vertical range 180920 of the data search range may be ranges obtained by enlarging the horizontal range and the vertical range of the fourth region 180918 by about 15 pixels, respectively.

Then, an area having image data most similar to the image data in the fourth area 180918 is searched within the data search range. As a search method, a least square method or the like can be used. As a result of the search, the first region 18091 is the region having the most similar image data.
Suppose that 5 is derived.

Next, a vector 180921 is derived as an amount representing a difference in position between the derived first region 180915 and the fourth region 180918. Vector 180921 is referred to as a motion vector.

In the (p + 1) th image 180912 and the (p + 2) th image 180913, vectors 180922 and 180923 obtained from the motion vector 180921 are used.
And the second region 180916 and the third region by the image data in the fourth region 180918 in the (p + 3) image 180915 and the image data in the first region 180915 in the p-th image 180911. 180917 is formed.

Here, the vector 180922 obtained from the motion vector 180921 will be referred to as a first displacement vector. Vector 180923 will be referred to as a second displacement vector. The first displacement vector 180922 has a role of determining a position where the second region 180916 is formed. The second region 180916 is formed at a position separated from the fourth region 180918 by the first displacement vector 180922. The displacement vector 180922 may be an amount obtained by multiplying the motion vector 180921 by (1/3). In addition, the second displacement vector 180923 has a role of determining a position where the third region 180917 is formed. Third
The region 1800917 is formed at a position separated from the fourth region 180918 by the second displacement vector 180923. Note that the displacement vector 180923 is a motion vector 1809.
It may be an amount obtained by multiplying 21 by (2/3).

The image data in the second area 180916 in the (p + 1) -th image 180912 includes the image data in the fourth area 180918 in the (p + 3) -th image 180914, and the p-th image data.
It may be determined by the image data in the first region 180915 in the image 180911. For example, the second region 1809 in the (p + 1) th image 180912
16 is the fourth area 18091 in the (p + 3) -th image 180914.
8 and the average value of the image data in the first region 180915 in the p-th image 180911.

The image data in the third area 180913 in the (p + 2) -th image 180913 includes the image data in the fourth area 180918 in the (p + 3) -th image 180914 and the p-th image.
It may be determined by the image data in the first region 180915 in the image 180911. For example, the third region 1809 in the (p + 2) -th image 180913
The image data in 17 is the fourth area 18091 in the (p + 3) -th image 180914.
8 and the average value of the image data in the first region 180915 in the p-th image 180911.

In this way, the second region 180916 in the (p + 1) th image 180902 corresponding to the fourth region 180918 in the (p + 3) th image 180914, and the (
A third region 180917 in the image 180913 of p + 2) can be formed.
The above processing is also performed on other regions in the (p + 3) -th image 180914, so that an intermediate state between the (p + 3) -th image 180914 and the p-th image 180911 is obtained.
A (p + 1) th image 180912 and a (p + 2) th image 180913 can be formed.

Next, an example of a circuit that detects the movement of an image included in input image data and creates an intermediate state image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80A illustrates a connection relationship between a peripheral driver circuit including a source driver and a gate driver for displaying an image in a display area, and a control circuit that controls the peripheral driver circuit. FIG. 80B is a diagram illustrating an example of a detailed circuit configuration of the control circuit. FIG. 80C is a diagram illustrating an example of a detailed circuit configuration of an image processing circuit included in the control circuit. FIG. 80D is a diagram illustrating another example of a detailed circuit configuration of the image processing circuit included in the control circuit.

As shown in FIG. 80A, the device in this embodiment may include a control circuit 181101, a source driver 181012, a gate driver 181013, and a display region 181014.

Note that the control circuit 181011, the source driver 181012, and the gate driver 181
013 may be formed on the same substrate as the substrate on which the display region 181014 is formed.

Note that the control circuit 181011, the source driver 181012, and the gate driver 181
013 is partly formed on the same substrate as the substrate on which the display region 181014 is formed, and other circuits are formed on a substrate different from the substrate on which the display region 181014 is formed. It may be. For example, the source driver 181012 and the gate driver 181013 may be formed over the same substrate as the substrate over which the display region 181014 is formed, and the control circuit 181101 may be formed as an external IC over a different substrate. Similarly, the gate driver 181013 may be formed over the same substrate as the substrate over which the display region 181014 is formed, and other circuits may be formed as external ICs over different substrates. Similarly, part of the source driver 181012, the gate driver 181013, and the control circuit 181101 is formed over the same substrate as the substrate over which the display region 181014 is formed, and the other circuits are formed as external ICs over different substrates. May be.

The control circuit 181101 includes an external image signal 181000, a horizontal synchronization signal 181001,
The vertical synchronization signal 181002 is input, the image signal 181003, the source start pulse 181004, the source clock 181005, and the gate start pulse 18100.
6 and the gate clock 181007 may be output.

The source driver 181012, the image signal 181003 and the source start pulse 181
004 and the source clock 181005 may be input, and a voltage or current in accordance with the image signal 181003 may be output to the display area 181014.

The gate driver 181013 may have a configuration in which a gate start pulse 181006 and a gate clock 181007 are input, and a signal that specifies a timing for writing a signal output from the source driver 181012 in the display region 181014 is output.

When the frequency of the external image signal 181000 and the frequency of the image signal 181003 are different, the signals for controlling the timing for driving the source driver 181012 and the gate driver 181013 are also input to the horizontal synchronization signal 181001 and the vertical synchronization signal 1810.
It will have a frequency different from 02. Therefore, in addition to the processing of the image signal 181003, it is necessary to process a signal for controlling the timing for driving the source driver 181012 and the gate driver 181013. The control circuit 181101 may be a circuit having a function for that purpose. For example, when the frequency of the image signal 181003 is twice the frequency of the external image signal 181000, the control circuit 181011 may
An image signal included in 1000 is interpolated to generate an image signal 181003 having a double frequency, and a signal for timing control is also controlled to be a double frequency.

Further, the control circuit 181101 includes an image processing circuit 181015, as shown in FIG.
And a timing generation circuit 181016.

The image processing circuit 181015 includes an external image signal 181000 and a frequency control signal 18100.
8 may be input and the image signal 181003 may be output.

The timing generation circuit 181016 includes a horizontal synchronization signal 181001 and a vertical synchronization signal 181.
002, a source start pulse 181004, and a source clock 1810
05, a gate start pulse 181006, a gate clock 181007, and a frequency control signal 181008 may be output. Note that the timing generation circuit 181016 may include a memory or a register that holds data for designating the state of the frequency control signal 181008. In addition, the timing generation circuit 181016 may be configured to receive a signal that specifies the state of the frequency control signal 181008 from the outside.

As shown in FIG. 80C, the image processing circuit 181015 includes a motion detection circuit 181020, a first memory 181021, a second memory 181022, a third memory 181023, a luminance control circuit 181023, and a high-speed processing. And a circuit 181025.

The motion detection circuit 181020 may be configured to receive a plurality of image data, detect a motion of the image, and output image data that is an intermediate state of the plurality of image data.

The first memory 181021 receives an external video signal 181000 and holds the external video signal 181000 for a certain period, while the motion detection circuit 181020 and the second memory 1810 are held.
22 may output the external video signal 181000.

The second memory 181022 receives the image data output from the first memory 181021, and outputs the image data to the motion detection circuit 181020 and the high-speed processing circuit 181025 while holding the image data for a certain period. There may be.

The third memory 181023 may be configured to receive the image data output from the motion detection circuit 181020 and output the image data to the luminance control circuit 181024 while holding the image data for a certain period.

The high-speed processing circuit 181025 includes image data output from the second memory 181022,
The image data output from the luminance control circuit 181024 and the frequency control signal 181008 may be input, and the image data may be output as the image signal 181003.

When the frequency of the external image signal 181000 and the frequency of the image signal 181003 are different, the image signal included in the external image signal 181000 may be interpolated by the image processing circuit 181015 to generate the image signal 181003. Input external image signal 18100
0 is once held in the first memory 181021. At that time, the second memory 18102
2 holds image data input in the previous frame. Motion detection circuit 18
1020 appropriately reads the image data held in the first memory 181021 and the second memory 181022, detects a motion vector from the difference between the two image data,
Intermediate state image data may be generated. The generated intermediate state image data is held by the third memory 181023.

When the motion detection circuit 181020 is generating intermediate state image data, the high speed processing circuit 1
81025 converts the image data held in the second memory 181022 into the image signal 18.
1003 is output. Thereafter, the image data held in the third memory 181023 is output as the image signal 181003 through the luminance control circuit 181024. At this time, the frequency at which the second memory 181022 and the third memory 181023 are updated is the same as the frequency of the external image signal 181000, but the frequency of the image signal 181003 output through the high-speed processing circuit 181025 is the same as that of the external image signal 181000. It may be different from the frequency. Specifically, for example, the frequency of the image signal 181003 is the external image signal 181000.
1.5 times, 2 times, and 3 times the frequency. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various frequencies can be used. Note that the frequency of the image signal 181003 may be specified by the frequency control signal 181008.

The configuration of the image processing circuit 181015 shown in FIG. 80D is obtained by adding a fourth memory 181026 to the configuration of the image processing circuit 181015 shown in FIG. In this way, the image data output from the first memory 181021 and the second memory 181022
In addition to the image data output from, the image data output from the fourth memory 181026 is also output to the motion detection circuit 181020, so that the motion of the image can be accurately detected.

If the input image data already contains a motion vector for data compression or the like, for example, MPEG (Moving Picture Expert Gr
In the case of image data based on the (up) standard, an intermediate state image may be generated as an interpolated image using the image data. At this time, a part for generating a motion vector included in the motion detection circuit 181020 is not necessary. In addition, since the encoding and decoding processes related to the image signal 181023 are simplified, power consumption can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied, combined, or replaced with the contents (may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each portion with a portion of another embodiment.

Note that the present embodiment is an example in which the contents (may be part) described in other embodiments are embodied, an example in which the content is slightly modified, an example in which a part is changed, and an improvement. An example of the case,
An example in the case of detailed description, an example in the case of application, an example of a related part, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiments can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment.

(Embodiment 12)
In this embodiment, an example of an electronic apparatus according to the present invention will be described.

FIG. 48 shows a display panel module in which a display panel 900101 and a circuit board 900111 are combined. A display panel 900101 includes a pixel portion 900102, a scan line driver circuit 900103, and a signal line driver circuit 900104. On the circuit board 900111, for example, a control circuit 900112 and a signal dividing circuit 900113 are formed. The display panel 900101 and the circuit board 900111 are connected by a connection wiring 900114. An FPC or the like can be used for the connection wiring.

In the display panel 900101, a pixel portion 900102 and a part of peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a low operating frequency among the plurality of driver circuits) are formed over a substrate using a transistor, and a part of the peripheral driver circuits (a plurality of peripheral driver circuits) A driver circuit having a high operating frequency) is formed on an IC chip, and the IC chip is formed on a display panel 9001 by COG (Chip On Glass) or the like.
You may implement in 01. Thus, the area of the circuit board 900111 can be reduced, and a small display device can be obtained. Alternatively, the IC chip is TAB (Tape Out).
o Bonding) or a printed circuit board, the display panel 900101 may be mounted. Thus, the area of the display panel 900101 can be reduced, so that a display device with a small frame size can be obtained.

For example, in order to reduce power consumption, a pixel portion is formed using a transistor on a glass substrate, all peripheral drive circuits are formed on an IC chip, and the IC chip is mounted on a display panel by COG or TAB. May be.

A television receiver can be completed with the display panel module shown in FIG. FIG. 49 is a block diagram illustrating a main configuration of a television receiver. Tuner 900201
Receives video and audio signals. The video signal includes a video signal amplifying circuit 900202, a video signal processing circuit 900203 for converting a signal output from the video signal amplifying circuit 900202 into a color signal corresponding to each color of red, green, and blue, and a driving circuit for the video signal. Is processed by a control circuit 900212 for conversion to the input specification of Control circuit 900212
Outputs signals to the scanning line side and the signal line side, respectively. In the case of digital driving, a signal dividing circuit 900213 may be provided on the signal line side, and an input digital signal may be divided into m pieces (m is a positive integer) and supplied.

Of the signals received by the tuner 900201, the audio signal is the audio signal amplifier circuit 900205.
The output is supplied to the speaker 900207 through the audio signal processing circuit 900206. The control circuit 900208 receives the receiving station (reception frequency) and volume control information from the input unit 9.
In response to the received signal from the signal E00209, the signal is transmitted to the tuner 900201 or the audio signal processing circuit 900206.

A television receiver incorporating a display panel module different from that shown in FIG.
Shown in A). In FIG. 50A, a display screen 9003 housed in a housing 900301.
02 is formed of a display panel module. Note that a speaker 900303, an operation switch 900304, and the like may be provided as appropriate.

FIG. 50B illustrates a television receiver that can carry only a display wirelessly.
A housing and a signal receiver are incorporated in the housing 900312, and the display portion 900313 or the speaker portion 900317 is driven by the battery. Battery is charger 90
In 0310, repeated charging is possible. The charger 900310 can transmit and receive a video signal, and can transmit the video signal to a signal receiver of the display. The housing 900312 is controlled by operation keys 900316. Alternatively, the device illustrated in FIG. 50B may be a video / audio bidirectional communication device capable of transmitting a signal from the housing 900312 to the charger 900310 by operating the operation key 900316.
Alternatively, by operating the operation key 900316, a signal is transmitted from the housing 900312 to the charger 900310, and further, a signal that can be transmitted by the charger 900310 is received by another electronic device, thereby controlling communication of the other electronic device. It may be a general purpose remote control device. The present invention can be applied to the display portion 900313.

FIG. 51A shows a module in which a display panel 900401 and a printed wiring board 900402 are combined. A display panel 900401 includes a pixel portion 900403 provided with a plurality of pixels, a first scan line driver circuit 900404, and a second scan line driver circuit 90040.
5 and a signal line driver circuit 900406 for supplying a video signal to a selected pixel.

A printed wiring board 900402 includes a controller 900407, a central processing unit (CPU
) 940408, memory 900409, power supply circuit 900410, audio processing circuit 90041
1 and a transmission / reception circuit 900412 and the like. The printed wiring board 900402 and the display panel 900401 are connected by a flexible wiring board (FPC) 900413. The flexible wiring board (FPC) 9000041 may be provided with a storage capacitor, a buffer circuit, and the like to prevent generation of noise in the power supply voltage or signal and increase in signal rise time. Note that the controller 9000040, the sound processing circuit 9000041, the memory 9000040, the central processing unit (CPU) 900408, the power supply circuit 900410,
The display panel 900401 can be mounted using a COG (Chip On Glass) method. The scale of the printed wiring board 900402 can be reduced by the COG method.

Interface (I / F) unit 900414 provided on the printed circuit board 900402
Various control signals are input and output via the. An antenna port 900415 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the antenna is provided on the printed wiring board 900402.

FIG. 51B shows a block diagram of the module shown in FIG. This module includes a VRAM 900416, a DRAM 9000041, a flash memory 900418, and the like as the memory 900409. The VRAM 900416 stores image data to be displayed on the panel, the DRAM 900417 stores image data or audio data, and the flash memory stores various programs.

The power supply circuit 900410 supplies power for operating the display panel 900401, the controller 900407, the central processing unit (CPU) 9000040, the sound processing circuit 9000041, the memory 9000040, and the transmission / reception circuit 9000041. However, depending on the panel specifications, the power supply circuit 900410 may be provided with a current source.

A central processing unit (CPU) 9000040 includes a control signal generation circuit 900420 and a decoder 90.
0421, a register 900422, an arithmetic circuit 900423, a RAM 900394, an interface (I / F) unit 900419 for a central processing unit (CPU) 9000040, and the like. Central processing unit (CPU) via interface (I / F) unit 900419
Various signals input to 9000040 are temporarily stored in the register 9000042 and then input to the arithmetic circuit 9000042, the decoder 9000042, and the like. The arithmetic circuit 900423 performs an operation based on the input signal and designates a place to send various commands. On the other hand, the decoder 9
The signal input to 00421 is decoded and input to the control signal generation circuit 900420. The control signal generation circuit 900420 generates a signal including various instructions based on the input signal, and a location designated in the arithmetic circuit 9000042, specifically, a memory 9000040,
The data is sent to the transmission / reception circuit 900412, the audio processing circuit 900411, the controller 900407, and the like.

The memory 9000040, the transmission / reception circuit 9000041, the sound processing circuit 9000041, and the controller 900407 operate according to received commands. The operation will be briefly described below.

A signal input from the input unit 9000042 is input to an interface (I / F) unit 90041.
Central processing unit (CPU) 9004 mounted on a printed wiring board 900402 via 4
Sent to 08. The control signal generation circuit 900420 converts the image data stored in the VRAM 900416 into a predetermined format according to the signal sent from the input device 9000042 such as a pointing device or a keyboard, and sends it to the controller 900407.

The controller 900407 is a central processing unit (CPU) 9004 in accordance with the specifications of the panel.
Data processing is performed on a signal including image data sent from 08, and a display panel 90040 is processed.
1 is supplied. Based on the power supply voltage input from the power supply circuit 900410 or various signals input from the central processing unit (CPU) 9000040, the controller 900407
A sync signal, a Vsync signal, a clock signal CLK, an AC voltage (AC Cont), and a switching signal L / R are generated and supplied to the display panel 900401.

In the transmission / reception circuit 900412, a signal transmitted / received as a radio wave in the antenna 9000042 is processed. Specifically, an isolator, a band pass filter, a VCO (Volt)
age Controlled Oscillator), LPF (Low Pass)
A high frequency circuit such as a filter), a coupler, or a balun may be included. Transmission / reception circuit 90
Of the signals transmitted and received in 0412, a signal including audio information is sent to the central processing unit (CPU).
) Is sent to the audio processing circuit 900411 according to the command from 900408.

A signal including audio information sent in accordance with a command from a central processing unit (CPU) 9000040 is demodulated into an audio signal in an audio processing circuit 9000041 and is sent to a speaker 9000042. The audio signal sent from the microphone 9000042 is modulated in the audio processing circuit 9000041 and is sent to the transmission / reception circuit 900412 in accordance with a command from the central processing unit (CPU) 9000040.

Controller 9000040, central processing unit (CPU) 9000040, power supply circuit 90041
0, the audio processing circuit 900411 and the memory 9000040 can be mounted as a package of this embodiment.

Of course, the present embodiment is not limited to a television receiver, and is used for various applications as a display medium with a particularly large area such as a monitor of a personal computer, an information display board at a railway station or airport, and an advertisement display board in a street. Can be applied.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a configuration example of the mobile phone according to the present invention will be described.

The display panel 900501 is incorporated in a housing 900530 so as to be detachable. The shape or dimension of the housing 900530 can be changed as appropriate in accordance with the size of the display panel 900501. A housing 900530 to which the display panel 900501 is fixed is fitted into the printed circuit board 900531 and assembled as a module.

The display panel 900501 is connected to the printed circuit board 900531 through the FPC 900531. A printed circuit board 900531 includes a speaker 900532 and a microphone 90.
0533, transmission / reception circuit 900534, signal processing circuit 9 including CPU and controller
00535 is formed. Such a module is combined with the input means 900566 and the battery 900577 and stored in the housing 9000053. Display panel 900501
The pixel portion is arranged so as to be visible from an opening window formed in the housing 900500.

In the display panel 900501, a pixel portion and some peripheral driver circuits (a driver circuit having a low operating frequency among a plurality of driver circuits) are formed over a substrate using transistors, and some peripheral driver circuits (a plurality of driver circuits) are formed. The driving circuit having a high operating frequency is formed on the IC chip, and the IC
The chip may be mounted on the display panel 900501 by COG (Chip On Glass). Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to the glass substrate using TAB (Tape Auto Bonding) or a printed circuit board. With such a structure, the power consumption of the display device can be reduced, and the usage time by one charge of the mobile phone can be extended. Cost reduction of the mobile phone can be achieved.

The mobile phone shown in FIG. 52 has a function of displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, and the like). It has a function of displaying a calendar, date or time on the display unit. It has a function of operating or editing information displayed on the display unit. It has a function of controlling processing by various software (programs). Has a wireless communication function. It has a function of making a call with another mobile phone, a fixed phone, or a voice communication device using a wireless communication function. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a wireless communication function. It has a function of transmitting or receiving various data using a wireless communication function. The vibrator operates in response to an incoming call, data reception, or alarm. It has a function to generate a sound in response to an incoming call, reception of data, or an alarm. Note that the function of the mobile phone shown in FIG. 52 is not limited to this,
It can have various functions.

A mobile phone shown in FIG. 53 includes operation switches 9000060 and a microphone 90065.
A main body (A) 9000060 provided with a display panel (A) 900068, a display panel (B) 900609, a main body (B) 9000060 provided with a speaker 9000060, etc.
2 are connected to each other by a hinge 900610 so as to be opened and closed. Display panel (A) 9000060
And the display panel (B) 9000060 together with the circuit board 9000060 main body (B) 9000060
2 in the second housing 900603. The pixel portions of the display panel (A) 900608 and the display panel (B) 900609 are arranged so as to be visible from an opening window formed in the housing 900603.

The display panel (A) 900608 and the display panel (B) 900609
Specifications such as the number of pixels can be set as appropriate in accordance with the 0600 function. For example, the display panel (A) 900608 can be combined as a main screen and the display panel (B) 900609 can be combined as a sub-screen.

The mobile phone according to the present embodiment can be transformed into various modes depending on the function or application. For example, a mobile phone with a camera may be provided by incorporating an image sensor at the hinge 900610. Even when the operation switches 9000060, the display panel (A) 900068, and the display panel (B) 900609 are housed in one housing, the above-described effects can be obtained. Even if the configuration of the present embodiment is applied to an information display terminal having a plurality of display units, the same effect can be obtained.

The mobile phone shown in FIG. 53 has a function of displaying various information (still images, moving images, text images, and the like). It has a function of displaying a calendar, date or time on the display unit. It has a function of operating or editing information displayed on the display unit. It has a function of controlling processing by various software (programs). Has a wireless communication function. It has a function of making a call with another mobile phone, a fixed phone, or a voice communication device using a wireless communication function. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a wireless communication function. It has a function of transmitting or receiving various data using a wireless communication function. The vibrator operates in response to an incoming call, data reception, or alarm. It has a function to generate a sound in response to an incoming call, reception of data, or an alarm. Note that the function of the mobile phone shown in FIG. 53 is not limited to this,
It can have various functions.

The present invention can be applied to various electronic devices. Specifically, it can be applied to a display portion of an electronic device. Such electronic devices include video cameras, digital cameras, goggles-type displays, navigation systems, sound playback devices (car audio, audio components, etc.), computers, game devices, portable information terminals (mobile computers, mobile phones, portable games) Image reproducing apparatus (specifically, D) provided with a recording medium.
a device equipped with a display capable of reproducing a recording medium such as a digital Versatile Disc (DVD) and displaying the image).

FIG. 54A shows a display, which includes a housing 900711, a support base 900712, and a display portion 9.
And the like. The display shown in FIG. 54A displays various information (still images, moving images,
A text image or the like) on the display unit. Note that the function of the display illustrated in FIG. 54A is not limited to this, and the display can have a variety of functions.

FIG. 54B shows a camera, which includes a main body 900721, a display portion 900722, and an image receiving portion 9007.
23, an operation key 900724, an external connection port 900725, a shutter 900726, and the like. The camera illustrated in FIG. 54B has a function of capturing a still image. Has a function to shoot movies. It has a function of automatically correcting captured images (still images, moving images). It has a function of storing captured images in a recording medium (externally or built in a digital camera). It has a function of displaying a photographed image on the display unit. Note that the function of the camera illustrated in FIG. 54B is not limited to this, and the camera can have a variety of functions.

FIG. 54C illustrates a computer, which includes a main body 900731, a housing 900732, and a display portion 90.
0733, a keyboard 900734, an external connection port 900735, a pointing device 900736, and the like. The computer shown in FIG. 54C has various information (still images,
Video, text image, etc.) on the display unit. It has a function of controlling processing by various software (programs). It has a communication function such as wireless communication or wired communication. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a communication function. It has a function of transmitting or receiving various data using a communication function. Note that the function of the computer illustrated in FIG. 54C is not limited to this, and the computer can have a variety of functions.

FIG. 54D illustrates a mobile computer, which includes a main body 900741, a display portion 900742,
A switch 900074, an operation key 9000074, an infrared port 9000074, and the like are included. A mobile computer illustrated in FIG. 54D has a function of displaying various information (a still image, a moving image, a text image, and the like) on a display portion. The display unit has a touch panel function. The display unit has a function of displaying a calendar, date or time. It has a function of controlling processing by various software (programs). Has a wireless communication function. It has a function of connecting to various computer networks using a wireless communication function. It has a function of transmitting or receiving various data using a wireless communication function. Note that the function of the mobile computer illustrated in FIG. 54D is not limited to this, and the mobile computer can have a variety of functions.

FIG. 54E shows a portable image reproducing device (eg, a DVD reproducing device) provided with a recording medium, which includes a main body 900711, a housing 9000075, a display portion A90073, and a display portion B9007.
54, a recording medium (DVD or the like) reading unit 900755, an operation key 9000075, a speaker unit 900777, and the like. The display portion A90073 can mainly display image information, and the display portion B900743 can mainly display character information.

FIG. 54F shows a goggle type display, which includes a main body 900761 and a display portion 900762.
, Earphone 900763 and support portion 900764. The goggle type display shown in FIG. 54F has a function of displaying images (still images, moving images, text images, and the like) acquired from the outside on a display portion. Note that the function of the goggle display illustrated in FIG. 54F is not limited thereto, and the display can have a variety of functions.

FIG. 54G shows a portable game machine, which includes a housing 900771, a display portion 900772, a speaker portion 900773, operation keys 900774, a storage medium insertion portion 900775, and the like. A portable game machine in which the display device of the present invention is used for the display portion 900772 can express bright colors. A portable game machine shown in FIG. 54G has a function of reading a program or data recorded in a recording medium and displaying the program or data on a display portion. It has a function of sharing information by performing wireless communication with other portable game machines. Note that the portable game machine illustrated in FIG. 54G is not limited to this, and can have a variety of functions.

FIG. 54H shows a digital camera with a television receiving function, which includes a main body 900781 and a display portion 9.
00782, operation key 900783, speaker 900784, shutter 900785
, An image receiving unit 9000078, an antenna 9000078, and the like. A digital camera with a television receiver shown in FIG. 54H has a function of shooting a still image. Has a function to shoot movies. It has a function to automatically correct a photographed image. It has a function of acquiring various information from the antenna. It has a function of storing captured images or information acquired from an antenna. It has a function of displaying a captured image or information acquired from an antenna on a display unit. Note that FIG.
The function of the digital camera with a television receiver shown in 4 (H) is not limited to this, and the camera can have various functions.

As shown in FIGS. 54A to 54E, an electronic device according to the present invention has a display portion for displaying some information. The electronic device according to the present invention can reduce the operation frequency of the circuit by storing the data in the memory when the data is duplicated, so that the power consumption is small and the battery can be driven for a long time. is there.

Next, application examples of the semiconductor device according to the present invention will be described.

FIG. 55 shows an example in which the semiconductor device according to the present invention is provided integrally with a building. FIG.
Reference numeral 5 denotes a casing 900810, a display portion 900811, and a remote control device 900812 that is an operation portion.
, Speaker portion 9000081 and the like. The semiconductor device according to the present invention is integrated with a building as a wall-hanging type, and can be installed without requiring a large installation space.

FIG. 56 shows another example in which the semiconductor device according to the present invention is provided integrally with a building in the building. The display panel 900901 is integrally attached to the unit bath 900902, so that the bather can view the display panel 900901. Display panel 99011
Has a function of displaying information when operated by a bather. It has a function that can be used as an advertising or entertainment means.

Note that the semiconductor device according to the present invention can be installed not only on the side wall of the unit bus 900902 shown in FIG. For example, a part of the mirror surface or the bathtub itself may be integrated. At this time, the shape of the display panel 900901 may be adapted to the shape of the mirror surface or the bathtub.

FIG. 57 shows another example in which the semiconductor device according to the present invention is provided integrally with a building.
The display panel 901002 is attached so as to be curved according to the curved surface of the columnar body 901001. Here, the columnar body 901001 is described as a utility pole.

A display panel 901002 illustrated in FIG. 57 is provided at a position higher than the human viewpoint. By installing the display panel 901002 on a building that is repeatedly forested outdoors such as an electric pole, an advertisement can be made to an unspecified number of viewers. Here, the display panel 901002
Since it is easy to display the same image and to switch the image instantly by control from the outside, extremely efficient information display and advertising effect can be expected. Display panel 9
By providing a self-luminous display element at 01002, it can be said that it is useful as a display medium with high visibility even at night. By installing it on the utility pole, it is easy to secure the power supply means of the display panel 901002. In the event of an emergency such as a disaster, it can also be a means of quickly and accurately communicating information to the victims.

Note that as the display panel 901002, for example, a display panel which displays an image by providing a switching element such as an organic transistor on a film-like substrate and driving the display element can be used.

In this embodiment, a wall, a columnar body, and a unit bus are taken as an example of a building, but this embodiment is not limited to this, and the semiconductor device according to the present invention can be installed in various buildings. .

Next, an example in which the semiconductor device according to the present invention is provided integrally with a moving body will be described.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example in which the semiconductor device according to the present invention is provided integrally with an automobile. The display panel 901102 is attached integrally with the vehicle body 901101 of the automobile, and can display the operation of the vehicle body or information input from inside and outside the vehicle body on demand. Note that a navigation function may be provided.

Note that the semiconductor device according to the present invention can be installed not only in the vehicle body 901101 shown in FIG. 58 but also in various places. For example, glass windows, doors, handles, shift levers,
You may unite with a seat sheet, a room mirror, etc. At this time, the shape of the display panel 901102 may be adapted to the shape of the object to be installed.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example in which the semiconductor device according to the present invention is provided integrally with a train car.

FIG. 59A is a diagram showing an example in which a display panel 901202 is provided on the glass of a door 901201 of a train car. Compared to conventional paper advertisements, there is an advantage that labor costs required for advertisement switching are not incurred. Since the display panel 901202 can instantaneously switch the image displayed on the display unit in response to an external signal, for example, the display panel image is switched every time period when the customer base of the passengers on the train changes. More effective advertising effect can be expected.

FIG. 59B shows a glass window 901203 in addition to the glass of the door 901201 of the train car.
FIG. 10 illustrates an example in which a display panel 901202 is provided on a ceiling 901204. As described above, since the semiconductor device according to the present invention can be easily installed in a place where it has been difficult to install conventionally, an effective advertising effect can be obtained. Since the semiconductor device according to the present invention can instantaneously switch an image displayed on the display unit by an external signal, the cost and time at the time of advertisement switching can be reduced, and more flexible advertisement operation. And information transmission is possible.

Note that the semiconductor device according to the present invention includes the door 901201 and the glass window 9012 shown in FIG.
03 and the ceiling 901204 can be installed in various places. For example, it may be integrated with a strap, a seat, a rail, a floor or the like. At this time, the display panel 90
The shape of 1202 may be adapted to the shape of the object to be installed.

In the present embodiment, the moving body is exemplified as a train car body, an automobile body, and an airplane body, but is not limited to this. A motorcycle, an automobile (including an automobile, a bus, etc.),
It can be installed on various things such as trains (including monorails, railways, etc.) and ships. Since the semiconductor device according to the present invention can instantaneously switch the display of the display panel in the moving body by an external signal, the moving body can be mounted by installing the semiconductor device according to the present invention in the moving body. Advertising display board for an unspecified number of customers, information display board at the time of disaster,
It can be used for such applications.

In the present embodiment, various drawings have been used, but the contents described in each drawing (
May be applied to, combined with, the content described in another figure (may be part)
Alternatively, replacement can be performed freely. Further, in the drawings described so far, more parts can be formed by combining each part with another part.

Similarly, the contents (may be a part) described in each drawing of this embodiment are applied to and combined with the contents (may be a part) described in the drawings of another embodiment and examples. Or can be freely replaced. Further, in the drawings of this embodiment mode, more drawings can be formed by combining each embodiment with a portion of another embodiment and an example.

Note that in this embodiment, the contents described in other embodiments and examples (may be a part)
Example when embodied, example when slightly modified, example when partially changed, example when improved, example when described in detail, example when applied, example with related parts And so on. Therefore, the contents described in other embodiment modes and examples can be freely applied to, combined with, or replaced with this embodiment mode.

101 scanning line 102 signal line 110 subpixel 111 liquid crystal layer 112 capacitor 113 transistor 114 capacitor wiring 120 subpixel 121 liquid crystal layer 122 capacitor element 123 transistor 124 capacitor wiring 130 subpixel 131 liquid crystal layer 132 capacitor element 133 transistor 134 capacitor wiring 140 sub Pixel 141 Liquid crystal layer 142 Capacitor element 143 Transistor 144 Capacitor wiring 150 Subpixel 151 Liquid crystal layer 152 Capacitor element 153 Transistor 154 Capacitor wiring 100a Pixel 100b Pixel 100c Pixel 200a Pixel 201 Scan line 10101 Substrate 10102 Insulating film 10103 Conductive layer 10104 Insulating film 10105 Semiconductor Layer 10106 semiconductor layer 10107 conductive layer 10108 insulating film 10109 conductive layer 10110 alignment film 10112 alignment film 10113 conductive layer 1011 Light shielding film 10115 Color filter 10116 Substrate 10117 Spacer 10118 Liquid crystal molecule 10201 Substrate 10202 Insulating film 10203 Conductive layer 10204 Insulating film 10205 Semiconductor layer 10206 Semiconductor layer 10207 Conductive layer 10208 Insulating film 10209 Conductive layer 10210 Alignment film 10212 Alignment film 10213 Conductive layer 10214 Light shielding film 10215 Color filter 10216 Substrate 10217 Spacer 10218 Liquid crystal molecule 10219 Alignment control protrusion 10231 Substrate 10232 Insulating film 10233 Conductive layer 10234 Insulating film 10235 Semiconductor layer 10236 Semiconductor layer 10237 Conductive layer 10238 Insulating film 10239 Conductive layer 10240 Alignment film 10242 Alignment film 10243 Conductive layer 10244 Light shielding film 10245 Color filter 10246 Substrate 10 47 spacer 10248 liquid crystal molecule 10249 part 10301 substrate 10302 insulating film 10303 conductive layer 10304 insulating film 10305 semiconductor layer 10306 semiconductor layer 10307 conductive layer 10308 insulating film 10309 conductive layer 10310 alignment film 10312 alignment film 10314 light shielding film 10315 color filter 10316 substrate 10317 spacer 10318 Liquid crystal molecule 10331 Substrate 10332 Insulating film 10333 Conductive layer 10334 Insulating film 10335 Semiconductor layer 10336 Semiconductor layer 10337 Conductive layer 10338 Insulating film 10339 Conductive layer 10340 Alignment film 10342 Alignment film 10343 Conductive layer 10344 Light shielding film 10345 Color filter 10346 Substrate 10347 Spacer 10348 Liquid crystal molecule 10349 Insulating film 10401 Scan line 10402 Signal line 10403 Capacitor line 10404 Transistor 10405 Pixel electrode 10406 Pixel capacitor 10501 Scan line 10502 Video signal line 10503 Capacitor line 10504 Transistor 10505 Pixel electrode 10506 Pixel capacitor 10507 Orientation control protrusion 10511 Scan line 10512 Video signal line 10513 Capacitor line 10514 Transistor 10515 Pixel Electrode 10516 Pixel capacity 10517 Scanning line 10602 Video signal line 10603 Common electrode 10604 Transistor 10605 Pixel electrode 10611 Scan line 10612 Video signal line 10613 Common electrode 10614 Transistor 10615 Pixel electrode 20101 Backlight unit 20102 Diffuser plate 20103 Light guide plate 20104 Reflector plate 20105 Lamp reflector 20106 Light source Liquid Crystal Panel 20201 Backlight Unit 20202 Lamp Reflector 20203 Cold Cathode Tube 20211 Backlight Unit 20212 Lamp Reflector 20213 Light Emitting Diode 20221 Backlight Unit 20223 Light Emitting Diode 20224 Light Emitting Diode 20225 Light Emitting Diode 20231 Backlight Unit 20232 Lamp Reflector 20233 Light Emitting Diode 20234 Light emitting diode 20235 Light emitting diode 20300 Polarizing film 20301 Protective film 20302 Substrate film 20302 Film (Substrate film 20303 PVA polarizing film 20304 Substrate film 20305 Adhesive layer 20306 Release film 20401 Video signal 20402 Control Circuit 20403 Signal line driver circuit 20404 Scan line driver circuit 20405 Pixel unit 20406 Illumination means 20407 Power supply 20408 Drive circuit unit 20410 Scan line 20412 Signal line 20431 Shift register 20432 Latch 20433 Latch 20434 Level shifter 20435 Buffer 20441 Shift register 20442 Level shifter 20443 Buffer 20500 Backlight Unit 20501 Diffuser 20502 Light shield 20503 Lamp reflector 20504 Light source 20505 Light source 20510 Back light unit 20511 Diffuser plate 20512 Light shield 20513 Lamp reflector 20514 Light source 30101 Encoding circuit 30102 Frame memory 30103 Correction circuit 30104 DA conversion circuit 30112 Frame memory 301 3 correction circuit 30121 input voltage 30122 input voltage 30123 output luminance 30124 output luminance 30131 input video signal 30132 output video signal 30133 signal 30201 transistor 30202 auxiliary capacitor 30203 display element 30204 video signal line 30205 scanning line 30206 common line 30211 transistor 30212 auxiliary capacitor 30213 display Element 30214 Video signal line 30215 Scan line 30216 Common line 30217 Common line 30301 Diffusion plate 30302 Cold cathode tube 30311 Diffusion plate 30312 Light source 50100 Liquid crystal layer 50101 Substrate 50102 Substrate 50103 Polarizer 50104 Polarizer 50105 Electrode 50106 Electrode 50200 Liquid crystal layer 50201 Substrate 50202 Substrate 50203 Polarizing plate 50204 Polarizing plate 50205 Electrode Electrode 50210 Liquid crystal layer 50211 Substrate 50212 Substrate 50213 Polarizer 50214 Polarizer 50215 Electrode 50216 Electrode 50300 Liquid crystal layer 50301 Substrate 50302 Substrate 50303 Polarizer 50304 Polarizer 50305 Electrode 50306 Electrode 50310 Liquid crystal layer 50311 Substrate 50312 Substrate 50313 Polarizer 50314 Polarizer 50315 Electrode 50316 Electrode 50400 Liquid crystal layer 50401 Substrate 50402 Substrate 50403 Polarizing plate 50404 Polarizing plate 50405 Electrode 50406 Electrode 50410 Liquid crystal layer 50411 Substrate 50412 Substrate 50413 Polarizing plate 50414 Polarizing plate 50415 Electrode 50416 Electrode 50417 Insulating film 50501 Pixel electrode 50503 Pixel electrode 50501 Pixel electrode 50601 Pixel electrode 50611 Pixel electrode 0612 pixel electrode 50631 pixel electrode 50632 pixel electrode 50641 pixel electrode 50642 pixel electrode 50701 pixel electrode 50702 pixel electrode 50711 pixel electrode 50712 pixel electrode 50731 pixel electrode 50732 pixel electrode 50741 pixel electrode 50742 pixel electrode 100506 impurity region 110111 substrate 110112 insulating layer 110113 110114 Semiconductor layer 110115 Semiconductor layer 110116 Insulating film 110117 Gate electrode 110118 Insulating film 110119 Insulating film 110121 Side wall 110122 Mask 110123 Conductive film 110201 Substrate 110202 Insulating film 110203 Conductive layer 110204 Conductive layer 110205 Conductive layer 110206 Semiconductor layer 110207 Semiconductor layer 110208 Semiconductor layer 1102 9 insulating film 110210 insulating film 110211 conductive layer 110212 conductive layer 110220 transistor 110221 capacitor 110301 substrate 110302 insulating film 110303 conductive layer 110304 conductive layer 110306 semiconductor layer 110307 semiconductor layer 110308 semiconductor layer 110309 conductive layer 110310 conductive layer 1103111 conductive layer 110312 conductive layer 110320 Transistor 110321 Capacitance element 110401 Substrate 110402 Insulating film 110403 Conductive layer 110404 Conductive layer 110406 Semiconductor layer 110407 Semiconductor layer 110408 Semiconductor layer 110409 Conductive layer 110410 Conductive layer 110104 Conductive layer 110412 Insulating film 110420 Transistor 110421 Capacitor element 110501 Substrate 110502 Insulating film 11050 Conductive layer 110504 Conductive layer 110505 Impurity region 110506 Impurity region 110507 Impurity region 110508 LDD region 110509 LDD region 110510 Channel formation region 110511 Insulating film 110512 Conductive layer 110513 Conductive layer 110520 Transistor 110521 Capacitor element 130100 Rear projection display device 130101 Screen panel 130102 Speaker 130104 Operation switches 130110 Case 130111 Projector unit 130112 Mirror 130200 Front projection display device 130201 Projection optical system 130301 Light source unit 130302 Light source lamp 130303 Light source optical system 130304 Modulation unit 130305 Dichroic mirror 130306 Total reflection mirror 130308 Table Panel 130309 Prism 130310 Projection optical system 130400 Modulation unit 130401 Dichroic mirror 130402 Dichroic mirror 130403 Total reflection mirror 130404 Polarization beam splitter 130405 Polarization beam splitter 130406 Polarization beam splitter 130407 Display panel 130407 Reflection type display panel 130411 Projection optical system 130501 Dichroic mirror 130502 Dichroic mirror 130503 Red dichroic mirror 130504 Phase difference plate 130505 Color filter plate 130506 Micro lens array 130507 Display panel 130508 Display panel 130509 Display panel 130511 Projection optical system 180100 Display device 180101 Pixel unit 18010 Pixels 180,103 signal line driver circuit 180104 scan line driver circuit 180400 frame period 180,401 images 180,402 intermediate image 180412 intermediate image 180413 intermediate image 20514a source (R)
20514a Light source 20514b Light source (G)
20514b Light source 20514c Light source (B)
20514c Light source 502117 Projection 502118 Projection 900101 Display panel 900102 Pixel portion 900103 Scanning line driver circuit 900104 Signal line driver circuit 900111 Circuit board 900112 Control circuit 900113 Signal dividing circuit 900114 Connection wiring 900201 Tuner 900202 Video signal amplifier circuit 900203 Video signal processing circuit 900205 Audio signal amplifier circuit 900206 Audio signal processing circuit 900207 Speaker 900208 Control circuit 9000020 Input unit 900212 Control circuit 900213 Case division circuit 900301 Display screen 900303 Speaker 900304 Operation switch 900310 Charger 900312 Case 900313 Display unit 900316 Operation key 900317 Speaker unit 900401 display panel 900402 printed wiring board 900403 pixel portion 900404 scan line driver circuit 900405 scan line driver circuit 900406 signal line driver circuit 900407 Controller 900408 central processing unit (CPU)
9004009 Memory 900410 Power supply circuit 900411 Audio processing circuit 900412 Transmission / reception circuit 900413 Flexible printed circuit board (FPC)
900414 Interface (I / F) section 900415 Antenna port 900416 VRAM
900417 DRAM
900418 Flash memory 900419 Interface (I / F) unit 900420 Control signal generation circuit 900421 Decoder 900421 Decoder 900422 Register 900422 Temporary register 900423 Arithmetic circuit 9000042 RAM
900425 Input unit 9000042 Microphone 9000042 Speaker 9000042 Antenna 9000050 Display panel 9000051 FPC
900530 Housing 900531 Printed circuit board 9005002 Speaker 900533 Microphone 900534 Transmission / reception circuit 90000535 Signal processing circuit 90000536 Input means 90000537 Battery 90000539 Case 900600 Cellular phone 90000601 Main body (A)
900602 body (B)
90063 Housing 9000060 Operation switches 9000060 Microphone 9000060 Speaker 900607 Circuit board 9000060 Display panel (A)
900609 Display panel (B)
900610 Hinge 900711 Case 900712 Support base 900713 Display unit 900721 Main unit 900722 Display unit 900723 Image receiving unit 900724 Operation key 900725 External connection port 900726 Shutter 900731 Main unit 900732 Case 900733 Display unit 900734 Keyboard 900735 External connection port 900731 Main unit 900741 Main unit 900741 900743 Switch 900744 Operation key 9000074 Infrared port 9000075 Main body 9000075 Body 9000075 Display unit A
900774 Display B
900755 part 900075 operation key 9000075 speaker part 900761 main body 900762 display part 900763 earphone 900764 support part 900771 case 900772 display part 900773 speaker part 900774 operation key 900775 storage medium insertion part 900781 main body 900782 display part 900783 operation key 900784 speaker 900785 shutter 9 900771 Antenna 900810 Housing 900811 Display unit 900812 Remote control device 9000081 Speaker unit 900901 Display panel 900902 Unit bus 901001 Column 9010102 Display panel 901101 Car body 901102 Display panel 901201 Door 901202 Display panel 901203 Glass window 90120 Ceiling 901301 ceiling 901302 display panel 901,303 hinge part

Claims (2)

A first pixel electrode;
A second pixel electrode;
A third pixel electrode between the first pixel electrode and the second pixel electrode;
A liquid crystal display device having a common electrode,
The first pixel electrode has a first slit,
The second pixel electrode has a second slit,
The liquid crystal display device, wherein a direction of the first slit and a direction of the second slit are symmetric with respect to the third pixel electrode. In claim 1,
The third pixel electrode has a third slit and a fourth slit,
A liquid crystal display device, wherein a direction of the third slit is different from a direction of the third slit.

Images